Skip to main content

Full text of "Egyptian grammar : with table of signs, bibliography, exercises for reading and glossary"

See other formats


■CNJ 


:^=^0 


■CD 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/egyptiangrammarwOOermauoft 


5^ 


3^ 
niTiPTIAN  GRAMMAR 

WITH 

TABLE   OF  SIGNS,  BIBLIOGRAPHY, 
EXERCISES  FOR  READING 

AND 

GLOSSARY 

BY 

ADOLF  ERMAN. 

TRANSLATED 

BY 

JAMES  HENRY  BREASTED. 


WILLIAMS  AND  NOEGATE, 

U,    HENRIETTA    STREET,    COVENT    GARDEN,    LONDON 

AND  20,  SOUTH  FREDERICK  STREET,  EDINBURGH. 

1894. 


Authorized  Translation. 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE. 


As  the  outgrowth  of  practical  academic  instruction, 
this  book  is  designed  to  facilitate  as  far  as  possible, 
for  the  beginner,  the  acquisition  of  the  Egyptian  lan- 
guage and  writing,  and  is  also  intended  for  those  who 
must  dispense  with  the  assistance  of  a  teacher  in 
the  study.  It  aims  to  acquaint  the  learner  with  those 
grammatical  phenomena  which  are  well  established, 
and  which  must  guide  us  in  the  interpretation  of  texts. 
It  further  aims  to  afford  him  as  correct  a  picture  as 
possible  of  the  general  structure  of  the  Egyptian 
language. 

For  those  who  are  familiar  with  the  peculiar 
situation  of  Egyptian  philology,  I  need  not  premise 
with  the  remark,  that  something  else  is  necessary  to 
the  study  of  Egyptian  grammar  if  it  is  to  be  at  all 
a  fruitful  study,  viz.  the  simultaneous  acquisition  of 
Coptic.  One  who  is  not  familiar  with  this,  the  only 
phase  of  the  Egyptian  language  which  we  really  under- 
stand, will  never  properly  comprehend  it  in  its  older 


IV  acthor's  preface. 

periods,  nor,  at  the  most  ever  attain  more  than  a  super- 
ficial capacity  for  reading  Egyptian  texts  by  rote.  I 
would  therefore  request  the  student  of  my  book  to 
work  through  Steindorff's  Coptic  Grammar — a  book 
parallel  with  this — and  especially,  to  note  also  the 
constant  cross  references  in  both. 

The  selection  and  limitation  of  the  grammatical 
material  offered  especial  difficulty.  The  Egyptian 
language  as  we  find  it,  presents  quite  different  stages 
of  development,  and  even  leaving  Late  Egyptian  and 
still  later  idioms  out  of  account,  fifteen  hundred 
years  of  the  history  of  the  language  still  remain  to 
be  dealt  with.  These  difficulties  have  been  surmoun- 
ted by  relegating  to  certain  paragraphs  (A  and  B) 
the  peculiarities  of  the  ancient  religious  literature 
and  the  inscriptions  of  the  old  empire  on  the  one  hand, 
and  those  of  the  popular  language  of  the  middle 
empire  on  the  other.  The  paragraphs  therefore  deal 
with  what  may  be  caUed  the  classic  language,  the 
language  of  the  inscriptions  and  poems  of  the  middle 
empire,  with  which  the  idiom  later  employed  as  the 
learned  and  official  language  is  practically  identical. 
The  material  in  the  chrestomathy  is  also  taken  from 
texts  of  this  character  in  order  that  the  beginner  may 
accustom  himself  to  their  linguistic  usage  and  espe- 
cially to  their  consistent  orthography.    I  have  tried 


author's  preface. 

to  facilitate  the  understanding  of  the  chrestomathy 
by  division  into  sentences,  clear  print  and  explana- 
tory remarks. 

In  the  use  of  the  book  it  has  seemed  to  me  that 
the  beginner  should  first  familiarize  himself  with  the 
most  important  paragraphs,  designated  by  an  aste- 
risk, and  should  then  work  through  the  first  part  of 
the  Chrestomathy.  If  in  doing  this  he  not  only  looks 
up  the  paragraphs  indicated,  but  also  tries  to  form 
a  connected  idea  of  the  sections  of  the  grammar  thus 
referred  to,  he  will  then  be  sufficiently  advanced  to 
take  hold  of  the  second  part  of  the  chrestomathy, 
where  as  a  rule  he  must  recognize  the  grammatical 
forms  for  himself.  The  appendix  to  the  chrestomathy 
contains  the  most  important  of  the  formularies  from 
the  list  which  must  now  be  mastered,  in  order  to 
understand  Egyptian  inscriptions  correctly. 

It  further  behoves  me  to  state,  that  in  this  book, 
much  which  is  not  so  designated  undoubtedly  belongs 
to  Steindorff  and  Sethe.  But  we  have  so  often  dis- 
cussed these  things  among  ourselves,  that  we  could  not 
separate  our  "intellectual  property"  even  if  we  deemed 
it  at  all  important  to  do  so. 

SiJDENDE,  August  IQth,  3  893. 

Adolf  Erman. 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE. 

The  peculiar  difficulties  experienced  by  the  trans- 
lator, in  transferring  into  English  the  results  of  the 
grammatical  investigations  of  his  honored  teacher, 
Prof.  Erman,  render  a  word  of  explanation  necessary. 
These  difficulties  were  due  firstly,  to  the  unique  charac- 
ter of  the  language  investigated,  and  secondly  to  the  fact 
that  the  new  science  of  Egyptian  Grammar,  as  it  has 
been  created  by  the  German  grammatical  school  in 
the  last  fifteen  years,  does  not  yet  exist  in  English.* 

*  The  above  statement  may  seem  strange  to  one  who  knows 
that  the  grammar  of  Le  Page  Renouf  was  reedited  in  1889  ("An 
Elementary  Grammar  of  the  Ancient  Egyptian  Language"  by  P. 
Le  Page  Renouf,  Bagster  &  Sons,  London,  2nd.  ed.).  But  this 
venerable  scholar,  the  Nestor  of  English  Egyptologists,  has  not 
followed  the  modern  development  in  Egyptian  grammar.  His  book 
is  therefore  entirely  obsolete.  Ex.  gr.  on  p.  1  jou  will  find  the 
Egyptian  consonants  «,  i",  C  &c.  classified  under  a  list  of  vowels! 
and  the  statement  added,  that  the  "vowels  were  very  commonly 
omitted",  and  this  about  a  system  of  orthography  exclusively 
consonantal  (with  the  exception  of  one  or  two  doubtful  endings). 
On  p.  50  the  In  of  the  tn-form  of  the  verb  is  stated  to  be  inse- 
parable from  the  subject  and  separable  from  the  verb,  an  assertion 
in  direct  contradiction  of  the  facts,  and  due  to  a  confusion  with 


translator's  preface.  VII 

There  were  therefore  no  termini  technici  of  Egyptian 
grammar  ready  at  hand  in  English.  The  ready 
facility  with  which  the  German  lends  itself  to  the 
expression  of  compound  ideas  in  one  word,  is  enti- 
rely foreign  to  English  and  the  peculiar  phenomena 
for  which  a  felicitous  compound  was  always  ready  in 
the  flexile  German  were  sometimes  the  despair  of  the 


the  particle  In.  Or  turn  to  p.  18  where  the  absolute  pronoun  sHs 
called  a  suffix,  the  author  being  misled  by  the  confusion  purely 
orthographic  in  late  and  corrupt  texts,  between  st,  sn  and  s,  for 
in  the  classic  language  st  is  always  used  absolutely,  i.  e.  separably. 
In  the  same  chapter  one  searches  in  vain  for  any  paradigm  of  the  old 
absolute  pronouns.  Those  of  the  1  c.  and  3  m.  s.  are  incidentally 
mentioned,  the  latter  being  called  an  "independent  personal  pro- 
noun", but  the  2  m.  s.,  2  f.  s.,  3  f.  s.,  and  all  the  plurals  are 
wanting.  But  to  enumerate  forms  and  phenomena  unknown  to 
this  grammar  would  be  to  repeat  a  large  portion  of  the  work 
here  translated.  Further,  though  Mr.  Le  Page  Renouf  has 
stated  in  his  "Concluding  Observations"  that  the  Egyptian  lan- 
guage suffered  many  changes  during  its  enormously  long  history, 
no  hint  of  these  changes  appears  in  the  treatment  of  grammatical 
forms  and  syntax.  The  entire  treatise  is  therefore  as  reasonable 
as  would  be  a  grammar,  which,  without  any  distinction  of  time, 
should  present  the  forms  of  Latin  and  its  offspring  Italian  in 
heterogeneous  combination  from  the  Augustan  age  down  to  the 
present  day.  If  the  end  of  the  period  thus  included  were  two 
thousand  years  removed  from  us,  the  parallel  would  be  complete 
and  it  could  be  stated  with  impunity  that  the  Latin  article  was 
il  and  that  the  Italian  nouns  were  comprised  in  five  terminationally 
inflected  declensions.  In  France  the  new  science  is  equally  dis- 
regarded, as  the  recent  "Manuel  de  la  Langue  egyptienne"  of 
Victor  Loret  may  testify. 


VIII  translator's  preface. 

translator.  It  is  hoped,  however,  that  such  terms  have 
been  made  at  least  intelligible  to  the  English  reading 
student  and  the  indulgence  of  the  reader  is  craved 
wherever  felicitous  English  has  been  sacrificed  for  the 
sake  of  clearness.  One  word  has  been  coined,  viz. 
"substantivized",  being  simply  the  transferred  German 
"substantivirte".  With  the  translation  "uninflected 
passive"  for  the  German  "endungsloses  Passiv"  the 
writer  was  not  at  all  satisfied,  but  could  find  nothing 
better  and  after  consultation  with  the  author,  it 
stands.  The  term  "pseudoparticiple"  is  another  di- 
rectly transferred  word  for  which  nothing  better  could 
be  found;  it  is,  both  in  conjugation  and  meaning, 
very  similar  to  the  Assyrian  "permansive",  but  to  have 
used  this  term  would  have  been  a  liberty  not  justified 
in  translating. 

It  only  remains  to  be  hoped  that  the  results, 
achieved  within  the  last  fifteen  years,  which  render  the 
grammatical  structure  of  the  ancient  Egyptian  tolera- 
bly intelligible,  and  which  are  herewith  presented  for 
the  first  time  in  English,  may  be  as  interesting  and  in- 
structive to  the  English  and  American  student  as  they 
have  been  to  the  translator,  from  the  lips  of  the  man 
to  whom  they  are  almost  solely  due. 

Berlin,  Nov.   11th,  1893. 

James  Henky  Breasted. 


CONTENTS. 

GRAMMAR. 

§§ 

INTRODUCTION 1—3 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PHONETICS. 

1.  In  general 4—  12 

2.  Phonetic  Signs. 

a.  The  Alphabet 13—27 

h.  Special  Points  in  Phonetics 28 — 31 

c.  Syllabic  Signs 32 — 35 

3.  Ideograms 36 — 44 

4.  Determinatives 45 — 52 

5.  Orthographj'. 

a.  In  general 53 

h.  Orthography  of  the  Ideograms 54 — 5^ 

c.  Purely  phonetic  Orthography 59 — 6^ 

d.  Abbreviations 63 — 68 

e.  Inversion  of  the  Order  of  Words 69 

f.  Unusual  Styles   of  Orthography 70 — 71 

G.  Rules  for  Transliteration 72 

PRONOUNS. 

1.  Personal  Pronoun. 

a.  Personal  suffixes 73 — 79 

&.  Old  Absolute  Pronoun 80—83 

c.  Later  Absolute  Pronoun 84 

d.  Expression  for  "self 85 


^ 


2.  Demonstrative  Pronoun. 

a.  Forms  with  m.  p-  i.  t- 86—90 

h.  Forms  with  n- 91 — 94 

NOUNS. 

1.  Substantives. 

a.  Expression  of  Gender 95 — 98 

h.  Forms  of  the  Substantive 99 — 103 

c.  Expression  of  Number. 

a.  Plural 104—106 

/?.  Dual 107—109 

y.  Use  of  the  Singular,  Plural,  Dual.        .     .     .  110—112 

r?.  The  Article 113—116 

e.  The  Absolute  Substantive 117 — 118 

f.  Apposition  and  Coordination 119 — 121 

g.  The  Genetive. 

a.  Direct  Genetive 122 — 124 

yS.  Genetive  with  n 125—127 

2.  Adjectives 

a.  Adjectives  without  Ending 128—  131 

h.  Adjectives  in  ? 132 — 137 

c.  Appendix  {ir'i,  Imy,  ns) 138 — 139 

3.  Numerals. 

a.  Beal  Numerals 140 — 145 

h.  Appendix  to  the  Numeral 146—147 

VERBS. 

1.  In  general. 

a.  The  Classes  of  the  Verb. 

a.  Usual  Classes 148—154 

^.  Rare  Classes  and  Irregular  Verbs 155 — 160 

y.  The  Causative 161 

b.  Voice 162 

c.  Expression  of  the  Subject  (Inflection).     .     .     .  163—169 

2.  Usual  Inflection. 

a.  In  general 170 — 171 


CONTENTS.  XI 

§§ 

6.  The  Formation  sdmf. 

a.  The  Forms  of  the  First  Group. 

A.  Its  Formation 172 — 173 

B.  Use  as  Indicative 174 — 176 

C.  In  the  Conditional  sentence 177 — 178 

D.  As  a  Subjunctive 179 — 180 

E.  In  a  Final  Clause 181 

F.  As  an  Optative 182 — 183 

/3.  The  Forms  of  the  Second  Group. 

A.  Its  Formation 184—186 

B.  Use  as  an  Indicative 187 

C.  In  Conditional  Clauses 188 

D.  Dependent  upon  Verbs 189 

E.  Dependent  upon  Prepositions 190 

y.  Appendix 191 — 193 

c.  The  M-Form  sdmnf. 

a.  Its  Formation 194 — 195 

/8.  Its  Use 196—199 

d.  The  <»-Form  sdminf. 200 — 203 

e.  The  /^r-Form  sdmhrf. 204—205 

3.  The  Uninflected  Passive 206—207 

4.  Old  Inflection.     (Pseudoparticiple.) 

a.  Its  Formation 208—215 

h.  Its  Use. 

a.  In  the  Active-Transitive  Form 216 

^.  In  the  Passive- Intransitive  Form 217 — 219 

5.  Compounds  with  Forms  of  the  Usual  Inflection. 

a.  Introduced  hy  "it  is". 

a.  The  Forms  iw  sdmf  and  tw  sdmnf.      .    .    .  220 — 222 

^.  With  the  Auxiliary  Verb  wn 223 

b.  With  Double  Subject. 

a.  iwfsdmf. 224—227 

/3.  The  Forms  tcnf  sdmf  and  icntnf  sdmf.    .    .  228 

y.  The  Form  Jjrf  sdmf. 229 


XII  CONTENTS. 

§§ 

c.  With  a  Verb  of  Motion. 

a.  With  ChCn  and  ChC 230—234 

/3.  With  In,  prn  and  Iw 235—236 

(I.  The  Form  sdmf  piv 237 

6.  Compounds  with  ir  "make" 238—239 

7.  Compounds  with  the  Pseudoparticiple  or  Infinitive. 

a.  Without  the  Auxiliary  Verb  (Improper  Nominal 

Sentence) 240—245 

b.  Introduced  by  Auxiliary  Verbs. 

a.  With  the  Auxiliary  Verb  Iw 246—249 

/3.  With  the  Auxiliary  Verb  wn 250 — 252 

8.  Compounds  with  r  and  the  Infinitive 253 — 264 

9.  The  Imperative 255—257 

10.  The  Nominal  Forms  of  the  Verb. 

a.  Participles 258—261 

b.  Infinitive. 

a.  Its  Formation 262—268 

/3.  Its  Substantive  Nature 269—271 

y.  Its  Use 272—281 

c.  Substantivized  Forms. 

a.  In  general 282 

/3.  To  Denote  the  Action  Itself. 283—288 

y.  To  Denote  a  Person  or  an  Object.       .     .     .  288—292 

d.  Verbal  Adjective 293—295 

ii.  Appendix  to  the  Verb:  the  Object 296—299 

PARTICLES. 

1.  Adverbs 300 

2.  Prepositions. 

a.  In  general.      . 301 — 305j 

b.  Simple  Prepositions 306 — Z14 

c.  Compound  Prepositions 315—3171 


CONTENTS.  XIII 

§§ 

3.  Conjunctions. 

a.  In  general 318 

b.  Enclitic  Conjunctions 319 — 322 

c.  Non-enclitic  Conjunctions 323 — 326 

THE  SENTENCE. 

1.  The  Nominal  Sentence. 

a.  The  Simple  Nominal  Sentence 327 — 331 

b.  The  Nominal  Sentence  Introduced  hy  iw  and  wn.  332 — 333 

c.  The  Nominal  Sentence  with  pw 334 — 335 

2.  The  Parts  of  the  Sentence. 

a.  The  Order  of  Words 336—342 

6.  Emphasis. 

a.  In  geneial 343 

/3,  Without  Introduction 344 — 346 

y.  With  ir,  Ir-,  r  and  in 347 — 350 

C.  The  Ellipses 351—355 

3.  Kinds  of  Sentence. 

a.  Interrogative  Sentence 356 — 363 

b.  Negative  Sentence. 

a.  With  n  and  nn 364 — 372 

/3.  The  Circumlocutions  with  im-,  m,  tm-.    .     .  373—377 

y.  The  Negative  Adjective 378—380 

c.  Dependent  and  Substantivized  Clauses.     .     .     .  381 — 383 

d.  Temporal  Clauses 384 — 385 

e.  Conditional  Clauses 386 — 391 

f.  Relative  Clauses. 

a.  Without  Connective 392 — 393 

)3.  With  the  Substantivized  Verb 394 — 399 

y.  With  the  Passive  Participle 400 

8.  With  the  Adjective  nt'i 401 — 404 

Page 

TABLE  OF  SIGNS I7i 

BIBLIOGEAPHY i94 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

Pace 

EXP]RCISES  FOR  READING. 
FIRST  PART. 

1.  Canalizing  of  the  First  Cataract 3* 

2.  From  the  Address  of  Thutmosis'  I.  to  the  Priests  of 

Abydos 4* 

3.  Medicinal  Receipts 6* 

4.  Cosmetics  and  Domestic  Receipts 8* 

0.  From  the  Proverbs  of  Ptah-hotep 11* 

SECOND  PART. 

1.  From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe 17* 

2.  From  the  Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant 28* 

APPENDIX. 

1.  A  Writing  of  Thutmosis'  I.  to  the  Authorities  of  El- 

phantine. 37* 

2.  Examples  of  the  Royal  Titularies 39* 

3.  Examples  of  Grave  Formulae.       .     .         40* 

GLOSSARY 42* 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

AZ.:  Zeitschrift  fiir  agyptische  Sprache  (Bibliography  C.) 

Br.  Gr.  W. :  Brugsch,  Die  agyptische  Gi aberwelt,  Leipzig  1868. 

Br.  Wb. :  Brugsch,  Worterbuch  (Bibliography  Ab). 

Butler:  Papyrus  Butler  (Exercises  for  Heading  p.  28*). 

C. :  Steindorff,  Coptic  Grammar. 

Copt. :  Coptic. 

Eb.:  Papyrus  Ebers  (Bibliography  Be). 

Feminine. 
LE.:  Late  Egyptian. 

LD.:  Lepsius,  Denkmaler  (Bibliography  Ba). 
Leps.  Ausw. :  Lepsius,  Auswahl  (Bibliography  Ba). 
M.  or  Merenre':  Pyi-amid  of  Merenre'  (BibUography  Bf). 
m, :  masculine. 

Mar.  Ab.:  Mariette  Abydos  (Bibliography  Bd). 
Mar.  Cat.    d'Ab.:    Mariette,    Catalogue    des    monuments   (Biblio- 
graphy Bd). 

Mar.  Mast. :  Mariette,  Mastabas  (Bibliography  Bd). 
Math.  Hdb.:  Eisenlohr,  Mathemat.  Handbuch  (Bibliography  Be). 
m.  e.:  Middle  Empire, 
n.  e.:  New  Empire. 

. :  Old  Empire. 
Peasant :  Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant  (Exercises  for  Reading  p.  28*). 
P.  L,  or  Pepy  I. :  Pyramid  of  Pepy  I.  (Bibliography  Bf). 
Prisse:  Papyrus  Prisse  (Bibliography  Be). 
Pyr. :  Pyramid  Texts  (Bibliography  Bf). 

RIH. :  Eouge,  Inscriptions  hi§roglyphiques  (Bibliography  Ba). 
3in.:  Sinuhe  (Exercises  for  Beading  p.  17*). 
Siut:  Griffith,  Inscriptions  of  Siut  (Bibliography  Bd). 
Totb.:  Totenbuch,  ed.  NaviUe  (Bibliography  Bf). 
Una:  Inschrift  des  Wni  (AZ.  1882,  Isq.). 
Westc. :  Papyrus  Westcar  (Bibliography  Be). 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Egyptian  language  is  related  to  the  Se-  1. 
mitic  languages  (Hebrew,  Arabic,  Aramaic  &c.),  to 
the  East-African  languages  (Bischari,  Galla,  Somali 
and  others),  and  to  the  Berber  languages  of  North- 
Africa.  The  language  of  its  oldest  monuments  belongs 
as  far  back  as  the  fourth  millennium  B.  C.  and  did 
not  entirely  die  out  until  three  centuries  ago. 

We    distinguish   the   following    chief  periods  of  2. 
the  language: 

1.  The  Old-Egyptian^  the  oldest  language  treated 
in  this  book,  the  employment  of  which  as  the  learned, 
literary  language  continued  into  Roman  times.  Pe- 
culiarities of  its  oldest  form  (found  in  the  so-called 
"pyramid  texts")  are  noted  in  the  remarks  "A"  under 

[the  different  paragraphs. 

2.  3.  The  Middle-Egyptian^  the  popular  language 
[of  the  middle  empire  and  the  Late-Egyptian ,  the  po- 

)ular  language  of  the  new  empire ;  the  most  important 
livergences  found  in  this  period  are  noted  in  the  re- 

Erman,  Egypt,  gramm.  \ 


2  INTRODUCTION.    2.    3. 

marks  "B".  It  is  more  fully  treated  in:  Erman 
Sprache  des  Papyrus  Westcar  (Gottingen  1889)  and 
Erman,  Neuagyptische  Grammatik  (Leipzig  1880). 

^.  The  Demotic^  the  popular  language  of  the  last 
pre-Christian  centuries,  written  in  a  peculiar  ortho- 
graphy. Cf.  "Grammaire  demotique",  Brugsch  (Ber- 
lin 1855) — of  course  obsolete. 

5.  The    Coptic^    the   language    of    the    Christian 
Egyptians  written  with  Greek  letters.    Cf.  the  Coptic 
grammar,  parallel  with  this  book,  by  Steindorff,  which 
I  hereafter  cite  as  "C". 
3.  Since  the  idioms  cited,  from  1 — 4,  are  all  written 

without  vowels,  (cf.  §  14)  the  Coptic  affords  the  only 
possibility  of  understanding  the  structure  of  the  Egyp-  i 
tian  language.  It  is  therefore  necessary,  even  for  the- 
beginner,  to  acquire  a  knowledge  of  Coptic. — Only 
one  who  is  already  proficient  in  Old-Egyptian  and 
Coptic  should  venture  into  Late-Egyptian  or  Demotic. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PHONETICS. 
1.  IN  GENERAL. 

*4.  Hieroglyphic  writing  consists  of  pictures  of  men, 
animals,  plants,  &c.;  their  number  is  very  large, 
though  only  about  500  are  in  frequent  use.  The  alpha- 
betic and  syllabic  signs  of  §i5 13,  33 — -35,  and  the 
determinatives  of  §  47  are  sufficient  at  the  start  for 


ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PHONETICS.  1.  IN  GENERATi.  5 — 7. 


the   beginner;    the    other   signs    he   will   best   learn 
through  usage. 

The  writing  properly  runs  from  right  to  left,  and  5. 
only  exceptionally  (when  employed  for  certain  deco- 
rative purposes)  from  left  to  right;  nevertheless,  for 
reasons  of  convenience  we  always  write  it  in  the  latter 
direction.  Whether  an  inscription  is  to  be  read  from 
the  right  or  the  left,  is  easily  determined  by  the 
heads  of  the  animal  and  human  figures,  which  always 
face  toward  the  beginning. 

The  signs    stand  in  part  vertically  as  M  j  H^'  ^• 
in  part  horizontally  _,f_  <cz>  'wwvv  ^^;  almost  the 
only  ones  used  in  both  positions  are  the  especially 

'requent  signs  <«=>  or   A  Ci  "great"   and  ^^-^  or  } 
'cf.  §  47).    The  frequent  abbreviation  ^:=^  |  mBC-hrw 

"justified"  is  preferably  written  or  ]  |. 

Caligraphy  demanded  that  a  number  of  conti-  7. 
guous  signs  should  together  form  an    approximate 
rectangle.    Hence  the  words  rpCfi  "hereditary  prince", 
smr    tvQ'i  "nearest   friend"    and    /?s    "praise",    could 

only  be  written  as  follows       d      1  t  "^        l   V 


,pf--rr 


would 


arrangements  like  <:::> 

)e  barbarous. — At  the  present  day  we  do  not  always 
ilosely  follow  this  caligraphic  law ;  but  to  the  Egyptian 

A* 


4        ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PHONETICS.   1.  IN  GENERAL.  8.  9. 

it  was  so  important,  that  out  of  respect  for  it,  he 
sometimes  departed  from  the  correct  orthography. 
For  example,  in  almost  all  cases  he  wrote  for  sCJi 

"prince",  hCh  "to  play"  and  rmt_  "man"  P     \shc,  \  J 

i^&c,   ^  r^,  because  the  correct  writings    L     "K'X- o 

Jl'  "^—-^  ^<.  ° — ^  were  unpleasing.  Similarly  ^^ 
is  often  written  for  the  more  correct  but  unpleasing 
rvt  and  for  5^;^=_  hft. 


*8.  It  is  customary  to  sketch  the  hieroglyphs  exactly, 
only  in  large  ornamental  inscriptions;  in  most  cases 
it  is  regarded  as  sufficient  to  outline  them  in  a  con- 
ventional manner  with  a  few  strokes.  The  beginner 
should  take  as  his  pattern  practically  the  writing  in 
Brugsch's  Dictionary,  and  should  especially  familiarize 
thimself  with  the  abbreviations  for  the  different  birds 
there  employed. 
9.  From  the  earliest  times  the  individual  signs  were 
very  much  shortened  and  rounded  off,  when  written 
upon  Egyptian  paper.  We  have  accustomed  ourselves , 
to  contrast  these  abbreviated  hieroglyphs  as  a  sepa- 
rate writing  —  the  so-called  "hieratic"  —  with  the 
writing  of  the  monuments.  This  is  however  in- 
correct, for  they  have  no  other  points  of  distinction 
than  are  presented  by  our  printed  and  written  letters. 


2.     PHONETIC    SIGNS.      a.    THE    ALPHABET.    10 — 13.  5 

A  knowledge    of  the   Hieratic  is  not  an  immediate 
necessity  for  the  beginner. 

The  hieratic  writing  is  subdivided  further  into  10. 
two  varieties,  a  more  angular  uncial,  in  which  the 
individual  signs  remain  for  the  most  part  separated, 
and  a  more  rapid  cursive,  which  often  contracts  an 
entire  word  into  one  ligature.  It  was  this  cursive 
writing,  out  of  which  the  Demotic  (cf.  §  2, 4)  finally  grew. 

The  hieroglyphic  signs  fall  into  three  classes  ac-  11*. 
cording  to  their  meaning: 

1.  Phonetic  signs,  which  are  alphabetic  or  syllabic. 

-2.  Ideograms,  which  represent  a  certain  word,  but 
are  also  very  often  employed  for  another  word  having 
the  same  consonants  as  the  first. 

3.  So-called  determinatives,  i.  e.  signs  placed  after 
a  word,  to  indicate  its  meaning  in  a  general  way. 

As  may   be  seen  from  the  table  of  signs  these  12. 
classes  are  often  not  to  be  sharply  defined,  for  ori- 
ginal determinatives  pass  over  into  ideograms    and 
original  ideograms  into  syllabic  signs. 


2.  PHONETIC  SIGNS. 
a.    THE  ALPHABET. 

The  alphabet  (the  arrangement  of  which  is  mod-  13*. 
em)  is  as  follows: 


2.  PHONETIC    SIGNS.       «.    THE    ALPHABET.      14. 


J 


h 


i     (Eagle)  ©  1 

II     t     (Reedleaf)  ^— j^ 

__fl  c     ('Ajin)  -^ 


UP  A     k 

^  f  ^==^  k 

AAAftAA       n  O  t 


"1"" 


To  these  are  further  to  be  added  two  secondary 
signs : 

(j(]y  «  • 

B.  Since  the  »ew  empire  (s  is  also  written  for  w,  /         for 
tw  and  %/  for  n. 

14*.  Our  transliteration  of  these  signs  must  be  regarded 
only  as  an  approximate  equivalent  of  the  respective 
sounds;  but  by  means  of  the  Coptic  (cf.  C.  §  15)  and 


2.   PHONETIC    SIGNS.      «.    THE    ALPHABET.       15.    16.  7 

the  manner  in  which  Semitic  words  are  transcribed 
in  Egyptian,  and  Egyptian  words  in  Semitic,  it  is  an 
established  fact  that  all  signs  represent  consonants. 
The  vowels,  just  as  in  Semitic  writing,  are  not  in- 
dicated.— For  the  exceptional  use  of  some  few  con- 
sonants for  the  indication  of  certain  vocalic  endings 
cf.  §§  15  —  16;  18;  on  W  ^  cf.  §  27. 

i  probably  corresponds  approximately  to  ii.  15** 
But  in  many  words    n^  early  became  i,    a  pronun- 
ciation,   often   indicated   by   the   addition   of   uU  y, 
6-  g-  m  ^.    ^    ^^  "husband"  (*ha^),  since  the  n.  e. 

written  ra ^^ ^^^  ^^V  ^'  ®-  *^"J^  ^^pt.  g Al  (cf. 
C§  15  a,  2). — In  the  later  syllabic  writing  (cf.  §  70) 
^^v     is  also  used  for  indication  of  a  vowel. 

[1  I  etymologically  corresponds  to  i  and  in  many  16*. 

words  always  remained  a  i,  e.  g.  (1^  It  "father",  copt. 

EICDT.     But  with  most  words  it  was  early  lost,  cf. 

(1  ^^  irp  "wine",  copt.  hoTT  (from  *ierp),  or  (J 

imn  copt.  AMOyN  "Amon"  (from  *^mon,    Cf.  C§  15  a, 

1  and  Rem.) — In  certain  endings  (1  was  used  in  the 

oldest  orthography  to  indicate  an  i,  which  the  later 
orthography  indicates  by  "^  (cf.  §  27), 


8  2.   PHONETIC    SIGNS,      ffl.    THE    ALPHARET.    17 — 22, 

*17.  - — a  c  corresponds  to  Semitic  y  and  this  pronun- 
ciation was  very  long  preserved ;  but  in  Coptic  it  has 
disappeared. — Cf.  C§  15  Rem. 

♦18.  \:>  w  corresponds  to   Semitic   1,    Copt,    oy;    in 

the  syllabic  orthography  (Cf.  §  70)  and  in  a  few  end- 
ings, ^  is  also  used  to  indicate  a  vowel  (something 
like  u). 

19.  2i\^=>-  /about  corresponded  to  our  English  /";  Qj? 
to  the  Semitic  S.— Cf.  C§  12bc. 

20.  <=^  r^  represented  /  as  well  as  r,  cf.  C  §  8.  In 
certain  words  aaaaaa  n  also  was  probably  pronounced 
like  an  /;  C§  8a,  2. 

2j^  ru  h  is  Heb.  n,  arab.  ».  P  h  and  O  h  differ  like 
arab.  (something  like  M)  and  •  (something  like 
German  cli  in  ach)\  nevertheless  in  many  words  ©  h 
appears  to  have  also  possessed  a  softer  sound,  for  it 
interchanges  with  s. —  ^-=>  was  originally  a  special 
sound,  standing  very  near  to  ® ;  but  both  were  so  early 
merged  into  one  sound  that  we  transliterate  them  with 
one  and  the  same  sign  h.    Cf.  C§  14. 

'22,  ~~*^~  ^^^  '  were  likewise  originally  different 
sounds;  but  they  were  also  so  early  merged  into  one 
sound  that  we  transliterate  them  both  with  the  same 
sign  s.  czszi]  s  corresponds  to  it  our  sh.    Cf.  C§  13. 


2.    PHONETIC    SIGNS.       U.   THE    ALPHABET.       23 27.  9 

z]  k  corresponds  to  p,  ^C3^  ^  to  d;  S  ^  is  a  sound  23. 
very  near  to  p,  but  not  to  be  defined  more  closely. 
Cf.C§  10,24. 

<^  t  corresponds  to  Semitic  f\ ;  s=  /  is  a  special  24» 
modification    of  the  same  sound,  which  must  have 
sounded  about  like  o  in  the  n.  e.    But  at  a  very  early 
period  s=5  had,  in  most  words  already  passed  over 
ints  ^.    Cf.  C§  11a,  2. 

e^i^i  d  corresponds  for  the  most  part  to  Semitic  25. 
t3 :  'W^  i?  is  a  special  modification  of  the  same  sound, 


which  must  have  sounded  something  like  at.    But  in 
most  words  'W^  very  early  passed  into  c=^3.  In  the 

latest   period    <:=^>   becomes   t,  so  that  it  coincides 
with  ^  in  Copt.    Cf.  C§  11a,  4. 

{1(1  is  still  the  indication  of  two  (I's  in  the  oldest  26*. 

texts,  e.  g.  Ill  (In  ms^Y  (something  like  *mesioi  "I  bear", 

cf.  WiUy  msis  i.  e.  *mesios  "she  bears").  From  the  m.  e. 

down  it  is  written  for  (j,  in  so  far  as  this  has  remained 

■1,  (cf.  §  16),  only,  however,  at  the  end  of  word  stems  and 
in  certain  endings ;  we  then  transliterate  it  with  y. 

N\  i'  is   a  sign  used  since  the  m.  e.  for  the  fre-  27*. 
quently   recurring  grammatical   ending  i;  it  cannot 
stand  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word. 
Concerning  its  origin  cf.  §  108. 


10       2.  PHONETIC  SIGNS,   b.  PHONETICS.    C.  SYLLABIC  SINGS.    28 — 32. 

b.     SPECIAL  POINTS  IN  PHONETICS. 

28.  Certain  sounds,  for  which  a  sign  is  wanting,  are 
expressed  by  a  combination  of  several.  Such  is  a 
kind  of  <^:>   r  occurring  as  the  final  letter  of  many 

words,  which  interchanges  with   [1   i  and   is  written 

<^^^^(1;  and  further  the   combination  and  (1 

for  initial a- 

29.  The  weakness  of  the  breathing  ^^  i  produces 

peculiar  phenomena.  In  many  words  it  stands,  some- 
times as  second,  sometimes  as  third  consonant;  t^m 
and  mi  "pleasant",  k:$m  and  km^  "create";  tvh:^  "co- 
lumn" and  rv^hi  "hall  of  columns"  &c.  Along  with 
these  occur  forms  like  km:$m  with  Ami  "create",  sm^m 
with  sm9  "kill",  wh^h  with  wh^  "seek";  cf.  §  157.  In 
very  many  words  i  was  also  early  lost.  —  Similar 
phenomena  appear  sometimes  with  (I  t  also. 

30.  A  further  interchange  is  ss,  ss  and  s;  also  hs  and 
sh,  e.  g.  ssp,  ssp  and  §p  "receive",  ss9  and  s^i  "wise", 
shtn  and  hsm  "holy  of  holies". 

31.  Remarkable  is  the  writing  of  [{'='  it  "father"  (copt. 
EIODT)  which  since  the  oldest  times  appears  also  as 

c.     SYLLABIC  SIGNS. 

32.  Along  with  the  simple  consonants,  syllabic  signs 
were  also  used  which,  according  to  §  40  have  become 


I 


2.   PHONETIC    SIGNS.      C.    SYLLABIC   SIGNS.       33.    34.  11 

pure  phonetic  signs  from  original  ideograms.  Thus 
•^^,  really  an  ideogram  for  wr  ''great",  appears  as  a 
syllabic  sign  in  swri  "drink",  wrs  "spend  time",  writ 
„anoint"  &c. ;  i^^^^,  really  an  ideogram  for  mn  "re- 
main", appears  as  syllabic  sign  in  hsmn  "natron",  mnli 
"wax"  etc.  For  further  examples  cf.  the  list  of 
hieroglyphs. 

The    syllabic   signs,    whose   second  consonant  is  33*. 
^^,   i,  are  of  importance  for  the  beginner,  for  such 

syllables  for  the  most  part  must  be  written  with 
these  signs.     To  be  noted  are: 

--«      l^vs       I  *^      U «      J.  i^ 


{] 


TV^        y  mS         ^  sB  O    t^ 

&i  #^i  LToTsi  r^^tS 


Of  these  kB  and  tB  occur  also  in  syllabic  writing 
(^C3:^^^^5^^^^)  occasionally  also  hB\  with  all  the 
others  the  syllabic  sign  must  be  used.  The  rare  ex- 
ceptions (like  jn^  in  s&i  "door"  and  dhB  "restore") 

probably    indicate   peculiar   phonetic   conditions   in 
these  words. 

The  syllabic  signs  in  w  are  almost  as  frequent  as  34*. 
the  above ;  for  these,  however,  the  alphabetic  writing 
may  also  be  used: 


12  3.    IDEOGRAMS.      35 — 37. 


sw 


^^  Iw  0    nrv       ^ .  hw         li 

If^  frv  and  Sw       JB^,  rm  1    sw 

*35.         Note  further  the  syllabic  signs:  (J  g7\  perhaps  IS^ 
\  il  or  sometimes  also  ^  (l- 
probably  ri. 

^^^     '  ^^^'  ^v      '  ^^^^  ^^^'  §  ^^^^  ^^  ^^^  early 
used  in  many  words  as  initial  ,w  (cf.  §  102). 

(like  the  sign  for  i)  or  %,  (cf.  §  43),  the 


sign  of  the  ending  fiw  (cf.  §  133),  incorrectly    also 
for  fi. 

3.   IDEOGRAMS. 

*36.  The  ideograms  originally  denoted  the  objects 
which  they  represent: 

tiTD  pr  house,  v^^^  M  wood, 

©    nt  city,  ^    lir  face, 

O    K  sun,  1^  m&c  soldier, 

tQi    tb  heart,  &c. 

♦37^  Since  abstract  conceptions  and  the  like  cannot 
be  sketched,  concrete  objects  in  some  way  suggestive 
of  them  are  used  as  ideograms  for  them: 

I  Scepter  is  the  ideogram  for  Mi  "reign", 


3.   IDEOGRAMS.       38 — 40.  13 

§  Staff  of  office  for  hrp  "lead", 

■*i*  Plant  used  as  the  arms  of  upper  Egypt  for  rs 
"south", 

^,   Sacred  falcon  for  Hr  "God  Horus", 

^  Target  for  st  "shoot". 

In  a  few  cases  more  than  one  sign  are  found  united  38. 
to  form    one  ideogram,   as  _y£^  sm^rvt'i  "the    uniter 

(of  Egypt)"  ')^'^nn  "this"  etc. 

An  ideogram  is  used  not  only    for  one   specific  39*. 
word  but  also  for  all  forms  derived  from  it,  e.  g.  © 
not   only   for  nt  "city"  but  also  for  the  plural  ntvt 
"cities",  as  well  as  the  adjective  nt'l  "urban"  and  all 

its  forms.    [    likewise,  is  used  for  all  forms  of  the 

verb  Mi  "reign"  and  the  substantivs  Mi  "ruler"  Mif 
"ruler"  (fem.).  The  ideogram  therefore  denotes  only 
the  consonants  forming  the  stem,  and  not  in  any  way 
a  special  vocalization  of  it. 

Although,  according  to  the  above  remarks,  only  40*. 
words  belonging  to  the  same  stem  may  properly  be 
written  with  the  same  ideogram,  nevertheless  the 
Egyptians  from  the  oldest  times  transferred  many 
signs  to  such  words  as  accidentally  contained  the  same 
consonants,  without  belonging  to  the  same  stem. 


14  3.   IDEOGRAMS.      41.    42. 

Thus  e.  g. : 

[3Z:  pr  "house"  transferred  to  pr    "go  out", 

r-^i-.  htp  "offering"  transferred  to  htp  "rest"'. 

T     nfr  "lute"  transferred  to  nfr  "good". 


1  mia  "flute" 

•>i 

n 

mic^  "truth". 

hpr  "beetle" 

?: 

H 

hpr  "become". 

si  "goose" 

55 

n 

si  "son". 

•  wr  "dove" 

91 

55 

wr  "great". 

&c. 
In   this   manner  ideograms  for  all  sorts    of  ab- 
stract  conceptions  were    obtained. — Many   of  these 
signs  were  further  transferred  to  so  many  words  that 
they  eventually  became  purely  phonetic  syllabic  signs, 

thus  e.  g.  ^^^  rvr  "great"  1^  pB  "fly"  &c.  Cf.  §  32seq. 

41.  Since  words  like  "good,  truth,  become,  son,  great" 
&c.  occur  much  more  frequently  than  words  like 
"lute,  flute,  beetle,  goose,  dove"  &c.  the  original  con- 
crete meaning  in  the  case  of  many  such  ideograms 
was  therefore  nearly  forgotten. 

42.  A  few  ideograms  really  have  double  values,  so 
e.  g.  ^  which  is  employed  for  tpt  "head"  and  dBdB 
"head".  In  many  cases  however  where  a  double  value 
apparently  occurs  it  has  been  caused  by  the  subse- 
quent merging  together  of  two  originally  different 
signs.     Thus,  in   the  merging  together  of  the  signs 


3.  IDEOQRAJIS.      43.   44.  15 

()  and  Y?  0116  of  which  meant  hrp  "lead"  and  the  other 

shm  "mighty",  one  sign   ()  with  both  meanings  found 
its  origin,  &c. 

A  similar  confusion  of  different  signs  occurs  so  43. 
frequently,  that  it  is  o/ten  no  longer  possible  to  deter- 
mine the  correct  form  of  a  sign.    Note  especially  the 
difference  in: 

*  S  5^.  2\  nst  "throne",  /H  hr  "below, 

I  kd  "build"  &c.,        i   ist  "troop", 

I  hrtv  "voice",      |   mdw  "speak" 

^^and^/)>.,^and^n^, 

which  are  regularly  confused  in  the  inscriptions. 

The  following  frequently  recurring  ideograms  are  44. 
differently  formed  from  all  others: 

J\  Irv  "go",    [j  i  "go",  [^  sm  "come", 

~7T"  sh  "walk  through",  s^^  il  "rob", 
in  which  one  sign  of  going  is  separated  into  different 
ideograms  by  the  addition  of  consonants.     Similarly 
differentiated  are: 

l\    In  "bring",  '^^^  &s  "bring  in", 

j4j  rs  "south",  -^  kmC  "south", 

j    rnj)t  "year",   |  tr  "time",   "I  rnp  "bloom". 


16  4.    DETERMINATIVES.       45 — 47. 

4.  DETERMINATIVES. 

♦45  The  determinatives,  the  latest  part  of  the  Egyptian 

writing,  are  intended  to  facilitate  the  reading;  with 
very  frequent  words,  which  every  one  recognizes  of 

himself,  they  are  not  used,  e.  g.  (l^/^w,"tobe", 
Irt  "do",  ^^  Tvr  "great",    ^  m  "in"  &c. 

A.  The  determinatives  are  still,  far  rarer  in  the  pyramid 
texts  than  later. 

B.  At  a  later  period  there  is  an  inclination  to  attach  several 
determinatives  to  a  word ;  in  this  case  the  more  general  (of.  §  47) 
comes  after  the  more  special. 

*46.         A  few  determinatives    represent  exactly  the  ob- 
ject which  their  word  denotes  e.  g.  the  determinative 

of  heaven  and  of  crocodile  in  the  words ^p^„heaven" 

and  ^^px  's:s=='  nish  "crocodile". 
*47.         But  those  determinatives  are  far  more  numerous 
and   important,  which    indicate  only  in  general  the 

meaning  of  their  word,  like  that  of  the  tree  in  (I  l<zz>0 
hr  "tamarisk".    Note  especially: 
^   man,  P»    goddess, 

woman,  ^    animal, 

bird,  insect, 

revered  person,  "^  plant, 


^people. 


4.   DETERMINATIVES.       48.    49. 


17 


Q    tree, 

o  0  o  dust, 

s;     (late  V)  land, 

S     fluid, 

AAAAAA  water, 

AAAAAA 

J\   go, 

r\^^^  desert,  foreign 

.^^  see. 

and, 

^    what  is  done  with 

©    city. 

the  mouth, 

1 1  house, 

barbarian, 
9     (late  e)  flesh, 

^   (late  ■;     n)  that 

which  demands  strength, 
"^  little,  bad, 

1    fire. 

.-^•^  abstract. 

O    time, 

i 


When  a  determinative  is  difficult  to  write,  espe-  48, 
cially  in  manuscripts,  an  abbreviation  \  is  used,  e.  g. 

St  "Isis"  for  jj  ^  ^• 

Exact  scribes,  especially  those  at  the  end  of  the  49* 
m.  e.    distinguish   still    closer  difi'erences   in    deter- 
mination. They  mark  a  determinative  with  m,  in  order 
to  render  its  meaning  general,  e.  g. : 

L^™9  B^r  "roast"  but  (1^  ^  /w/ "flesh" 
2^0\^  pnw  "mouse"  but  "l^"^  Cwt  "cattle" 


'^T /«rr# "flower" but (1  "^  ^ "^^'iAr^'onionY?). 
^  •  1  _^o  III     • 


Brman,  Egypt,  gramm. 


18  4.    DETERMINATIVES.       50.    51. 


♦50.         These  scribes  further  add  the  sign  I  to  a  deter- 
minative, in  order  to  restrict  its  meaning,  e.  g.: 

""^^^O  rk  "period  of  time",  but    1^    %^®  hrw  "day", 


''°\       ' -  ^    '  -^nn^ 


Ji   I 
^"^s/Wi^^e  "northern",  but   "~^il[l'^  mry?  "dyke". 

B.  In  the  n.  e.  these  additional  signs  1 1 1  and  I  are  often 
incorrectly  employed. — To  the  m,  e.  belongs  the  rare  practice  of 
occasionally  furnishing  the  determinatives  @  and  fw^  with  the 

feminine  ending  t  (^'  ^  .).  as  if  they  were  the  substantives  nt 
"city',,  smt  "land". 
*51.  The  stroke  must  be  regarded  as  a  special  kind  of 
determinative  which  is  added  to  substantives,  which 
are  written  with  only  one  sign  and  have  no  other 
determinative,  e.  g. : 

^^  dw  "mountain",  "^^  ri  (?)  "mouth", 


°  c  "arm",  '^'  si  "son", 

or  (with  the  feminine  ending  i): 

dt  "hand",  smt  "desert"  etc. 

Nevertheless  the  usage  varies  much  here  and  two  ex- 
ceptions to  the  law  here  given  are  found  in  all  texts: 

J^  hr  1.  "face",  2.  "upon"  with  |  even  when  the 

word  is  a  preposition,  not  a  substantive. 

~~^ — 
^  s  "man"  with    |    notwithstanding   the  other] 

determinative  which  follows. — cf.  also  §  58. 


5.    ORTHOGRAPHY,     tt.   IN    GENERAL.       52.    53.  19 

A  determinative   is   frequently  transferred  from  52* 
one  word  to  others,  which  have  the  same  consonants, 
even  when  it  does  not  suit  their  meaning.    Thus,  e.  g. 


the  syllable  kd  is  written :  \    ^     or  I  because  of 

kd  "circle"    and  kd  "make   pottery";  Ih  "to  thirst" 
written:  (1  \^^^  because  oilh  "'calf";  ^^"eternity" 

written:  ^1   because  of  dt  "landed  property",  etc. 

A.    Especially  to  be  noted  in  the  old  texts  is  the  writing 
O     twf  "he  is"  which  has  taken  on  the  determinative  of  flesh 
from  hcf  "flesh". 

5.  ORTHOGRAPHY. 
a.    IN  GENEEAL. 

The  orthography,  which  experienced  great  trans-  53. 
formations  in  the  course  of  time,  determines  in  an 
often  arbitrary  manner  how  far  phonetic  signs,  ideo- 
grams, and  determinatives  must  be  employed  in  writing 
different  words.  The  most  widely  spread  and  import- 
ant system  of  orthography  which  may  be  designated 
as  classic,  is  found  in  the  greatest  purity  in  the  manu- 
scripts of  the  m.  e. ;  with  this  system  the  beginner 
should  seek  to  make  himself  as  familiar  as  possible, 
before  he  approaches  texts  in  another  orthography. 

B* 


20         5.    ORTHOGRAPHY,     b.  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  IDEOGRAMS.    54.  55. 

A.  The  orthography  of  the  p3ramid  texts  is  exceedingly  vari- 
able, and  renders  the  understanding  of  them  very  difficult  indeed; 
but  for  us  it  is  of  importance,  because  it  often — even  though  not 
consistently — distinguishes  grammatical  forms  which  the  classic 
orthography  leaves  undistinguished. — The  orthography  of  the  o.  e. 
seeks  the  greatest  possible  brevity. 

b.  OETHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  IDEOGEAMS. 
54«  The  majority  of  words  are  written  with  an  ideo- 
gram, to  which  is  added  an  indication  of  its  pronun- 
ciation in  alphabetic  signs.  Whether  all  the  conson- 
ants of  the  word  are  to  be  written,  or  only  a  part; 
whether  they  are  to  stand  before  or  after  or  on  both 
sides  of  the  ideogram,  is  decided  by  usage  for  each 
separate  word.  The  following  paragraphs  present 
the  usage  of  the  classic  orthography. — Caligraphy 
(cf.  §  7)  is  moreover  often  the  motive  for  the  selection 
of  a  given  writing. 
*55.  Usually  it  is  only  the  final  consonant  which  is 
added.  To  biliteral  ideograms  the  final  consonant 
is  subjoined,  e.  g.: 

^^J\  pr  "go  out",         ^^yv,  ^h  "go  in", 
r\\ms  "to  bear",  t  '^  M  "white", 

to  triliterals  the  final  consonant,  e,  g. : 
^  tipr  "become",  T  |  ^1  ^^^  "lay", 

f  ^7\^  ^-'^  "stand",  I  '^  rvSd  "green", 


5.  ORTHOGRAPHY.  5.  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  IDEOGRAMS.  56.  57.  21 

or  also — but  more  rarely — the  last  two  consonants, 
e.  g.: 

/->     AAAAAA  n  n 

-¥-  Cn?i  "live"  "1  l<zi>  rvsr  "strong". 

T  nfr  "good". 

More  rarely  all  the  consonants  are  written,  e.  g. :  56*. 

§    \'^ZE^  hi)  "feast",     □  (^  ^^  "times"  (germ.  Mai), 

and  still  more  rarely  only  the  initial  consonants^  as  in: 

^     ^    llgrg  "sieze  possession", 

n^  J  s&i  "star". 

A.    In  the  oldest  orthography  writings  of  just  this  kind  are 

AAAAAA  a^^^  AAAAAA  H   Q 

frequent,  cf.  e.  g. :      t  and     t      nfr  "good", o  ^     a 

n     M  AAAAAA 

ChC  "stand"',  ^ a  9  §t  ChC  "palace",    "Lord''  instead  of  the 

classic  writings  T  '  v      n  '   m  '  ^— ^  Mt^. 

Finally  in  some  isolated  cases  the  initial  conson-  57. 
ant  of  the  ideogram  or  its  entire  phonetic  writing  is 
placed  after  it,  e,  g. : 

W'   ^(J  "to  command",  ^^  •    dmd  "unite", 
jj[  ur-3  Cr  "storehouse",   ?  ^^^^^''  "'^^  sick", 
J  m  A  '"^  "pyramid". 

A.    This  is  also  a  remnant  of  the  oldest  orthography;  in  the 
pyramids  such  writings  are  frequent. 


22   5.  OETHOaEAPHY.  C.   PURELY  PHONETIC  ORTHOGRAPHY.  58.  59. 


*58.  Only  a  few  especially  frequent  ideograms — except 
the  abbreviations  of  §  67 — are  left  without  any  pho- 
netic addition,  as: 


^  hr  "face", 


pr  "house", 
I 

'^^nir  "god", 
iM  2i    msC  "armv", 

m  \\\ 

and  the  feminines : 
^    ^    ht  "house", 

I 


^  ss  (?)  "scribe", 
nb  "every", 
^   nb  "lord", 


°'=s. 


■'  mh  "fill", 


^  ^  St  "Isis", 


^ 


mrvt  "mother". 


Jmt  "woman",  etc. 


c.  PUBBLY  PHONETIC  ORTHOGRAPHY. 
59.         All  words   for  which  the  orthography  possesses 
no  ideogram  are  written  with  purely  phonetic  signs 
— i.  e.  without  ideograms.     These  are  in  part  very 
frequently  recurring  words,  like: 

(1^  tw  "to  be",  Jl^  ^^'^  "^^^"' 

^^^  ^  rn  "name",  ^  %,  (]  V  »^^^  "lion", 

n^^(l^  STvrl  "drink",  &c. 

A.    In  the  oldest  orthography   the  purely  phonetic  writing 
is  very  frequent.     Note  the  rare  cases    l\    v\  for    v\  h    ^^  - 

wd:$  "sound,  healthy",  §  '^^  ^  for  "^^  |  ^  i/jf  "field",  which 
also  occur  occasionally  later. 


5.  OKTHOGRAPHY.    C.  PURELY   PHONETIC  ORTHOGRAPHY.  60 — 62.    23 

Since  the  syllabic  signs  employed  in  these  writings  60*. 
were,   according  to  §  40,   originally    ideograms,  the 
pronunciation  is  added  to  them  in  the  same  way.   It 
is  mostly  the  final  consonant  which  is  written,  e.  g. : 

ms,  mn^  mr,    '^    hr,  ^^  rvn,  &c. 

But  in  many  cases  the  initial  consonant  also  is 
written  (and  such  syllabic  signs  are  thereby  dist- 
inguished from  the  real  ideograms,  cf.  §  56)  e.  g. : 

As  a  rare  writing  note  that  of  the  syllabic  sign 

^ — ^  w'^  •  0  Y>,  in  which  the  phonetic  value  is 

indicated  by  means  of  another  frequently  recurring 
sign  for  nw. 

A    few   syllabic   signs    moreover    are    often  also  61*. 

employed  without  phonetic  addition,  thus  e.  g.  ^  tirv, 


6i,  LJ  ^j>^  [q]  5J>^  O  ^^ .  those  derived  from  sub- 
stantives then  receive  a  stroke  according  to  §  51. 

Note  the  writing  of  the  words  mln  and  si^ :  [1  62. 

and    'Ij— p^^O  f^n-l,  sS-i,  in  which  the  subjoined  i 
is  to  be  inserted  within  the  syllabic  sign.* 

*  according  to  Sethe. 


24  6.    ORTHOGRAPHY.       d.    ABBREVIATIONS.       63.    64. 

d.  ABBREVIATIONS. 

63.  Since  the  Egyptian  writing  was  naturally  intended 
only  for  such  as  were  familiar  with  the  language,  the 
Egyptians  omitted  much  as  dispensable,  which  seemed 
to  them  self-evident.  Almost  all  grammatical  changes 
therefore  which    take  place  within  a  word  are  left 

unindicated,  e.  g.  hmrvt  plur.  of      J)  Jimt  "woman"  is 

written       J)  i  (that  is  without  indication  of  the  tv). 

But  further,  the  grammatical  endings  are  also  often 
omitted,  where  it  is  supposed  that  the  reader  himself 


will  perceive  them   from  the  connection: 


n. 


Hi 
for  the  plural  sr{w)  "princes",       3  ^^37  for  hmt  «&[^] 

"every  woman"  &c. 
64.         Further  with  many  phonetically  written  words  a 
consonant  is  regularly  or  often  omitted.   Note  especi- 
ally the  frequently  used  words: 

^    for  llf  h   ^    "father",  n     S  for  sms  "follow". 


^_^    for  iht  "thing",  v^   s^     for  f^sr  "desolate", 

■  ^  Jl  ^^^  ^^-  "°^^"''5  oQ  for  htm  "to  seal", 

«  ^         for  hCp  "Nile",  j]  for  mr  "stone", 

^^^  ^  for  hrd  "child",  °  ^  for  ptr  "see", 

^    for  sm^  "land",  °||  for  c^i  "correct",    , 


5.  ORTHOOKAPHY.     d.    ABBREVIATIONS.       65 — 67.  25 

'^  for  dfS  "food",  n  ®  n  T;^  for shsh  "walk,  run", 

&c. 
A.  Belonging  to  the  earliest  period,  but  sometimes  occurring 
later  also,  are:  c^  for  Iao^  tt   "father",  <^II>  for  (J     ,.        tr'i  "be- 
longing to",  also  \\  "^^  for  \\  \\  "^^  iwf  "flesh". 

Here  belong  also  the  cases  where  only  its  second  65. 
consonant  is  added  to  a  triliteral  ideogram  in  violation 
of  §  55,  e.  g.: 

jf   for   I  stn  "king  of  upper  Egypt",, 

(a  for  I  ^^^  ^^^  "to  reign", 
"o"  ^^'^  oD  '^"^^  "offering", 
I  I  for    I  l<=r>«;sr  "strong", 
()       for  shmt  "name  of  a  goddess",  &c. 
In  frequently  used  titles  and  formulae,  still  more  66. 
arbitrary    abbreviations    occur,   like:    ^^^    for    hCfi 

"prince",  d  for  rpCtt  "hereditary  prince",  the  bene- 
diction nr  |l  I  for  Cnh  wdB  snb  "living,  hale,  healthy", 
1 0|  for  nhh  "eternity". 

Further,  the  old  divine  names,  titles  &c.,  which  67. 
are  written  with  only  an  ideogram  are  abbreviations, 

like:  ^^^  tvp  rv^rvt  "opener  of  ways"  (a  divine  name); 


26    e.  INVERSION  OF  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS./.  UNUSUAL  STYLES.  68 — 70. 

Toq"^]  for    O   ^  ^"^^^^^    hCwf-RC      «his 
diadems  are  those  of  ReC"  (royal  name)  &c. 
68.         Finally,  a  word  which  is  obvious  from  the  connec- 
tion, is  very  often  so  abbreviated  that  only  its  deter- 
minative is  inserted,  e.  g.  ^  for  l I  S>j  kBt  "labor", 

s Q  for  ^^ — D  nht  "strong",     |  for   s"^"^!!  trvi 

"statue"  &c.     (For  the  most  important  cases  cf.  the 
table  of  signs). 

e.  INVERSION  OF  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS. 

*69.  In  titles,  formulae,  names  &c.  words  which  desig- 
nate the  king  or  a  god  are  inserted  in  the  writing 
before  the  others  belonging  thereto;  in  reading,  the 
correct  order  must  of  course  be  restored,  e.  g. : 

1  "^^   sB  stn  "son  of  the  king", 
I  y  hn-ntr  "servant  of  the  god,  priest", 
I  '^  Sci  1 5   J}n-ntr  Hkt  "priest  of  the  goddess  Hkf",  i 
oQ  mi  RC  "like  ReC". 

/.  UNUSUAL  STYLES  OF  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

70.         Since  the  m.  e.  there  developed  along  with  the 
usual  writing,  a  syllabic  orthography,  which  never- 
theless was  only  used  for  the  writing  of  foreign  words,^ 
proper  names  &c.     It  consists  of  the  syllabic  signs 


/.    UNUSUAL    STYLES.    71.    6.   RULES    FOR    TRANSLITERATION.    72.     27 

treated  in  §§  33 — 35  and  of  other  syllables  in  i  and 
TV.  The  sounds  i  and  rv  evidently  serve  as  the  approx- 
imate indication  of  the  vowels ;  of.  e.  g.  s=>  ^  A^ 
^,  f_TV-pB-'irB   for   the  Hebrew  nsb  "scribe"  &c. 

The  syllables  ^,  )'r^(i)  and  j'TT  ^  employed  therein, 
seem  to  correspond  to  er  and  en. 

Sportive  methods  of  writing,  in  which  ideograms  71. 
serve  as  simple  consonants,  determinatives  and  un- 
precedented signs  are  used  as  ideograms,  are  found 

as  early  as  the  m.  e.  cf.  e.  g.    ^C^^  \\       for    HI 
msdmt  „cosmetic",  wherein  2j)  as  determina- 


tive of  m5  "child"  represents  this  syllable,  c^:^  drv  "moun- 

tain^  represents  d,    \\  mrvt   "mother"    the   syllable 

mt. — But  this  wanton  method  first  attains  importance 
from  the  fact  that  such  an  orthography  gradually 
superceded  the  old  hieroglyphs  in  the  Greek  period. 
— A  summary  of  these  signs  may  be  found  inBru^sch, 
Verzeichniss  der  Hieroglyphen  mit  Lauttvert  (Leipzig 
1872). 

6.  RULES  FOR  TRANSLITERATION. 
The    orthography   so    often   leaves  the  phonetic  72. 
form   of  the  words  uncertain,  that  a  transliteration 
free  from  some  arbitrariness  is  impossible.  One  should 
accustom  himself  to  the  following  rules : 


28  PRONOUNS.  1.  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN,  a,   PERSONAL  SUFFIXES.  73. 

1.  Since  most  s=>'s  and  '^"^'s  according  to  §§  24, 

25  had,  in  the  m.  e.  already  become  -^li  and  ci^^i,  in 
texts  of  the  ra.  e.  and  n.  e.  t  and  d  should  always  be 
transliterated  in  cases  of  doubt,  and  I  and  d  only 
employed  when  s=>  and  '^-=^  are  actually  written  out. 
Hence    j  j|  w^r  but   |  <zr>  nirt} 

2.  In  the  case  of  omitted  consonants  (§§  64,  65) 
and  grammatical  endings  (§  63),  only  those  should  be 
supplied  which  occur  in  parallel  cases  really  written 
out,  and  rather  too  little  than  too  much  should  be 
restored.    Hence  nk  ^\    according  to  §  133  imi,  but 

3.  Words  in  which  the  order  of  consonants  changes 
(§  29, 30)  should  be  written,  when  in  doubt,  with  the  form 
in  which  they  oftenest  occur.   Hence  r) ;   first  mi  andj 

only  i^m  when  this  reading  is  phonetically  written  outj 

4.  In  compound  words  the  component  parts  should 

be   separated  by   a  hyphen:       fn  '1  v^  R(^-ms-sw 


"Ramses". 

PRONOUNS. 

1.  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 

a.  PERSONAL  SUFFIXES. 

*73.         The  personal  suffixes,  which  are  subjoined  to  tl 
noun,  the  prepositions  and  the  verb,  to  express  poa 


1.  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN,  tt.  PERSONAL  SUFFIXES.  74.      29 

session  or  the  subject  (e.  g.  pr-k  "thy  house",  hr-k 
"upon  thee",  sdm-k  "thou  hearest"),  according  to  the 
classic  orthography  are: 

Sing.  1  c.  ^  ^^  (^'^)  Plur.  1.  c.77;  n 

2  m.  r:z::y(>  k  2.  c.  ^-'^^'^tn  (         jaa^aaa  j 

'      '      '  V/WWVA     I      I      1/ 

f.    .=     t     (O) 

n  A/\AAAA  /^~^ •* \ 

3  m.  ^^    f  3.  c.  I        5«[/wsAAA»         I 

f.     P     (--)     . 

They  are  written  after  the  determinative  of  the 
word  to  which  they  are  subjoined,  e.  g.  S'^"^ 

rdk  (copt.  pATK)   "thy  foot",  glj  ^^^z::^  mr/t  "thou 

lovest". 

The  suff.  1  sg.  is  according  to  the  Coptic  an  i  74. 
(e.  g.  XODI  "my  head");  in  the  o.  e.  it  is  always  left 
unindicated,  e.  g.   To  l^mt\l\  "my  office",  from  the 
m.  e.  down  it  is  mostly  indicated  by  determinatives, 
®'  g-  ^^  ^  or  ^^Ji  ^^  "^^  Ji    according    as    a 


man,  a  woman  or  a  god  speaks,  read  s^l  "my  son". 
Nevertheless  it  is  sometimes  left  unindicated  here 
also,  especially  in  the  «-form  of  the  verb  (cf.  §  194). 

A.  The  pyramids  aways  write  it  (I,  and  this  writing  occurs 
as  an  exception  later  also. 

B.  After  consonants  the  suffix  later  falls  away  (e.  g.  copt. 
pAT  "fuy  foot"  cf.    C  5). 


30      1.   THE  PERSONAL  PEONOUN.    tt.  PERSONAL  SUFFIXES.   75 — 79. 

75.  In  the  m.  e.  s=  t  of  the  2  sg.  f.  and  2  pi,  al- 
ready passes  over  into  o  t ;  nevertheless  £=  and  ^ — * 
are  often  written  later  also. 

B.    Late  writings  of  the  2  sg.  f.  are  d  3\  and  jlJ ;  in  Copt, 
this  suffix  has  lost  the  t  (-E),  cf  C  §  50. 

76.  The  3  m.  sg.  is  sometimes  and  the  3  f.  sg.  often 

used  for  the  neuter  "it",  e.  g.     "^1  hrs  "on  account 

of  it" ;  the  3  f.  occurs  even  for  more  than  one  person, 
where  we  would  expect  the  3  plur. 

77.  The  suffixes  of  the  dual  were  early  superceded 

by  those  of  the  plural,  nevertheless  "ir^.    o^'''^ 

ImitTV-sni  "between  them  both"  is  still  to  be  found.* 

A.  The  pyramids  have  3  du.  ]  **«*«  []'    ]         snl,  2  du.  f^AA^^f^tnt. 

78.  On  the  other  hand  the  suffixes  of  the  singular, 
when  they  are  subjoined  to  a  noun  in  the  dual  or 
having  the  dual  meaning,  very  strangely  take  the 
dual  ending  i,  though  it  is  not  always  written  out, 

e.g.          ^         Cw?/'«"his  two  arms",  ,,     sptw'iki\ 

"thy   two  lips",    'V ^^i'C^^^    TvCrftfi  ""his    two| 


legs",       v::.  snnrv/'i  "his  second". 

A .    The  pyramids  write  such  a  suffix  *^- —  [l  fc. 

79*.         These  suffixes  are  not  used  as  object.  Nevertheless] 
as   possessive   suffixes   attached   to  infinitives  (e.  g.j 

*  Todth.  7,  5. 


1,  THE  PERSONAL  PROHOUN.    b.  THE  OLD  ABSOLUTE  PRONOUN.  80.  81.  31 

^[j^l""     °  /?r  Ithk  "when  they  draw  thee"  lit.   "at 

thy  drawing")  they  represent  the  object  to  our  gram- 
matical sense  and  the  Egyptians  themselves  later 
conceived  them  as  such. 

B.  Since  the  forms  of.  the  copt.  verb  are  mostly  made 
with  the  infinitive,  these  suffixes  have  therefore  become  real  ob- 
ject suffixes  in  Copt.  (cf.  C§  174). 

b.  THE  OLD  ABSOLUTE  PRONOUN. 
Its  forms,  which  externally  at  least  are  identical  80*. 
with  the  suffixes  in  the  plural,  are: 

Sing.    1  c. '^^  ?v2  Plur.    1.  c.  ^^J  n 

AftAAAA 

1      I      1     -  III 


2m.t=>^tTv.i::^^tw  2.  c.  '^-^^^  tn  aaaaaa  tn 


f.  {1m  or  Inl) 
3m 


f. 


SW  3.     C.       I  '    /WWVA^^ 

I       III        III 


W  SI 


Neutr.  3 


c.\\c^  St 


They  are  still  employed  as  subject,  almost 
only  in  a  certain  few  cases  (cf.  §  §  166,  328, 369, 383), 
on  the  other  hand  regularly  as  object. 

The  1  sg.  is  written  in  the  o.  e.  ^.  The  2  m.  trv  81. 
and  the  2  pi.  fji  in  the  m.  e.  are  already  tw  and  tn. 
-The  3  f.  is  of  course   always  to  be  read  «,  even 
when  the  ^  is  not  written. 


32    1.  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN.  C.  LATER  ABSOLUTE  PRONOUN.  82 — 84. 

A.    The  pyramids  write  the  1  sg.    v\  (1.    For  the  2  m.  they 
have  two  forms  tw  and  kw,  and  for  the  2  f.  tm  and  tn. 

*82.         The  form  \\^  st  perhaps  originally  belonged  to 

the  3  f. ;  but  it  is  nevertheless  regularly  used,  from 
the  time  of  the  m.  e.  down,  for  neutr.  "it".  It  is 
used  with  decided  preference  and  may  even  refer  to 
a  number  of  persons  (cf.  §  76);  the  pron.  3.  pi.  sn  is 
almost  entirely  superceded  by  it.  Cf.  e.  g.  Cnnsn 
St  "they  turned  themselves  (lit.  "it")  about". 
83.  Along  with  the  above,  the  pyramids  have  also 
further  forms  of  these  pronouns  which  they  employ 
with  special  emphasis,  like  1  sg.  wll,  2  m.   fwt,  2  f. 

pnt,  3  m.  sTvt,  3  f.  stt.    Of  these,  only  i  ^  ^    swt  is 
still  to  be  found  in  the  m.  e. 

c.  LATER  ABSOLUTE  PEONOUN. 
*84.         These  forms  are  only  employed  as  emphatic  sub- 
ject, and  correspond  to  the  emphasizing  of  the  sub- 
stantive by  means  of  In  (cf.  §  350).    They  are: 

Sing.   1  c.  Inwk  Plur.    1.  c.   ? 

AAAAA^  AAAAAA  g  ) 

2  m.    oi    ntk  2  c.  ^wvaaa  nttn 


f.    o   ntt  {latter  ntt)  (later n^^w)| 

a.    -^   ntf 
f.    ^    1  nts 


Zm.    '^^   ntf  3  c.  I         ntsn 


2.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  C.  WITH  p-,    t-.   86.       33 

As  may  be  seen,  the  1  sg.  is  an  exceptional  form, 
the  others  consisting  of  a  little  syllable  nt-  (cf.  §  103) 
and  the  possessive  suffixes. 

A.  In  the  pyramids  they  are  still  rare. 

B.  There  is  later  an  inclination  to  write  the  1  sg.,    (J 

M^i.    Prom  these  forms  the  copt.  pronouns  have  descended,   cf. 
C§  51. 

d.  THE  EXPRESSION  FOR  "SELF". 

The  word     p|  ds-  with  the  suff.  means  "self,  e.  g.  85. 
(hi  "myself",  dsk  "thyself",  ^5/"  "himself  etc. 

B.  The  word  hC  "body"  with  or  -without  suff.  occurs  rarely 
for  "self"*;  this  expression,  from  which  the  copt.  ^(3i(Xi'  descends 
(cf.  C§  52),  later  becomes  more  frequent. 

2.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
a.  FORMS  WITH  MASC.  J9-FEM.  t-. 
The  most  common  demonstrative  "this",  is:  86.* 

Sing.  m.  pn  ^     f. 

AAAAAA  AA/SAAA 

Plur.  m.  [1  Ipn  (pn)     f.  (i  Iptn  (ptn) 

The  plural  forms  are,  in  the  m.  e.,  already  ob- 
solete, and  are  replaced  by  nn  (cf.  §  91).  —  It  always 

stands     after     the     substantive:  pr  j9n  "this 

I       AAAA/VN 

house",   J ht  in  "this  castle".  —  In  cere- 

LD    1 1  AAA^/W 


1  Sin.  66. 
Erman,  Eg^pl.  granim. 


34  2.    DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS.    O.    WITH  p-,    t-.    87 90. 

monious  language  it  also  follows  proper  names  of 
persons,  especially  in  direct  address. 

A.  The  pyramids  use  it  with  especial  emphasis  before  the 
substantive  also;  m  pn  gs  "on  this  side". 

B.  In  n.  e.  it  is  almost  entirely  lost. 

*87.         The  weaker  word  for  "this"  (following  its  noun) 
prv^  occurs  almost  only  in  this  one  form  and  then  only 

1.  in  the  cases  in  §§  237,  239,  334; 

2.  in  ceremonial  address :  Ppy  prv  "o  Pepy" ! 

3.  in  apposition;  (^mw'i-n-sl,  hhB  prv  n  Tnrv  ^'Cmwi- 
n-Sl,  the  prince  of  Tnw"  (lit.  "this  prince"). 

A.  In  the  pyramids  it  still  survives:  sing.  m.  pw  (also  p,pi), 
f.  tw  ;  plur.  m.  ipw  f.  Iptw. 

B.  In  the  later  language  it  is  entirely  lost. 

88.  In  the  archaic  language  m.  lJX\i\  (1  pwy,  f.  o^  (J  (1 

trvy  also  occur,  and  are  properly  perhaps  identical 
with  the  old  prv. 

89.  The  old  word   for  "that"  is  sing.  m.  pf,  f. 

i/"  (properly  p/??  //i?),  which  is  also  later  written 

*^-=--,  1^  \\  ^h^  P^f'i-  It  follows  the  substan- 
tive  and  often  adds  an  implication  of  despicableness. 
—  The  plur.  is  replaced  by  w/i,  cf.  §  93. 

A.  The  pyramids  have  also  the  plural  ipf  and  also  place  it 
(like  pn  §  86  A)  before  the  substantive. 

"90.         The  usual  later  demonstrative  is  sing.  m. 


2.    DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.     &.  FORMATIONS  WITH  U:  91.  92.    35 

pS,  f.  o^.  t^i  which,  differing  from  the  others,  is 
always  placed  before  the  substantive:  D/>^^^ 
^^^^  v"^  pi*  S/drv  "thi&_book".  —  It  is  also  used 
as  a  substantive  (jai  pw  Wslr  "this  is  Osiris")  and 
then  has  also  a  plural,  Q/^^  ^^  ^  i-  —  Usually 
the  plural  is  replaced  by  ni,  cf.  §  94. 

A,  In  the  pyramids  pB  does  not  occur. 

B.  The   article   is  later    developed   from  p^,  cf.   §  113;  the 
later  demonstrative  also  pB'i  c.  TTAl  (C§  68)  is  descended  from  pB. 

b.  FORMATIONS  WITH  n-. 
4-4-  ^^  ^^  properly  a  substantive,  "this":         |  91.* 

I  I  ddnf  nn  "he  said  this"^  —  But  it  is  for  the 
most  part  connected  by  the  genetive  n  with  a  follow- 
ing singular  or  plural:     I    I  aaaaaa|j^[j|j      ^  nn  n  sht'i 

"these  peasants"^  (lit.  "this  of  peasant");  this  combi- 
nation replaces  the  plural  of  j9«  (cf.  §  86). 

B.  Later  the  genetive  n  falls  away:  nn  (4-4-)  ^^^^  "these 

and    I     I  are 

I      I    AA/v^A^ 

AA/\A/W 

incorrect  writings  for  nn. 

D  v\  (older  \\)  nn>  is  used  precisely  like  92.* 

nn;  as  a  substantive  it  means  "this",  in  nw  n  .  .  .  it 


>  Sin.  32.  2  Bauer  75.  ^  Westc.  5,  12. 

C* 


36    NOUNS.  1.  SUBSTANTIVES,  a.    EXPRESSION  OF  GENDER.  95. 


AA/ViAA 


replaces    the   plural    of  prv  (cf.  §  87):  o 

I   I   I  J|  I  WW  n  ntrw^  "These  gods".  It  is  more  archaic 
than  nn. 

B.  In  LA  it  is  lost. 

^^'  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^  '^^  same  way  replaces  the 

plural  of/?/",  e.  g.  w/j?  n  c^wt  "those  swellings  (?)"^. 

*94.  %    «i  "this"  is  also   a  substantive,   "this";  in 

the  combination  wi  n  with  following  plural,  it  serves 
as  the  plural  of  ;?i  (cf.  §  90, 113),  e.  g.  "V ''^'^ /'^wT 
K^     III  wi  n  gmhrvt  "these  wicks"  ^ 

A.  To  the  pyramids  nB  is  still  unknown. 

B.  Here  also  the  genetive  n  falls  away  in  the  n.  e.;  hence 

AAA/SA^ 

the    article    is    for    the   most   part    ''K^  wi,  cf.  §  113  B. 

NOUNS. 

1.    SUBSTANTIVES. 
a.  EXPRESSION  OF  GENDER. 
♦95.         The   masculine   and  feminine  are   distinguished. 
The  feminine  has  the  ending  -t  and  denotes 

1.  the  naturally  feminine; 

2.  various  inanimate  objects,  which  are  conceived 
as  feminine,  like  nst  "throne",  wCrt  "leg"; 


t  Eb.  2,  5.         2  Eb.  108,  20.         3  Siut  I,  297. 


1.   SUBSTANTIVES.    U.   EXPRESSION    OF   GENDER.    96.    97.  37 

3.  Collectives,  like  Cs^t  "multitude",  rhyt  ''huma- 
nity"; 

4.  Expressions  in  the  neuter,  like  ntt  "that  which", 
and  the  like; 

5.  Abstract  conceptions,  like  stnyt  "kingdom", 
JmtC^)  "evil". 

The  masculine  originally  had  an  ending  u,  which  96. 
was    denoted   by   rv.     It  is  nevertheless  only  rarely 
written,  chiefly 

1.  with  divine  names  etc.:  [I  vx^^wpw  Anubis, 
■^^^^£=3%  Mntw  Month,  ?]\,  Hnmrv  Chnum. 

2.  with  substantives  which  denote  a  person  and 
are  derived  from  an  adjective  or  verb:  Q  ^^^^^^ 
M+i    hrvrrv    "pauper"   (from     Q^^""^^^  /?wr  "poor"), 

^  V^  s;«sw  "follower"  (from  ny  J\     sms   "follow") 
cf.  also  §§  282,  292,  258,  395. 

3.  with   various   substantives   like  (]  ^ 
Itrw  "stream"  (pronounce  *jotru,  c.  Fioop),  especially 
also  those  with  n  like    ''-'  D%>.5  hnw  "jar",  ^^O^ 

CTZ]  hnw  "interior". 

A.  In  the  pyramids  this  ending  is  still  more  frequent. 

B.  In  the  n.  e.  the  ending  was  probably  already  lost. 

The  ending  of  the  feminine,  -^,  is  always  written,  97. 


38   a.  EXPRESSION  OF  GENDER.  98.   6.  FORMS  OF  THE  SUBSTANTIVE.99. 

and  only  disregarded  in  abbreviations  (like    |  J    for 

|n^ ht  ntr   "house    of  god"),  —    The  collective 

g — s  It    rmtt  "humanity",  which  seems  to  have  super- 
ceded the  plural  of  ^ "^   rmf   "man",    is   written 

almost  without  exception  at  . 

S=rr>  I   I   1 
B,  From  the  n.  e.  down,  the  feminine  ending  loses  its  t,  and 

feminine  substantives  end  in  e  or  a  long  vowel  (cf.  C§  61).    Hence 

the  fem.   ending   is   often  omitted  in  the  n.  e.  or  added  in   the 

wrong  place- 

98.  The  names  of  foreign  lands,  like  ^:z:^  v\  J^^s 
"Ethiopia"  are  treated  as  feminines,  although  they  do 
not  have  the  feminine  ending;  probably  because 

smt  "foreign  land"  is  understood  with  them. 

b.  FOEMS   OF  THE  SUBSTANTIVE. 

99.  We  perceive  from  the  Copt,  that  the  noun  possess- 
ed various  definite  formations  (cf.  C§  63  seq.);  but 
these  are  not  to  be  recognized  in  hieroglyphic  ortho- 
graphy, because  they  are  for  the  most  part  distinguished 

only  by  different  vocalization.    E.  g.    I  ^.  ^    sm  = 

*sm  (cim)  "herb",  O   K  =    *reC    (oh)    "sun", 

^rn  =  *ran  (oAN)  "name",  (1         :^  lrp=*ierp 

(HOn)  "wine",  ?^^  dnh  =  *denli  (TNg)  "wing", 


1.    SUBSTAKT1VE8.   h.    FORMS   OF    THE    SUBSTANTIVE.  100.  101.       39 

yC^  ^^^  ""  *^orA  (^(Dps)  "night",  □  ^-^^  spr 
=  *spir  (cnip)  "rib",  '^^'^^  /'^^  snf  =  *snof  (CNOq) 
"blood",  ^%^  I  trvt  ==  *?«;5^  (TOYa)T)  "statue,  figure". 

A  large  number  of  substantives  is  derived  from  100. 
others  by  the  ending  l\  this  ending  is  probably  ident- 
ical  with    the  adjectival  ending  of  §  132.     The  old 
writing  of  this  ending,  <*,  is  found  later  only  in  proper 

names,  like  ^w^  u  flri  "the  one  belonging  to  Horus" 

(German  "der  Horische")  from  ^^,    Hr  "Horus".    In 

most  cases  these  words  have  taken  on  a  peculiar  form 
in  their  orthography:  in  the  o.  e.  they  end  in  m.  w, 
f.  wt  (pronounce  ui^  uit'^),  in  the  m.  e. ,  in  m.  ?/,  f.  yt. 
So  e.  g.: 

ningstar" ; 
II  ^  "^  ^  Im^hw  (1  .^(1  fl  ^  Im^Jiy  "revered" ; 
mrrvt  l\l\ci  mryl  "love". 


On  the  other  hand,  with  the  numerous  substan-  loi. 
tives  in  m.  ai,  f.  yt^  the  question  seems  rather  one  of 
an  i  belonging  to  the  stem,  than  of  an  ending;  in  the 
older  period  the  ending  of  the  masculine  is  in  most 

cases  not  written:  °,  \v     sC'i  "sand"  (0)0)), 

QUI     fl     III  ""^ 


40        1.  SUBSTANTIVES,   b.  FORMS  OF  THE  SUBSTANTIVE.  102.  103. 
A^/^A^A        \  aaaaaa   r\   r\ 

J     n  \\     nhs'i  "negro"  ?    f]  iJ  U  ^  nJjsyt  "negress". 
Those    in    rv'i  like  ^  i=^  Mwi'  "darkness",  are 


perhaps  old  duals. 
102.         A  number  of  substantives  is  derived  from  verbs 
by  means  of  a  prefixed  m.  Since  the  m.  e.  this  prefix 

is  written  preferably  with  the  syllabic  sign  .=^^  m 
(of.  §35): 


i 


I 


^    All  "ihst  "scales"  (from  h^  "measure"), 
\       msdmt  "eye  cosmetic"  &c. 


103.         Note  further  the  prefix  nt-^    which    is   used 

(like  the  German  ".  .  .  wesen",)  to  express  the  nature 
or  practice  of  that  to  which  it  is  prefixed  {nt-hsb 
"Rechnungswesen") ;  and  the  expressions,  made  with 

J  ^   in^  "place",  for  abstract  ideas  {bw  nfr  "good 

place"  i.  e.  "the  good").  —  A  remarkable  form  is  the 

frequently  recurring  -^^  ^^  )      wn    m^c    (properly, 

AAAAAA  -  n     L 

probably:  "it  is  true"),  which  is  used  like  a  substan- 
tive "truth". 

A.  The  prefix  tl  "belonging  to"  is  entirely  obsolete;  it  is 
nevertheless  found  in  the  title  A  I  v\  tt-sio  "the  one  belonging 
to  him",  i.  e.  follower  of  the  king. 


1.  SUBSTANTIVES.  C.  EXPKES8I0IT  OF  NUMBEB.  «.  PLURAL.  104.  105.  41 

c.  EXPRESSION  OF  NUMBER, 
a.  PLURAL. 

Apart  from  the  ending,  the  plural  is  orthographi-  104*. 
cally  indicated: 

1.  by  a  threefold  writing  of  words  written  with 

an  ideogram:     |    |    j  ntrrv  "gods",  prw 

"houses",    ^P  nwt  "cities"  (archaic,  but  still  retained 

with  some  words). 

2.  by   threefold    writing    of   the   determinative: 

=^wiM^wi  hCt'iw  "princes"  (obsolete). 

3.  by  means  of  III,  i,   (more  rarely  °  °°),  which 
follows  the  ideogram  standing  alone:  !^i  Mw  "mil- 


lions",    1 1  ntrrv  "gods"  (abbreviation  of  1.). 

4.  by  means  of  III,  i,    which    follows   the  deter- 
minative:   l<rz>^|^   ^  5r/y  "princes"  (abbreviation 

of  2.). 

A.  There  is  often  found  in  the  pyramids  also  the  threefold 

repetition  of  phonetic  signs,  e.  (j.    ^^  ^^  ^^  df^to"  victuals", 

X    .   .     hkSw  "charm",  www   mnw   "monument";   they   also   put 
X  U     •  000  . 

o  o  o  after  purely  phonetic  writings:  (1  v°  °  °  ^^^^  "®^" 

cellent"  (pi.).    Such  writings  also  occur  sporadically  later. 

The  plural  of  the  masculine  ends  in  ^  tv  (about  105" 


42      1.  SUBSTANTIVES.  C.  EXPRESSION  OF  NUMBER,  a.  PLURAL.  106. 

like  ^w  cf.  C§  109  seq.),  which  is  consistently  written 

in  good  manuscripts,  e.  g.    '^^.    v'^  sww  "herbs". 
Note  especially: 

1.  The  w  is,  for  the  most  part,  not  written  with 

words  which  contain  no  phonetic  signs,  so  ^  i  dSd^w 
"heads",    |    j    |  ntrtv  ''gods",  [^^^  Miw  "rulers". 

2.  With  words  which  in  the  singular  already  end 
in  V^,  the  rv  of  the  plural  is  not  written  out:    ''-' 

^^  hrrv  plural  of  hrw  ''day". 

3.  The   adjectives    in   ^    (cf.   §   133)    take   plural 


ending,  ^i,  those  in  fi  write  it  with  the  sign 
firv  (cf.  §  133  and  43,  61). 

4.  On  the  plural  of  ""^^^  cf.  §  97;  that  ofl  ^ 

stn  "king  of  upper  Egypt"  has  the  form  1  (1  (1  ^ 
jv  I  stnyrv,  probably  because  the  word  already  ends 
in  i  in  the  sing. 

B.  In  the  n.  e.  there  are  also  plurals  in  (J  (J  y;  that  of  the 

adjectives  in  ti  ends  later  in   ^\  (I  lA  ^W- 
"106.        The  plural  of  the  feminine  ends  in  ^     rvt  {*wetj 
cf.  C§  109,  116  seq.),  e.  g.  '^|J^^w^&wr'necks"i 

1  Eb.  58,  12. 


1.  SUBSTANTIVES.  C.  EXPRESSION  OF  NUMBER.  P.  DUAL.  107.  108.    43 


CI 


(horn  nhbt),  '^V'||i  ^^P^^  "years"'  (pMnooyp. 
from  rnpt  pOMNF),  ^  '^    Cj^tvt     "swellings (?)^ 

(from  ^  c^t)  &c.  In  classic  orthography  these 
endings  are  nevertheless  rather  seldom  written,  3  i 
being  usually  written  for  Ijmrvt  "women"  &c. 

|3.  DUAL. 
The  dual  is  orthographically  indicated:  107* 

1.  by    the    repetition    of  the  sign,    with   words 

written  with  only  an  ideogram:  t^w'i  "the  two 

lands"  mrfi{l)  "the  two  eyes".  —  In  this  case  the 

-ending  is  not  written. 

2.  With  other  words  the  determinative  is  repeated: 
^  ®'^'^\y  thnwi  "the  two  obelisks",  ^^-^  %   Cfi    "the 

nn  III  tit 

two  members",  wwva^^^  mnti  "the  two  legs".  —  The 
ending  is  written  for  the  most  part. 

Just  as  there  is  a  determinative,  ill,  in  the  plural,  108. 
by  which  the  threefold  writing  of  the  ideogram  or 
determinative  is  avoided,  so  also  in  the  dual  there 
was  a  corresponding  sign,  i  i  or  \^,  which  is  still  used 

as  a  determinative  in  the  oldest  texts,  e.  g.  or 

5       \\ 


1  Grave  in  Assuan.  -  Eb.  108,  19. 


44  Y-    USE    OF   THE    SINGULAR,    PLURAL,    DUAL.    110.    111. 


W 


^(]  (j  CrvU  "the  two  arms",  (for   ~^),  S^  | 
v:^  U      gmhrvTi  "the  two  door  jambs".    But  since  the 

m.  e.,  this  meaning  of  I  I,  \>v  is  forgotten  and  it  has 
the  value  of  a  vocalic  sign  for  the  dual  ending  i, 
which  is  then  also  employed  for  every  similar  ending?. 
"109.  The  dual  ending  is  properly  an  i  which,  in  the 
masculine  is  joined  to  the  masculine  ending  m,  in  the 
feminine  to  the  feminine  ending  t.  The  older  writ- 
ings of  these  endings  are  m.  ^Ol]  or  V^  tvli^  ^'  I1h 
ov  c^  tl\  from  the  m.  e.  on,  they  are  written  ^  rv'l 


f.  USE  OP  THE  SINGULAR,  PLURAL,  DUAL. 

110.  The  singular  is  often  employed  collectively,  where 
we  expect  the  plural,  especially  where  ^^^::^  nb  "every" 
is  subjoined  to  the  substantive,  e.  g.  "600  men  (select- 
ed) from  ^^  kn  nb  "every  brave  one"\  i.  e. 
"from  all  the  brave". 

111.  Differently  from  our  conception  of  it,  the  plural 
is  used: 

1.  with  abstract  nouns,  e.  g.  m^^^  ^  h^f» 

1  LU  II  122  b. 


1.    SUBSTANTIVES,    d.   THE    ARTICLE.    113.  45 

"time",  ^"Ix^nil  tSw  «heat",  "^^^^.^^—^fkBrv 
"reward"  &c. 

2.  with  names  of  material  e.  g.  aaaaaa  mw  "water", 
n  \\  =0==D==D=  Irpw  "wine"  &c. 

But  plurals  of  this  sort  are  early  treated  as 
singulars  also  (e.  g.  mntv  "monument",  hrw  "height", 
mw  "water").  —  With  words  of  material,  which,  like 
the  names  of  the  metals,  are  used  in  the  singular, 
the  plural  denotes  separate  pieces  of  the  material; 
e.  g.  nb  "gold",  nbw  "gold  nuggets". 

The  dual  is  only  used  of  persons    or  things  in  112. 
pairs.    It  early  became  extinct;  cf.  C§  121. 

d.  THE  ARTICLE, 

The  older  language  has  no  expression  known  to  113. 
us   for   the    definiteness  or  indefiniteness  of  a  sub- 
stantive, and  the  popular  language  of  the  m.  e.  first 
begins  to  employ  the  demonstrative  pi  (cf.  §  90)  as 
an  article.    The  forms  are: 

Sing.  m.  ^^  i>^,  f.  ^^  t^' 

AAAAftA 

Plur.  'Tk  '^"^  nB  n  ("the  of  .  . ')  with  following 
singular  or  plural. 

AAAAAA 

B.  Since  the  m.  e.,  "^  n^  with  following  plural  is  written 
instead  of  nB  n.  —  cf.  C§  112  sq. 


46  1.    SUBSTANTIVES,    d.    THE   ARTICLE.    114  — 116. 

114.  This  popular  language  of  the  m.  e.  further,  re- 
gularly omits  the  article  with  certain  words.  These 
are  1.  the  names  of  all  parts  of  the  body,  2.  many 
designations  of  localities,  3.  the  expressions  of  the 
cult  and  the  kingdom,  4.  a  few  words  occurring  with 

especial  frequence. 

f 

115.  In  the  later  language,  the  expression  pByf  "his" 

(lit.  "the  his")  copt.  nCDq  (cf.  C§  54),  originates  from 
the  combination  of  the  article  with  the  possessive 
suffixes.  Before  a  substantive  it  denotes  the  possessive 
relation  and  replaces  the  possessive  suffixes  (cf.  §  73) 
in  all  cases,  where  the  article  would  be  used,  e.  g. 

a^^;^(1(1j^^^         pSyfpr  (really  "the  his  house") 

for  ^^    prf  "his  house".     The  feminine  is  tByf^ 

the  plural  nByf  n  .  .  . 

B.   In  the   n.  e.  the   plural  is  nByf;  in   Copt,   this  is  the 
"possessive  article"  HEq-,  TSq-,  NEq-  (cf.  C§  55). 

116.  The  later  "indefinite"  article  also,  does  not  yet 
exist  in  the  popular  tongue  of  the  m.  e.;  the  combina- 
tions'^'^'^  \\  I 'ww^  rvCro  n  .  .  "one  of.  .",  (masc.)  I 

. 0  Jl  - — o^^i 

AAAftAA 

wCt  fit  "one  of  .  .  "  (fem.)  still  mean  "any' . 

B.  The  indefinite  article  wC  copt.  OY  (cf.  C§  122)  grew  out 
of  this  wCw  n  in  the  n.  e. 


e.  THE  ABSOLUTE  SUBSTANTIVE.  117./.  APPOSITION  A.  COORDINATION.  1 1 9. 47 

e.  THE  ABSOLUTE  SUBSTANTIVE. 
The  substantive  stands  absolutely:  1.  very  often  117. 

r\     r 

for  designation  of  iime^  e.  g.  j  O  '^"'"^   tr   n  "at 

the  time  of",  ^      rC  nh  "every  day"  (lit.  "every  sun"), 
(dIIII  fnpt 4  „in  the  fourth  year". 

3.  for   designation    of  place  in   expressions  like 
<^  hnt  "in  front",  °^  mht  "northern". 


3.  in  expressions  with  sp  "time" :  □  %»      1 1 1 1  spw  4 
"four  times". 

Here  also,   belong  the  numerous  cases  where  a  118. 
substantive  follows  an  adjective  in  order  to  specify 
that   to   which    the   quality  of  the  adjective  refers: 


^ 


^         ikr  shrw  "excellent  in  plans".  "^ 


/.  APPOSITION  AND  COORDINATION. 
In    an    apposition,    the    substantive    explaining  119. 
stands  after  the  one  explained.  The  following  peculiar 
cases  are  important: 

1.  it   specifies  material:  n ^  j  1^  ^^  Inr 

hd,  krs  "white  stone,    a  sarcophagus",  i.  e.  a  sarco- 
phagus of  white  stone  ;^ 

2.  it  specifies  locality :  -^  ^  Jc^%\@    Tm{7) 

'  Sin.  49.  2  Una  5. 


48  /.    APPOSITION    AND    COORDINATION.    120 — 121. 

Bhdrv  "Thinis,  Abydos'V  i.  e.  Abydos  situated  in  the 
nomos  of  Thinis; 

3.  it  specifies  number  and  measure:  9      S^  )  [It] 

^^^hkt  my  22  "Beer,  22  jars",  i.  e.  22  jars  of  beer^; 

^\^^^^  Jisb,  rmt  600  "number,  600  men",^  i.  e.  a 
number  consisting  of  600  men. 

120.  In     a    series    of   coordinated  words,    they    are 
usually  left  unconnected:     Jj  i  ^^"^^  U  U  \>i^=fi>  ^ 
hmtvt  t^yw  "women  and  men".^  —  Things  which  are 
to  be  closely  connected  [dC  hr  hrvyf  "storm  and  wind") 

are  joined  by  the  preposition  ^  /?r,  while  the  prepo- 

n    AAAAAA 

sition  ft  hnC  permits  each  of  the  connected  words 

to  stand  forth  individually  {Itf  hnC  mrvtf  "his  father, 
as  well  as  his  mother"^). 

A.  The  pyramids  cooi'dinate  also  by  means  of  the  particle  * 
tsf,  which  comes  after  the  words  to  be  connected. 

121.  The  expression  for  "or"         dv^v  r-jow  (older 

D^)  comes  after  the  words  to  be  separated  by  "or": 

m  nb,  m  sn,  m  hnms  r-prv  "as  lord  or  as  brother  or  as 
friend"".    In  rare  cases  r-prv  is  repeated  after  every] 
word. 


1  AZ  29,  120.     2  glut  I,  293.      3  LD  H,  122  a.     «  Sm.  132^ 
5  Westc.  11,  14.         6  Leps.  Ausw.  8  d.         "^  Prisse  9,  9. 


g.    THE    GENETIVE.     a.    DIRECT   GENETIVE.    122  — 124.  49 

g.   THE  GENETIVE. 
a.  DIRECT  GENETIVE. 

This  older  kind  of  genetive  is  apparently  express-  122*. 
ed  only  by  the  position  of  the  two  substantives,  in 
which  the  governing  word  stands  before  the  governed : 

til  It  mil         i-\ 

pr  imn  "House  of  Amon."    The  connec- 


tion between  the  two  words  is  for  the  most  part  so 

loose,  that  they  may  be  separated,  e.  g.  .,-n-^.,-^-^[l  I  n 

«=^  ^  n  ihrvt  Is  pw  pr-hCfi  "but  they  are  not 

things  of  the  prince's  house"  ^  where  the  genetive  Ihrvt 
pr-hCfi  is  divided  by  is  pw. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  other  cases  the  two  words  123*. 
in  the  combination  cannot  be  separated,  and  are  treat- 

ed  as  a  compound  word,  e.  g.  ^  JlM^  M..^ 


mr-shi'irv  mnh    "an  excellent    overseer    of  peas- 


^1 
ants".2 

B.  This  last  case  persisted  down  into  the  Copt.  (cf.  C§  140); 
the  Coptic  forms  show  that  the  former  of  the  words  so  joined 
suffered  shortening,  as  in  the  ans^logous  form  of  the  Semitic 
"status  constructus". 

The  direct  genetive  is  especially  preferred:  124. 

1.  After  general  designations  of  locality:  ^^.  "="^ 


»  Siut  I,  288.  2  Sin.  244. 

Erman,  E^ypt.  ^ramni.  D 


50  |3.    INDIRECT   GENETIVE    WITH   W.    125. 

^"^cz^^^^  '§1  ^jS  k.^  m  m  hrdwf  "at  the  head  of 
his  children".^ 

2.  After  general  designations  of  time :  ^\   O 

y  m  rk  hnf  "at  the  time  of  his  majesty". 

3.  After  certain  frequently  recurring  words,  like 
mr  "overseer",  ^^37  nb  "lord",  pr  "house", 

si  "son":  e.  g.  ^^\  nT)  ^^  ^^^  "overseer  of 

the  works". 

4.  Where  1    '^    s/;z  "king"  and    |  «?r  "god"  are  the 

T    AAAAAA  I 

governed   words :    I        hmt  stn  "wife  of  the  king". — 
On  the  written  order  of  these  words  cf.  §  69. 

B.  The  direct  genetive  was  gradually  superceded  by  the  j 
later  indirect;  in  Copt,  only  the  cases  of  §  123  are  preserved,  cf.  1 
§  140.  ] 


p.  INDIEECT  GENETIVE  WITH  n. 

*125.  It  is  formed  by  means  of  an  adjective  *m,  which, 
according  to  §  135  means  something  like  "belonging 
to";  "the  priest  belonging  to  Amon"  for  "the  priest 
of  Amon".  This  adjective  agreed  in  gender  and  num- 
ber with  the  noun  to  which  it  belonged;  its  forms, 
according  to  classic  orthography,  are: 

1  Sin.  78. 


p.    INDIRECT   GENETIVE    WITH   tl.    126.  51 


Sing.  m.  /wwv^  n  {*ni)  f.  nt  {*nii), 

Plur.  m.     nw  {*niw),  f.         nt  {*nijvt,  cf.  §  106). 

/WNAA/v 

A.  The  old  writings  are:  sg.  m.      A      nt  (in  the  m.  e.  once 


also  ),  1  pi.  m.  0  v\,      '^  nw.    In  the  older  period  there 

was  further  a  dual  m,  mv'i. 

B.  This  word  early  lost  its  inflection;  it  first  lost  the  dual, 
then  (already  in  the  popular  language  of  the  m.  e.)  the  plural,  and 
also  the  feminine.  Since  the  LE,  aa^w\a  n  became  an  unchange- 
able particle,  like  Copt,  fj;  cf.  C.  §  141. 

The  indirect  genetive  ?nust  be  used:  126. 

1.  to  designate  a  part:  ^  ,^;;j^  •'"  ^P^  ^^  smmf 
"the  first  of  his  harvest,"  "' 

2.  to  designate  material :  0  hip  CB  ni  sst 

I  AAAAAA    C^ 

"a  great  offering  tablet  of  alabaster."^ 

3.  to  subjoin  that  which  will  more  nearly  define 
the  noun,  where  we  would  often  employ  an  adjective: 

^  I  ^^^^  111  ^^^  ^'^  3000  "an  army  of  3000,"^  c^:?. 


S 


5  v^  ^"^^  ni  Kht'irv  "the  city  of  Coptos,' 


s  ni  mSQ  "a  man  of  truth".  ^ 


1  LD  IT,  138  d.  2  Slut  I,  310.  3  Una  43. 

*  LD  II,  149 d.  5  LD  II,  122  b.  6  Mar.  Ab.  II,  24. 

D 


52       2.    ADJECTIVES,     a.    ADJECTIVES    WITHOUT   ENDING.    127.    128. 

127.        On  the  further  optional  use  of  the  indirect  gene- 
tive,  note  especially,  that  it  is  preferred: 

1.  to  designate  the  possessor :    |  M  ^"^^^  ^,  t 
,  '^^^  J|  ht  ntr  ni  Wnn-nfr  "the  temple  of  W."^ 

2.  to  express  the  idea  of  appurtaining  to  or  hav- 
ing source  in  a  place:  ^^  aaaaaa  jQ  X  |  ^  Snd 
ni  WSw^t  "Acacia  wood  from  Nubia".^ 


2.  ADJECTIVES. 
a.  ADJECTIVES  WITHOUT  ENDING. 

♦128.  These  adjectives,  perhaps  derived  from  verbal 
stems,  had  various  forms  also  common  to  substan- 
tives (cf.  §  99)  e.  g.: 

nfr  "good'  *wa/r  (NOyqE),  J  [I  ^^J)ln 
"bad"  Holn  (bodcdn),  |  ^v  ndm  "sweet"  "^nodm 
(NOyTM). 

2.  ^^  wr  "great"  *mer  (-oyHp). 

3.  ^^zz7  rib  "every"  *m&  (nIM). 
Ci  "large"  *Coi  (-0).    Cf.  C§  146  sq. 


1  Eb.  75,  13.  2  Una  46. 


I 


2.   ADJECTIVES,     a.   ADJECTIVES    WITHOUT   ENDING.    129.    130.      53 

They  follow  their  substantive  and  agree  with  it  i29*. 
in  number  and  gender: 


§  ^      8  1^     ^     ^^kt  ndmt  "sweet  beer'V 
III  <$=lv  V  ^^^^  ^^^^  "many  ten  thousands",^ 
[v^  %"  ^  ^'5^^  ^^^^  5ww?(?)  "all  bad 


£1^1 


J 


things",^ 

^^^  bhnt'i  wrt'i  "two  great  towers".* 

AAAAV     YV      C     3    iCIi       \\  ^ 

Nevertheless  most  texts  are  not  exact  in  the  writ- 
ing of  these  endings,  self  evident  of  course  to  the 
Egyptian  reader;  the  ending  of  the  sing.  fem.  is  often 
wanting,  that  of  the  plur.  fem.  always,  and  for  the 
most  part  the  sign  I  i  i  also. 

B.  Most  adjectives  later  become  unchangeable  (of.  C§  147); 
the  plur.  fem.  was  first  lost,  being  replaced  by  the  plur.  masc. 

Of  ^^ — y  nh  "every"  only  the  fem.  survives. 

Rarer  combinations  of  the  adjective  are:  130. 

1.  it  forms  one  word  with  the  substantive:  c\^H^ 
U|l  tB-M-sn  "their  white  bread".^    Cf.  C§121,  1. 

2.  The  possessive  suffix  of  the  noun  is  repeated 

with  the  adjective:  "^^  rh  2^^^=^  sSfrvrf  "his  great 

son".  6  """^ 


1  Eb.  11,   15.  2  Una  14.  3  Eb.  30,  15. 

J  LD  ni,  24  d.  5  Siut  I,  225.  6  LD  II,  124,  54. 


54  b.    ADJECTIVES   IN   ?.    131  — 133. 

131.  It  is  employed  also  as  a  substantive^  e.  g. 
^^^  «;r  "the  great  one",  TIT  nfrw  "beauty"  (Plu- 
ral according  to  §  111,  1). — On  the  employment  of 
the  adjective  as  predicate  and  its  ending  ^^  tv'i  cf. 
§  331.    On  the  employment  of  the  adverb  cf.  §  300. 

b.  ADJECTIVES  IN  ?. 

♦132.  They  are  all  derived  from  substantives  or  pre- 
positions by  means  of  an  ending,  which  is  written 
with  i  and  in  Coptic  has  the  sound  of  ^ ;  if  the  adjec- 
tive is  derived  from  a  feminine,  there  arises  a  final 
syllable,  ti,  from  the  junction  of  the  feminine  ending 
-t  and  the  'i  of  the  adjective. — As  may  be  seen  from 
the  Copt,  this  ending  was  accented,  cf.  C§  93. 

"133.  This  ending  i  is  only  written,  where  it  really 
forms  the  end  of  the  word,  that  is  only  in  the  sing. 
masc: 

Sing.  m.    \\    (i),  derived  from  fem.    ^    (ii) 
f.     o    (it)        „  „        „        g    (tit) 

Plur.  m..^   (irv)      „  „        „      ^  (?w,  cf.  §  43. 

61.) 
f.    o    (iwt)    „  „        «     ^  ^  (tiwt). 

In  the  0.  e.  the  i  was  left  unindicated  even  in 
the  sing.  masc.  and  such  writings  are  often  found  in 
later  texts  also. — Thus: 


b.    ADJECTIVES    IN   ?.    134.  55 

Iri  "existent  at"  hnti  "existent  before" 


AAAAAA 


Sing.  m.()'^,  (j 
Plur.  m.  fl^^^"^ 


A.  The  Pyramids  write  I     i  for  «,    M    fl  for  fi,  and    V\    vX 
and   ^^,     ^^.     V\    for    V^,      (according  to  §  104  a). 

B.  In  the  m.  e.    v\  already  occurs  incorrectly  for  the  sing. 
;  m  the  n.  e.  the  plur,  masc.  is  also  written  , ,  ,  and  ^| 

V\    [\l\,        l\l\.    A  confusion  between         and         begrins  in  the 

n.  e.  also,  since  they  were  pronounced  about  alike  according  to 
§  97  B. 

Since  the  adjectives  derived  from  feminine  sub-  134. 
stantives  were  identical  in  form  with  the  dual  of  these 
substantives  (e.  g.  from  nt  "city" ;  nt'i  "urban",  and  ni'i 
"two  cities"),  such  duals,  in  the  oldest  orthography, 
are  often  written  for   the   corresponding  adjectives: 

^  |l[|w^^  "urban".  A  few  such  writings  occur  later  also ; 

note:     |^   ntr   nt'i  "the    urban   (i.    e.   native)   god", 

^^^  or  ^^^  Jlr   Iht'ii^)  "Horus    dwelling    in  the 
horizon." 


56  b.    ADJECTIVES   IN   'i.    135. 

135.         Those  adjectives  which  are  derived  from  a  pre- 
position, like: 

~[F^^^"[1"^'  ^"11")  ^"*^  "existent  in"   (from  m), 

(J'^(y^)  m  "existent  at"  (from  r), 

^  \        y  ^''^  "existent  upon"   (from  /ir), 
"^  V         '  ^^^  "existent  under"  (from  hr), 

^     ij^  ,   I J  tp'i  "existent  upon"  (from  tp), 

(^^^(rffi^i^)  hnti  "existent  before"  (from  hnt), 

/wwvA  ni  (cf.  §  125)  "belonging  to"  (from  w), 
likewise  a  few  others,  like: 

^       Irvii  "not  being"  (Copt.  AT-,  cf.  C§  89), 
mit'i  "being  like", 

ss.mht'i  "north  of"  &c. 

o\\ 

very  often  govern  a  following  substantive  or  personal 
suffix  (like  the  prepositions  etc.  from  which  they  are 
derived),  e.  g. 

=^  "^   imt  Ibf-'the  one  (fem.)  existent  in  his  heart".^ 
ir'i  Q  "belonging  to  the  house",^ 


1  LD  ni,  24  d.  2  Louvre  C  172. 


b.    ADJECTIVES    IN   ?.    136.    137.  57 


-H ^. 


hr'isst^  "one  supervising  (lit. "over") 


secrets"/ 

y  mlt'if  "resembling  him".^ 

All  that  is  stated  in  §§  129,  130  concerning  the  136* 
adjectives  without  ending,  is  valid  also  for  the  adjec- 

tives  in  i,  of.  /^  ,^  f  ^  I  ru  ^  rn  ^^^^^    -^i- 
Imirv  h^rvsn  "the  priests  serving  in  their  times''^  (lit. 

"existent  in  their  times"),  i        ^        smwt  mhfirvt 

^     o    I  I  oo  III 

/  M jgv 

"northern  lands'V  f=^  gssn   hr'i    "their 

upper  side      likewise  ^  I  gs    hri-sn 

"their  upper-side".^ 

Very  frequently  they  are  employed   like  a  sub-  137. 

stantive,  e.  g.    ^    \>- Q  Arjfws^  "those  existent  upon 

I  <=»  JK  000' 

i   the  sand"  (i.  e.  the  Bedouins),'  -  -  ¥\^^/wvaaa  \ 
lira  n  dirt  "the  interior  of  an  onion (?)",^  Vo 


III 

mit'iwk  "one  like  thee"^  (with  masc.  substantive  end- 
ing according  to  §  96,  2). 

In  this  manner  many  new  substantives  originat- 

ed,  especially  those  in  ti\  e.  g.  ^^.^^  ^^  hft'i  "enemy" 

1  Mar.  Ab.  II,  24.  2  lD  II,  149  e.  3  Siut  I,  311. 

<  Sin.  72.  5  LD  III,  24d.  6  Eb.  70,  4.  7  Una  13. 

8  Eb.  36,  16.  9  Prisse  6,  lb. 


58  c.  APPENDIX  (iri,  imy,  ns).  138.  139. 

((^Aqx),    ft  Imntt  "the  west"  (emnT,    from  smt 

Imntt  "western  land"),  Iwtt  "nothing"  &c. 


c.  APPENDIX  {iri,  imy,  m). 

138.  The   following   remarkable  unchangeable  expres- 
sions are  probably  descended  from  adjectives: 

1.  (J  Iri  [1  ir'iw  (?)  "belonging  to,  corre- 
sponding to"  (properly  probably  the  adjective  iri)  in 
expressions  like 

^\   J^gj^;  (1  m  isw'i  Iri  "as  corresponding 

reward,  as  reward  therefor'V 

^v    r \\  m  St  Iri  "in  the  corresponding 

place,  in  proper  condition".^ 

2.  l\  ^A\i\  ^f  I'^y  "belonging  to  him '  with 
changeable  suffix,  e.  g. 

ra^AAAAAA  I  ^^<S^  ^^  ^^^  ''^y  "^^®  oldest 
one  belonging  to  them,  the  oldest  of  them".^ 

139.  On  the  other  hand  the  word  «s,  which  we  also 
often  translate  "belonging  to",  is  really  an  old  verb] 
and  in  the  old  language  is  still  construed  as  suchj 
e.  g. 


1  LD  III,  24  d.  2  prisse  13,  11.  3  Westc.  9,  11. 


3.  NUMERALS,  a.    REAL  NUMERALS.  140.  141.         59 

^  i  V  ^^  ^^  f'h^O)  "belonging  to  the  hori- 

zon" (lit.  "the  horizon  possesses  him")'/ 

(I  T^"^  [I        \sm     \      irv  ns  St  mr  wC   "they 

are  from  one  stone"  (lit.  "one  stone  possesses  them")^; 
ns  s'imr-pr  "it  belongs  to  the  house- 


P 


»\3 


overseer"  (lit.  "the  house-overseer  possesses  it") 

3.  NUMERALS. 
a.  REAL  NUMERALS. 
The  numeral  figures  are:  140*. 

I  units,  T    thousands, 

n  tens,  I      tens  of  thousands, 

§  hundreds,  "^^^^  hundreds  of  thousands. 

The  greater  number  precedes  the  less: 

ITT  12,635. — In  dates  the  units  are  indi- 

cated  by  horizontal  strokes  ( — ,  IZ  &c.) 

In  so  far  as  they  are  known,  the  numerals  run  141. 
thus: 

\  wC  4  fdrv 

2  sn  5  drv^ 

3  hmt  6  sis 

1  Mar.  Cat.  d'Abyd.  999.         2  lD  III,  24  d.        3  Peasant  16. 


60  3.  XUMERALS.  a.    REAL  NUMERALS.  142.  143.  - 

7  sfh  100  §^C 

8  hmn  1000  h^ 
9jos(^                                      10000  ^&<: 

10  m^  100000  h/'n 

Of  the  tens,  30  is  mCb^;  for  the  others  the  plural 
of  the  units  was  used.    Cf.  C§  157. 
142.  The  numeral  follows  the  noun  and  the  latter  is 

for  the  most  part  in  the  plural:  1  ^  ^S  V^'HI 
stnyjv  8  "three  kings."  On  the  other  hand  the  noun 
stands  in  the  singular : 

1.  with  the  numeral  2,  >J>ii  1 1  wl:^  2  "two  ships" ; 

2.  in  specifications  of  measure  and  time,  also  in 

accounts,  j  rnpf  iiO  "110  years' ,   ^^||||    inh   4 

"4  ell8^ 

A.  The  pyramids  treat  the  numeral  as  a  substantive,  and 
suhjoin  to  it  the  numbered  word  as  an  apposition:  fdwf  ipiv  ntrto 
"these  his  4  gods'',  (lit.  "these  his  four,  the  gods").  This  construc- 
tion has  been  preserved  in  the  expression  \  ^  — ~  v\  5  hriw 

rnpt  "the  five,  the  ones  upon  the  year",  i,  e.  the  5  intercalary 
days. 

B.  In  LE  the  numeral  precedes  the  noun,  which  is  for  the 
most  connected  by  n\  only  in  the  specifications  of  an  account  and 
with  the  numeral  two,  does  the  old  construction  remain.  Cf.  also 
C§  162  sq. 

143.         The  numeral  '^^^''^  wC  "one",  which  is  mostly  writ 


I 


b.   APPENDIX   TO   THE   NUMERALS-    144 — 146,  61 

ten  out,  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender:  \     SI-  rnpt 

wCf  "one  year";^  the  other  numerals  perhaps  did  the 
same.  —  On  tvCrv  n  cf.  §  116.  —  By  placing  rvC  before 
an  adjectiye  or  verb,  its  meaning  is  rendered  super- 

tvC  Ikr  "the  only  excellent." 


lative:  " 


I 


The   numerals   are    also    used    as    substantives:  144. 
( — ^  hi  m  ii  "thousand  of  bread". 

Ml" 

The  ordinal  numerals  are  formed  by  the  ending  145*. 


nw.  snnw  "the  second",  Aw/«w  "the  third"  &c.: 
they  may  precede  or  follow  their  noun;  "first"  is 
supplanted  by  ^  tp'i  (cf.  §  135),  which,  as  an  ad- 
jective always  follows  its  noun.  They  are  all  used 
as  substantives  also. 

A,  In  the  pyramids  the  ordinal  numbers  are  entirely  written 


out:  in  like  manner  U  \\Ml^  snntv  "the  second"  is  later,  still 

found. 

B.  They  are  early  supplanted  by  a  circumlocution  with  mh 
"fill  up"  (the  third"  =  "that  which  fills  up  three");  cf.  also  C§  165. 

b.  APPENDIX  TO  THE  NUMERAL. 

The  probably  dual  word:  m.  Kzzy(>  u  (]  ky,  f.  146. 

kt  (for  ktl)  "the  other"  is  construed  like  the  numerals 
in  the  pyramids  (cf.  §  142  A) : 

1  Una  47. 


62 


THE    VERB.     a.    USUAL    CLASSES.    147.    148. 


^     ky  gsw  "another  salve"/ 


147. 


^^(jlj^^^^  ^  "^£55  ktyf  ruBt  "his  other  way".- 

The  real  plural  of  the  word  is  \^  ar  A-wj' (the 

first  W  is  the  old  determinative  of  the  dual);  more 
frequently  a  circumlocution  is  used  for  it 

kt-ht  "another  hody"  and 
thing",  i.  e.  others. 

The  substantive  pirv   "number",    with    following 
plural  or  singular  means  "every";  cf.      o     ] 
l/vww\    tfiff)   M[sn   "every  one  of  their  revolts"^    (lit. 
"number  of  their  revolts"). 


Ill 


^    o     i  II  I 
kt-lht    "another 


THE  VERB. 

1.  IN  GENERAL. 

a.   THE  CLASSES  OF  THE  VERB. 

o.  USUAL  CLASSES. 

'148.         The  verbs  are  divided  into  various  classes,    ac-J 
cording  to  the  number  and  character  of  their  con- 
sonants, the  so-called  "radicals".  These  classes  differ 
in  manner  of  inflection,  and  how  considerable  these 


1  Eb.   26,  13. 


2  Butler  IG. 


3  Una  28. 


1 


THE    VERB.     a.    USUAL    CLASSES.    149 151.  63 

-differences  were,  may  still  be  seen  from  the  forms  of 
the  verb  preserved  in  Copt.  cf.  C§  185  sq.  The  de- 
signation of  these  classes  is  that  common  to  Semitic 
grammar. 

The  most  common  class  is  that  of  the  bi-literal  149*. 

verbs  (abbrev.:  II  lit.)  as  e.  g,  ^^unmr  rvn  "to  open", 
^^  mh  "fill",  Jd^^^rp  M"build"&c.— They  retain 
their  consonants  in  all  forms  unchanged.  Cf.  C§ 
186  sq. 

The  verbs  '■''secundae  {radicalis)  geminatae''  (II ae  150*. 
gem.)  are  properly   triliteral  verbs  having  the  last 

two  radicals  alike  e.  g.  ^^rvnn  "to  be",  ^nlX  ^ 

"         AAAAAA  WVV     WS> 

kmm  "become  black",  zl        1  |\)    kbb    "become   cool", 

-*^^^\  V\  in^^  "see".  But  as  these  similar  rad- 
■<s>-  >>^  yy^ 

icals  fall  together  where  they  are  not  separated  by  a 
full  vowel,  in  most  forms  they  resemble  the  biliterals 
{mn,  km  &c).    Cf.  C§  199. 

The  very  numerous  verbs  ^^terdae  infirmae"  (Illae  151*. 
inf.)  have  as  third  radical  an  i  or  ""j  which  neverthe- 
less is  visible  only  in  certain  forms:  (1(1;  in  most 
cases  they  show  only  the  first  two  radicals  or  double 
also  the  second:            wr,  \>-          mrr. — e.  g.  qa 

mr  "love",  fflfl  ms  "bear",  ^~~^  J\  j9r"goout",  Hj' 


64  THE    VERB.     a.   USUAL   CLASSES.    152 — 154. 

j^  hS  "descend".  Cf.  C§  213.— The  frequently  re- 
curring verb  Ir  "make"  writes  the  forms  Ir  and  Iry: 
.<2=^  and  <2>-(l[l;  on  the  other  hand  the  form  irr  is 

written 

A.  With  a  part  of  these  verbs  the  third  radical  was  origin- 
ally a  M  or  m;  which  as  a  rule  became  i  or  \ 

♦152.         The  triliteral  verbs  (I'll  lit.)  like  the  II  lit.  (§  149) 

© 

Cnh  "live  ,  'Cv    ^    nhm  "rescue",     ^  ^ 

Stp  "load".    Cf.  C§  200  sq.  ' 

153.  The  verbs  '"''tertiae  geminatae"  (Illae  gem.),  which 
correspond  to  the  II  gem.    (§  150),    and   the   verbs 
'''•quartae  infirmae"  (IV  ae  inf.)  which  correspond  to  the 
Illae  inf.  (§  151),  as  a  rule  are  not  to  be  distinguish-  ; 
ed.    Both  double  the  third  radical  in  certain  forms  j 

(I  A   5p<?  "prepare":  Hc^ii  ii    spdd\    ffflfl^      h^l 

"be  revered":    ppl  >  1)    spss)\  only  isolated  examples  ' 

in  which  an  i  is  written  out  {  ^y  ips'i),   can  be 

safely  classed  with  the  IV  ae  inf.    Cf.  C§  227. 

154.  The  quadriliteral  and  quinqueliteral  verbs  (IV  lit. 
and  V  lit.)  correspond  to  the  II  lit.  and  III  lit.  and 
like  these,  their  consonants  remain  unchanged.  They 


p.    RARE    CLASSES    AND   IRREGULAR    VERBS.    155 157.  65 

are  mostly  derived  from  II  lit.   and  III  lit.:  Rj^:^ 

^  hmhm  "low,  roar'  (from  */?w),  r—  ^^1^ 
nhmhm  (from  nhni).  According  to  the  Copt,  the  IV  lit. 
and  V  lit.  seem  to  have  had  the  same  form  (cf.  C§ 
224.  226). 

p.  BARE  CLASSES  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

Beside  these  ordinary  classes  there  are  apparent-  155. 
ly  other,  smaller  groups,   which,  however,  cannot  be 
distinguished   with   certainty;    e.  g.    the    frequently 

recurring  verbs        y  dd  "say"  and    ^      ndr    "strike" 

present  many  points  which  distinguish  them  from 
other  II  lit.  and  III  lit.  —  Moreover,  within  the 
above  contrived  classes,  further  subdivisions  exist,  by 
reason  of  the  special  phonetic  character  of  one  of  the 
radicals. 

The  verbs  mediae  i,  which  have  an  ^^,   for  the  ise. 

second  radical,  like  Hi'^.  \j\    hBb    "send",    |  ^°1 

rvM  "become  green",  have  apparently  early  lost  the  i. 
Occasionally  it    appears — at  least    orthographically 

— as  the  third  radical:  H]  IH^  A&i  for  Ai&, T '^^ ) 

smB  "unite"  along  withT'^^;   sBm.    Cf.  §  29. 

The  verbs  uUimae  i  (Ilae  i,  Illae  i),  as  is  also  157. 

E  r  m  a  n  ,  Egypt,  jfiamni.  E 


66  p.    RARE    CLASSES    AND   IRREGULAR    VERBS.    158.    159. 

evident  from  the  Copt.,  had  various  peculiarities  (cf. 
C§  221.  222;  208).  Note  especially,  that  (according 
to  §  29)  a  few  verbs  Illae  9  (mostly  those  in  -mS) 
repeat  the  second  radical  after  the  i,  in  certain 
forms : 


kmB  "create" 

These  forms  are  possibly  to  be  read  k^m  and  rvSh 
and  the  syllabic  sign  is  only  retained  out  of  preference 
for  the  customary  orthography. 

158.  The  verbs  primae  «;,  like  %>  n  rvsh  "be  far" 
are,  in  part,  also  written  by  many  texts  without  their 
w;,  in  certain  forms;  cf.  especially  §  161.  —  The  verbs 
mediae    rv    write   the    rv    only    rarely,    and    in   part 

probably  early  lost  it;  hence  ^.  r^  ^t  "die"  is  al- 
ways written  for  mrvt  (cf.  C§  192)  and  often  "^^ 

for  <rz=>  ^    ^  )     rrvd  "grow".  —  The  existence  of 

verbs  mediae  I  may  only  be  conjectured  from  the 
Copt,  because  e.  g.  the  probable  form  ris  (according 

to  pOFlC  "wake")  is  always  written  "l  rs. 

159.  The  verbs  Ilae   gem.  in  i,  like ps  "divide", 

as  a  rule  make  the  form^s^^  7vss^  insdead  oipH,  wU\ 


p.   IRREGULAR    VERBS.    160.       f.    THE    CAUSATIVE.    161.  67 

cf.  §  30.  —  On  the  other  hand     °   \\    ps   (older  fs) 

"cook"  has  1  \\  pfs  and  — m— [  11  psf. 

Entirely  irregular  are:  160*. 

In  "bring"  (properly  Illae  inf.)  sometimes  written 

TT  A    AAAAAA 

jj    in^  sometimes    A  int, 

Iw  "go",  sometimes  y\^  ^w,  sometimes  7^^  ^w;f, 

I  "go"  sometimes   li  \\J\  Ui^\  sometimes  \\    «    H, 

and  especially  rdl  "give",  which  has  the  form  <ir>  A , 

rdl,    A,  0,  .a — D  dl  and  A  A,         °,  ^     ° 

dldl{J)\  the  last  corresponds  to  the  reduplicated 
forms. 

Y.  THE  CAUSATIVE. 

By  means  of  the  prefix    I   s  there  may  be  formed  161*. 

from  every  verb,  another  verb  with  causative  meaning. 
E.  g.  with  intransitives  lir  "fall":  sTir  "cause  to  fall", 
nfr  "be  beautiful":  snfr  "make  beautiful";  more  rare- 
ly with  transitives  Cm  "swallow":  s^^m  "cause  to 
swallow"  (i.  e.  "wash  down"),  rh  "know":  srh  "cause  to 
know"  (i.  e.  inform  against).  These  causatives  do  not 
remain  in  the  class  to  which  their  stem  verb  belongs ; 
thus  the  causatives  of  most  biliterals  have  feminine 
infinitives  {hr  "fall":   shrt  "to  fell",  cf.  C§  231),  and 


68  b.  VOICE.  162.   C.  EXPRESSION  OF  THE  SUBJECT  (iNFLKCTION).  163.  164. 

the  causative  of  mn  (infin.  smnt)  furthermore  doubles 
the  last  consonant  in  certain  forms  (smnn  cf.  C§  232). 
—  The  causatives  of  the  triliterals  are  treated  as 
quadriliterals  (cf.  C§  238).  —  With  verbs  primae  w, 
the  TV,  according  to  the  old  orthography,  falls  away; 

e.  g.  %P  n;s§«befar,  broad":  Hfl®  ssh  "broaden"; 

a  few  of  these  writings  occur  later  also. 

6.  VOICE. 

162.  It  is  certain  that  the  transitive  verb  distinguish- 
ed an  active  and  a  passive,  and  not  improbable  that 
the  intransitive  verb  was  analogously  divided 
(1.  incipient,  2.  continuous  condition);  cf.  §  241.  242. 
C§  171.  182.  Nevertheless,  all  details  are  as  yet 
obscure,  and  the  beginner  must  be  satisfied  to  familiar- 
ize himself  with  the  forms  thus  far  known  to  us, 
without  being  able  to  understand  their  systematic 
connection  more  exactly. 

c.  EXPRESSION  OF  THE  SUBJECT  (INFLECTION). 

163.  There  are  two  methods  of  inflecting  the  verb. 
The  earlier,  which  reminds  one  of  the  Semitic  perfect, 
is  still  employed  in  the  classic  language  only  within 
restricted  limits  (as  pseudoparticiple,  cf.  §  208). 

164.  The  later  method  uses  the  personal  suffixes  of 
§  73.    Cf.  e.  g.  sdm  "hear": 


C.    EXPRESSION    OF    THE    SUBJECT   (INFLECTION).    165 167.       69 


Sg.  1  c.  ^^.  ^     ^^^^ 

PI 

2  m.  ,v/  ^v^^^  *^^^ 

2  c.     A^)^  'V'^^^^sdmtn 

f.    ^^\  g=>  sdmt 

3  m.  ^^^\  2^-^    sdmf 

g)              rvAAAAAA 

f.    ^^\    I  sdms 

On  the  writing  of  each  sn 

ffix 

cf.  §  74.  75. 

A.  Dual  forms  occiii-  in  the  pyramids  also, 

B.  Apart   from   the   uninflected   passive   (cf.  §  206  A),    this 
inflection  was  first  lost  with  IV  lit.  and  V  lit.^ 

If  the  subject  is  a  substantive,  no  suffix  is  employ-  165.* 
ed  and  the  substantive  follows  the  noun  unconnected: 

hears  thy  voice". 

^  ^^^  V  I    V  S()^^~^  sdmtw  hrrvk  "thy  voice  is 
heard". 

An  absolute  pronoun  (cf.  §  80)  is,  by  exception,  166. 
also    employed   thus    as   subject:   hpr   si  m  hsbt   "it 
changes  into  worms"  (for  hprs). 

When  the  subject  is  a  substantive  or  an  absolute  167. 
pronoun,  the  verb  frequently  receives  an  ending  ^ 

1  According  to  Sethe. 


70  C.    EXPRESSION   OF    THE    SUBJECT    (INFLECTION).    168.    169. 

shdw  srv  t^Tv'i  r  itn  "he  illuminates  the  earth  better 
than  the  sun"/ 

168.  The  impersonal  use  of  the  verb  (without  subject), 
occurring  in  all  forms,  is  frequently  met  with.    Note 

especially:   (1^  ^w  "it  is"^;  irn    (w-form,    cf. 

1        Jl  AAAAAA 

§  194)  "that  amounts  to"^;  m  hprhr     ($r-form, 

cf.   §  204)    "that    amounts    to"^. — The    passives    are 
employed   with    especial   preference,    to  express  the 

indefinite  subject  (Germ,  "man",  French  "on"):  ) 

o  y\  rhtrv  "it is  known"^,  y     a  o\>  ^^^ntw  "one  stands"  , 
I   dd   "it   is    said"^.     This    impersonal   subject   is 

furthermore,  often    a   respectful    designation  of  the 
king. — On  the  omission  of  the  subject  in  animated 

narrative  cf.  §  353;  1     rdlln  "they  caused"^  is 

probably  also  to  be  explained  thus. 

169.  A  second  (logical)  subject,  to  indicate  the  real 
actor,  is  often  added  to  a  passive  or  intransitive  verb 
which  already  has  a  grammatical  subject.  This  is 
done  by  means  of  the  particles  In  and  hr: 


\ 


'  Mar.  Abyd.  II,  25.  2  Sin.  43.  225.  216.  3  LD  III  24  d. 
*  Math.  Hdb.  26.  41.  5  sin.  243.  6  Sin.  55.  "  Math.  Hdb.  49. 
8  Sin.  263. 


2.   USUAL   INFLECTION,    a.   IN   GENERAL.    170.  71 

nM  .  .  .  hr  s  "some  (of  the  fruit)  is   chewed  by   the 
man"^ 

■3™^ ^  O   ^^P   ^^   t'^   ^^    "  ''by    arm   is 

siezed  &y  Re^"^. 

In  the  same  manner  the  logical  subject  is  added 

to  infinitives  and  participles  by  means  of  ^w:  L J 

^  [1  'wwvA  ^^    ^;>^   ^j>^  ifi   hmti  "working  (lit.    making 
work),  on  the  part  of  the  artificer"^. 

2.  USUAL  INFLECTION. 
a.  IN  GENERAL. 
The  later  inflection  of  the  verb  falls  into  a  series  170*. 
of  forms,    which   are   in   part   indicated  by  endings 
attached  to  the  stem  (like  sdmnf,  sdmlnf)^  but  in  part 
also,    are    distinguished    by    the   vocalisation    only. 
These  latter  forms  have  orthographically,  essentially 
the  same  external  appearance  (sdm/"),  in  the  case  of 
most  verbs,  so  that  it  is  difficult  for  us  to  distinguish 
them  correctly.  Any  exact  separation  of  these  various 
forms,  is  therefore  not  attempted  in  the  following, 
and  only  the  two  great  groups  into  which  they  fall, 
are  distinguished. 

A.  The  most  important  aid  for  the  recognition  of  the  verbal 


1  Eh.  47,   19.         2  Ppy.  I,  97.         3  Br.  Gr.  W.   139. 


72   h.  THE  FORMATION  Sdmf.  a.  THK  FORMS  OF  THE  FIRST  GROUP.  172. 

forms,  is  afforded  by  the  pyramids,  which  often  prefix  a  []  for 
the  indication  of  the  prosthetic  vowel  e,  to  the  fornas  beginning 
with  two  consonants:  (I'  /(  '  V\  ,  pronounced  something  like 
''Smok.  This  prosthetic  vowel  is  left  unindicated  by  the  classic 
orthography  Q  J(  '  V\  );  on  the  other  hand  the  manuscripts 
of  the  new  empire  again  indicate  it  by  means  of  [I  ^7\. 

*171.  The  passive  of  the  later  inflection  ends  in  t  (tl, 
trv),  which  is  attached  at  the  end  of  the  word,  but 
precedes  the  suffix:  sdmtwf^  sdmntrvf,  sdmintrvf.  It  is 
first  made  with  transitives  and  causatives,  then  also 
impersonally  with  intransitives,  for  the  expression  of 
an  impersonal  subject  (Germ,  "man",  French  "on"): 

■T-  '  ^  V  ^^§^^  "they  (impers.)  live". — The  ending 
is  written,  t  or  tw  in  the  m.  e.,  and  in  the  n.  e. 
always  irv. 

A.  The  pyr.  write  the  ending    11  tl  or  c:^  t, 

B.  The  Copt,  has  lost  this  passive. 

b.  THE  FOEMATJON  sdmf. 

a.  THE  FORMS  OF  THE  FIRST  GROUP. 

A.  ITS  FORMATION. 

♦172.         It   apparently   includes   three    or   four   frequent 

forms,  the   differences    in    which,    are    no  longer  to 

be  determined.     Its   most  important  classes  are  as 

follows : 


b.  THE  FORMATION  Sdwf.  «.  THE  FORMS  OF  THE  FIRST  GROUP.  173.    73 

II  lit.  'kdy  «he  builds" :  i  c^>  FM  '^^_, 

III  lit.   s'dmf  "he  hears":  ^^^.=^, 

III  ae  inf.  m'rr/' "he  loves":  ^^^-^^-5  the  I  is 
nevertheless,  only  occasionally  written  by  the  pyra- 
mids (  0''^^=—)  and  by  the  manuscripts  of  the  n,  e. 
(  n  (1  ^^  ).  In  classic  orthography  it  is  only  written 
in  the  1  sg.  l^M^  rn'rl^i,  cf.  §  26. 

The  position  of  the  vowel,  indicated  in  §  170  A, 
is  denoted  by " ;  this  vowel  was  in  one  case  (with  the 
verb  dependent  upon  rdl  "cause  that'',  cf.  §  179)  an 
6  {'Mof,  s'dmof,  m'rlo/',  cf.  C§  234  sq.) ;  with  the  other 
forms  nothing  is  known  about  it.  (Concerning  TTPXACl 
cf.  C§  247). 

That  this  group  really  includes  different  forms,  173. 
may  be  seen  e.  g.  in  the  case  of  the  II ae  gem.  which 

in  certain  cases  separate  their  like  radicals:  -^^^.^^ 

wnnf  "he  is"  (cf.  §  178),  but  in  others,  do  not:  -^^ 
K..=^  wnf  (cf.  §  180).  Furthermore,  with  irregular 
verbs:  in  "bring"  sometimes  has    /\         a<^     Int/'  (cf. 

§  180),  sometimes    l\  Inf  (cf.  §  178),   sometimes 

both  forms:  Itv  "go"  varies  between   7^^  Ifvif 


74       b.   THE    FORMATION   Sdmf.    B.    ITS    USE    AS    INDICATIVE.    174. 


an 


d     _A^2^-=^    Irvf;  rdl  "give",  between 
rdif{%  174)  and  ^ — °  ^^/ (cf.  §  178.  180). 

B.  ITS  USE  AS  INDICATIVE. 
*174.         In  the  old  language  sdrnf  of  the  I.  group,  is  the 
usual  form  for  the  chief  events  in  ordinary  narrative: 

nt  smr  "His  majesty  established  me  in  the  rank  of  a 
friend"'.  In  the  later  language,  which  prefers  other 
forms  and  constructions  for  narration  (cf.  §  222. 
230.  239),  sdmf  is  retained  in  more  descriptive  sen- 
tences, in  which  the  action  makes  no  essential  pro- 
gress. This  is  especially  the  case  at  the  close  of  a 
short  paragraph: 

Tvnln  mr-pr  .  .  hr  srht  "the  house  overseer  complained 
of  (the  peasant) 
they  said,  ("he  is  justly  punish- 
ed &c".) 

the  house  overseer  was  there- 
upon silent. 

TT        I        Jr/ I  I  I 

YiP  n  wsof  n  nn  n 

3     \\    r    i     /\AA<V\A 


ddlnsn  nf 


gr-prv  irn  mr-pr 


X 


srn>,  wshf  n  sht'i  pn  "He  did  not  answer  the  princes, 
1  Una  2. 


C.  m  THE  CONDITIOKAL  SENTENCE.  177.    D.  AS  A  SUBJUNCTIVE.  179.     75 

(but)  answered  this  peasant''^  (The  last  two  clauses 
simply  enlarge  upon  the  fact  of  the  silence  already 
stated.) 

Here  belongs  also  the  formal    ^^^.^^     ddf    "he  175. 

said",  "he  says",  which  introduces  direct  discourse. 

It  is  further  used  where  a  fact  is  expressed,  in  176. 
descriptions,  assertions  and  the  like:  "The  plant  snwtt 

"^         ^  I  rrvds  hr  hts   it   grows    upon  its 

belly  (i.  e.  it  creeps)"^. 

C.  IN  THE  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCE. 
It  is  further  used  in  conditional  clauses  introduc-  177. 

€d  by  the  particle  (1  <=^  (cf.  §  389):  (1  <^:>^'i>^  1^^ 
Ick  .  .  .     ^  ^^Z3?6  Ir  gmk  st  .  .  .  ddhrk  "If  you 

find  it  .  .  .  then  say  .  .  &c."^. 

The  Ilae  gem.  are  doubled  in  this  case  {Ir  m^^k  178. 

*if  you  see");   In  "bring"  has  the  form    I\         ;    rdl 
^give",  the  form  ^     °. 

-D.  AS  A  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
It  is  very  frequently  dependent  upon  rdi  "give,  179*. 
cause  that",  a  combination  which  led  to  the  formation 
of  a  new  causative  in  Copt.,  cf.  C§  230b.    E.  g.: 

>  Bauer  50.         *  Eb.  51,  16.        3  Eb.  37,  18. 

E 


76  E.  IN  A  FINAL  CLAUSE.  181.    F.  AS  AN  OPTATIVE.  182. 

'     "       Vff^  ^    rdlnf  stpl  nl  "he  caused 


that  I  choose  for  myself  (of  his  land)"^ 
180.         In  this    case   the   II  gem.  are  not    doubled;   In 

"bring"  has  the  form     A    ^   ,  rdl  "give"  ,    Irvt 

"come"  j'^^  .  —  The    vowel    was    here    an    6, 

according  to  the  Copt.,  cf.  C§  234  sq. 


E.  IN  A  FINAL  CLAUSE. 
*181.         This    very  frequent   form   is   probably   identical 
with  that  of  the  subjunctive  and  optative.    It  stands 
without  introduction  :  "You  might  allow  your  servant 

to  come  to  me,  ra^  Jj^W  _  1^    ^  \\hMnk 

sw  hrs  that  I  may  therefore  send  him  to  you^. 

E.  AS  AN  OPTATIVE. 
*182.         Probably   identical  with  the  preceding:  qA 

^^zi:^      Jj  ^^zi:^  mrk  hmtk  "Love  thy  wife"^.    It  is  often 

introduced  by  means  of  the  particle  Ih:  (]    ^      ^^^ 

^    Ih  dds  nl  "let  her  say  to  me"^  or  by  means  of  a 

preceding  Ir  "do"  (impv.):    -^^^-^^^^^^         i^ 
mBSk  "see"^ 


1  Sin.  79,         2  Peasant  38.         3  Prisse  10,  9,        *  Sin.  172. 
5  Eb.  75,  12. 


p.  THE  FORMS  OF  THE  SECOND  GROUP.  A.  ITS  FORMATION.  184.  185.  77 

B.  Since  the  n.  e.  (J  V\     ^^\  tml  (imperative    of   rdl 

"cause  that",  cf.  §  256)  with  following  verb  is  often  substituted 
for  it :  tmi  mdicf  ni  "let  him  speak  with  me''  (lit.  cause  that  he 
speak  with  me). 

The  word  for  "behold"  undoubtedly  belongs  to  183. 
the  optative: 

Sg-  m.  1;^,    In,— f,    In,"!'  rnk  (mik^  cf.  §  35). 


f.    ^^  (and  the  like)  m?, 


Plur.    v\  (and  the  like)  mtn. 


p.  THE  FORMS  OF  THE  SECOND  GROUP. 
A.  ITS  FORMATION. 
The  forms  of  this  group  may  be  recognised  with  184*. 
certainty,  only  with  those  verbs  which  are  marked 
by  the  doubling  of  the  last  consonant  according  to 
§  185.    In  the  case  of  most  verbs  they  are  not  to  be 
recognised  from  the  orthography. 

A.  There  are  also  found  forms  of  this  group  in  ^^  lo  and 
(J  [J  y,  especially  in  old  texts,  e.  g.  Rj^^v  V,-— «  ^^^^  "thou 
comest  down",    ^^  (I  [I  -^~^  ddyk  "thou   saj'est",  but  probably 

only  with  verbs  which  have  a  t  or  (according  to  §  151  A)  a  ?&  as 
the  last  radical'. 

The  form  with  the   final   consonant  doubled,  is  185. 


*  According  to  Sethe. 


78         A.    ITS    FOllMATION.    186.    B.    USE    AS    AN   INDICATIVE.    187. 

found  in  the  case  of  the  Ilae  gem.,  Illae  gem.,  as 
well  as  the  Illae  inf.  and  IVae  inf.  With  the  last 
two  it  is  especially  easy  to  recognise  it,  for  they  are 
not  doubled  except  in  the  case  of  §  259.  289.  It  is 
to  be  noted  that,  in  the  case  of  the  frequently  re- 
curring verb  Illae  inf.   Ir  "make",  the  form  Irr  is 

indicated  by 

186.  In  place  of  the  form  with  final  consonant  doubled, 
the    irregular    verb    rdl   {di)    "give"   has   the   form 

A  A,   \  or  ^  i.  e.  didl(i)  (cf.  §  160). 

B.   USE  AS  AN  INDICATIVE. 

187.  The  significance  of  the  form  is  apparently 
emphasis ;  with  reference  to  the  future  it  is  used  very 
often,  in  promises,  threats,  directions,  questions  &c.: 

<^=><;^>0'"  '^^^^    ^    ^°^    gL     prr  grt  hrrv  3  pn 

n  sndt'i  nb  ''These  three  days  (rations)  will  be  delivered 
to  every  s.-priest"  (lit.  come  out  for)^ 

^^    nn  pssf  "he  shall  not  divide"-. 

-H—      X 


drop  in"^. 


1  Siut  I,  296.        2  Siut  I,  311.         3  Eb.  7,  22. 


C.INCONDIT.CL.  188.  D.DEP.UPON  VERBS.  189.  E.  DEP.  ONPBEPS.  190.    79 

C.  IN  CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 
It  is  further  used  in  conditional  clauses,  where  188. 
the   particle    Ir    (cf.   §   389)    does   not    immediately 


precede :  /^-^^  f\    ^  js  _  ^°^ 


gmfnk  fitf .  .  .  ddhrk  "If  you  find  that  his  body  ..  ., 
then  say  &c."'. 

D.  DEPENDENT  UPON  VERBS. 
It  further  follows  the  verbs      _    }      rh   "know",  189. 
'^'^v  ^^  "see",  Z'^^O)  ^^    ff"^    "find";    likewise 
mr  "wish"  (lit.  "love"),  ^^  ^  snd  "fear",  |  "^  ; 
tvd  "command"  and  the  like: 

I  v\  Y  n,  <cz>  wdnnnfprri 

r  sw?  ^w  "His  majesty  commanded  that  I  go  to  this 
mountain"^. 

nirrf  "My  majesty  knows  that  he  is  a  god"^. 

QO^'  ■  ■  ^°^(jO^^^^^==^  "I  desire  that  you  say"*. 

E.  DEPENDENT  UPON  PREPOSITIONS. 
It  is  dependent  upon  various  prepositions,  which  190. 
govern  a  sentence  after  the  manner  of  our  conjunctions ; 
the  usage  seems  to  vary.   E.  g. : 

1  Eb.  36,  15.      2  LD  II,  149  e.      3  LD  IH,  24  d.      *  Weste.  9,  8. 


80  Y.    APPENDIX.    191—193, 

"let  the  patient  drink  this  <:z^%'^^  '"'^  r  wssf 
"till  he  urinates"^ 

'^  \^  \^        \>  ^  hr  mB^f  ml  "because  he 


sees  me"^. 


I 

1^=^^^^  ml  hccfm  IBhti^)  "as  he  shines 
in  the  region  of  light"^- 


''Be  not  haughty  toward  him  ^^^^ 

hft  hssf  when  he  is  wretched"*. 

Y.  APPENDIX. 

191.  Beside  the  cases  cited  in  §§  172—190,  the  for- 
mation sdmf  is  found  elsewhere,  where  it  is  not 
possible  to  state  anything  definitely  concerning  the 
forms  employed. — On  the  substantivized  forms  cf. 
§  282  sq.,  on  the  relative  forms  §  394. 

192.  The  form  sdmf,  in  contrast  with  sdmnf  (§  197),  ie 
sometimes  present  in  meaning;  so  especially  in  rel 
tive  sentences,  cf.  §  396. 

193.  All  that  is  stated  in  §§  172 — 191,  as  far  as  may 
be  seen,  is  valid  also  for  the  passive  in  t  (cf.  §  171). 
In  the  first  group  the  II  lit.   make  the  form :  'kd^twf, 

the  Illae  inf. :  |||  H  0%^*^-:^  msiwf,  rdl\ \i^\  dltwf; 


1  Eb.  6,  15.       2  Sin.  117.       3  LD  lU,  24d.       *  Prisse 


c.  THE  w-FORM  sdmnf.    a.  its  formation.  194.  195.  81 


in  the  second  group  however  rdl  has  the  form  ^ 


"^"^  dldltrv/'. 


A D 


c.  THE  n-FOKM  sdmnf. 

a.  ITS  FORMATION. 

In  this  form  the  stem  receives  an  ending  w,  which  194*. 

is  written  after  the  determinative:  Q7\  mrnf 

"he  loves".    It  belongs  inseparably  to  the  stem,  as 
may  be  seen  from  §338sq. ;  the  passive  ending  follows 

it:  /*-n\  ^.  '^^  '  Qf^ntws  "she  is  found". 

Note  further,  that  the  form  began  with  a  simple  195. 
consonant  (that  is  to  say,  without  the  prosthetic  vowel, 
cf.  §  170  A),  and  that: 

1.  the  II  ae  gem.  contract  their  consonants:  .^ 
^^  mBnf  "he  sees  , 

2.  the  Illae  inf.  show  only  the  second  consonant: 
^\  mrnf\  -<2>-  Ir  "make"  has  the  form  A^AAA^ 

according  to  §  151, 

■       3.  the  verb  rdl  "give"  (cf.  §  160)  nearly  always 

has  the  form  ( <iz>/\  ,  j. 

B.  The  M-form  had,  for  the  most  part,  already  lost  its  n  in 
the  n.  e. 

Ermaa,  Ag-ypt.  Granim.  J" 


82  p.  ITS  USE.     196—198. 

p.  ITS  USE. 
^gg  This  form,  which  is  only  used  independently,  or- 

iginally served  to  narrate  events  with  animation; 
e.  g.  in  an  old  text,  which  otherwise  usually  employs 
sdmf  for  narrative,  the  events  of  war  are  recalled  with 

liveliness  by  means  of  the  n-form:  0  ^^'^^^  f^  ^  ^  Mt^ 

/i  Hr'irv-sC  "This  army  came,  it  cut  to  pieces  the  land 
of  the  Bedouins."^ 

Thence  further  also,  in  asseveration,  explanation 
and  the  like,  e.  g. :  "Lay  this  upon  the  place  of  the 

extracted  hair,  .^.rUv  "  nrrvdnf^ii  (certain- 


ly) will  not  grow  (again)".  ^ 

ra  .a Oo        >«CZI>  g        > 

^^  /www  rnin    rnntn    "behold,    ye, 

know  that  etc."  (in  ceremonious  style). ^ 

♦197.         It  often  indicates  the  past,  especially  in  relative 

clauses  (cf.  §  396),  but  occurs  elsewhere  also  (cf.  § 

220.  283)   in  contrast   with  a  preceding   verb:    "His 

.   ^  .  n  ®   «      ^"'"^  ©^  /R 

majesty  came  in  peace     I  S^  f^ 

shrnf  hft'iwf  "he  had  overthrown  his  enemies"*  (i.-  e^ 
after  he  had  overthrown  them). 
*198.  Since  the  m.  e.  the  «-form  is  used  for  the  mc 

part,  in  an  entirely   different  manner;   it  adds  to 

1  Una  22.       2  Eb.  63,  17.        3  siut  I,  310.       *  LD  H,  1221 


p.   ITS   USE.    199.  83 

preceding  word  or  sentence,  an  accompanying  remark 
more  particularly  explaining  it  (circumstantial  clause). 
So  in  descriptions: 

'^    ^  .,_jv^     c::^:>    V  ^  ^  ^'''  ^  fndrvnf 

''The  mouth  is  silent  and  he  does  not  speak".' 

"He  found  the  canal  obstructed  ^^a_^  Iv      „    ^vwwv 

>j2i£:,    ^    jiL^_  n  skdn  dpi  hrf  and  no  ship  sailed 
upon  it  (longer)".^ 

And  likewise  in  narratives :  "Then  this  peasant 
went  to  implore  him  /^^-O)    ^^  *  V  A 

gmnf  srv  lir  prt  and  found  him  as  he  came  out  &c".^ 

As  may  be  seen  in  the  case  of  the  last  clause,  the 
question  is  no  longer  one  respecting  an  unimportant 
accompanying  circumstance,  but  the  second  occur- 
rence (he  found),  overagainst  the  preceding  impor- 
tant event  (he  went),  is  pushed  into  the  background 
in  a  stylistic  manner  only. 

A.  The  pyramids  already  employ  the  above  also. 

It  is  a  remarkable  fact,  that  T  nfr  "be  good"  199. 

seemingly  always  takes  the  w-form:  nfrn  drv  "The 
place  is  good'V  nfrn  Ppy  "P.  is  well".^ 


1  Prisse  4,  4.  2  Inscription  of  Sehel.  3  Bauer  34. 

J  Prisse  9,  10.  »  Pepy  ].  i69.  170. 

F* 


84    d  THE  iw-FOEM  sdmlnf.   e.  the  /ir-roRM  sdmhrf.  200 — 204. 

d.  THE  (n-FOEM  sdminf. 
♦200.  That  which  is  stated  in  §§  194,  195  is  valid  also 

for  the  formation  of  the  In-iorm:  ^^.  IJ  sdmlnf 

201.         Originally  this  form  was  ceremonial;  it  is  there- 
fore especially  preferred  where  the  subject  is  a  person 


to  whom  respect  is  due,  e.  g.  (I  a/wwv  y  rdlln 

/jn/ "the  king  occasioned"^  (sentences  of  the  context 
with  other  forms). 

202.  But  many  texts  of  the  m.  e.  also  employ  it  else- 
where in  narrative,  especially  in  the  case  of  the  com- 
mon words:  ^°^  dd  "speak",  <2>-  Ir  "do",  J\\^    Itv 

"go"  and     ]\     in  "bring". 

A/VWAA 

203.  It  is  further,  often  used  in  directions,  e.  g.   1^^ 

[I  AAAAAA  ^  [I  ^j.^,,^  v8j  I  srvrlln  s  "Let  the  man  drink",^ 
or  in  "when  water  comes  out  of  it,    ■<3>-  h 

1    V ^  M 

irlnk  ns  then  make  for  it  (the  receipt)  &c".^ 

e.  THE  ^r-FORM  sdmhrf. 

204.  This  rare  form  also  corresponds  to  the  w-form  in 

its   formation.     It  is  employed  in  descriptions:   -^^ 
[1  ^^   _   _    ,  wn^irf  w3d  mi  wnn  tp 

1   A/V 


1  Sin.  243.  2  Eb.  32,  21.  3  Eb.  56,  9. 


3.    THE   UNINFLECTED    PASSIVE.    205.    206.  86 

^i  "He  was  green  (i.  e,  throve)  like  one  who  is  upon 
earth".^    Here   also,   probably   belong   the  formulae 

^  'i^-^^  Jiprhrf  "that  is"^  (as  result  of  a  com- 

putation) and  £^  ^  <rz>  1  (Ellipse  for  ddhrttv  rs 

"they  say  to  her")  "her  name  is".^ 

It  occurs  more  frequently  in  directions  (like  the  205. 

m-form  §  203),  e.  g.  ^°^         Kzi:^<zi>Uddhrk  rs  "say 
to  her"/  '^    ®    o  %^  ddhrirv  "let  there  be  said".^ 

3.  THE  UNINFLECTED*  PASSIVE. 
This  formation,  which  when  written,  is  exactly  206*. 
like  the  active,  leaves  one  in  doubt  whether  it  should 
be  classified  with  the  earlier  or  later  inflection.    It  is 
only  to  be  found  with  certainty,  with  nominal  sub- 
ject, e.  g. 


AAAAAA 


\  S)  ^  ^  1 1 1  ms  «yt  hrdw  3  "Three  child- 

ren are  born  to  thee",^ 


*  The  word  "uninflected"  does  not  adequately  translate  the 
term  used  by  the  author,  viz.  "endungslos"  as  distinguished  from 
the  passive  ending  in  tw;  but  "endungslos"  has  absolutely  no 
equivalent  in  Eng.,  and  as  this  passive  can  with  certainty  be  found 
only  with  nominal  subject,  it  may  be  stated  with  the  greatest 
probability,  (as  far  as  inflection  involves  pronominal  endings)  that 
it  was  uninflected.  It  certainly  is  so,  for  the  practical  purposes 
of  grammar,     transl. 

1  Eb.  2,  4.  2  Math.  Hdb.  41.  3  Eb.  9,  20. 

*  Eb.  36.  i4.  5  Eb.  16,  3.  6  Westc.  11,  5. 


86     4.  OLD  INFLECTION  (pseudoparticiple).  a.  ITS  formt'n.  207.  208. 

and  occurs  with  unchangeable  stem,  in  one  form  only. 
— The  impersonal  verbs  of  §  168  also,  are  probably 
to  be  explained  in  part  as  uninflected  passives. 

A.  There  are  a  few  obsolete  passive  forms  with  suffixes,  like 
e.  g,  hrss  "she  was  buried",  ^  and  these  may  also  belong  here.  The 
uninflected  passive  would  then  belong  to  the  later  inflection. 

207.  It  often  takes  the  place  of  the  passive  in  t^  especi- 
ally where  the  latter  would  be  in  the  «-form,  in  a  cir- 
cumstantial clause  (cf.  §  198)  or  the  combination  with 
ChCn  (cf.  §  230).  On  the  other  hand,  it  cannot  be 
used  in  dependent  clauses,  so  that,  for  example  after 
rdi,  the  passive  in  t  must  always  be  used. 


4.  OLD  INFLECTION  (PSEUDOPARTICIPLE). 
a.  ITS  FOEMATION. 
*208.  It  is  found  in  only  one  form,  the  so  called  pseudo- 

participle,  the  formation  of  which,  in  the  m.  e.   ac- 
cording to  the  usual  orthography  is  as  follows: 


Sing.  1  c. 

2  m. 
f. 

3  m. 
f. 


1*^"^ 


AAA/V\A         Ol 


AAAAAA 


13  AAAAAA 


mnkrvlijnnkwTj  "I  remain" 
\v\  mntl 
mntl 


mn 


AAy>^A^ 


^u^ 


\\\  mntl 


1  Mar.  Mast.  201. 


4.  OLD  INFLECTION  (pSEDDOPARTICIPLe).  a.  ITS  FORMT'N.  209  —  211.      87 


Plur.  1  c. 

AA/V\AA 

2c.   '^ 
3  c.  '^ 


AAAAAA 


w 

mnwin 
I  1  I 

mnt'iwm 

w 


mn. 


A.  The  original  forms  of  the  3  pi.  (cf.  §  212)  and  the  forms 
of  the  dual  (m.  tnnivy,  f.  mntyiv,  mnty)  were  early  lost. 

B.  In  the  n.  e.,  other  forms  also  begin  to  drop  out;  in  Copt, 
(cf.  C§  181)  the  3  m.  sg.  has  supplanted  all  the  others  and  only  a 
few  3  f.  sg.  are  preserved  with  them. 

The  ending  of  the  1  sg.  is   also  written  ^zi::^^  209. 

and  many  texts  seem  regularly  to  use  this  form  with 

certain  verbs  ( -^^  ,         |  ,    r\\T\,  >t  ^  )•     C)ther 


writings  are  -^ziiPt  (o.  e.),  •v^:^  v\  and  rarely  ^-i: 

B,  In  the  n.  e.  it  was  pronounced  -Ic. 

In  the  case  of  the  endings  ti,  the  writing  o:,  is  210. 
customary,  especially  in  the  manuscripts  of  the  m.  e. 

B.  Vulgar  writings   of  the  n.  e.  are  sr=D  t  and  c^    v\     tio; 
the  ending  was  at  that  time,  already  spoken  -t. 

The  3  m.  sg.^  originally  had  the  ending  (I  ,    more  211. 

rarely  ^  :  ^^?  jQ  ^^^''  "(^®  ^^)  anointed",  "^Q 
^  V  M  -^^^^  "(^^  ^^)  caixed" ;  in  the  case  of  the  Illae 
inf.  and  IVae  inf.  the  g,  with  the  final  ^  becomes  (1(1 : 

•  Details  according  to  Sethe. 


88    4.  OLD  INFLECTION  (pseudopahticiple).  a.  ITS  formt'n.  212 — 214. 

n(l(l  msil  "(he  is)  born".    In  the  m.  e.  the  writings  in 

[1  (1  are  frequent,  those  in  ^   not  rare,  but  those  in 

(1   have  disappeared;  the  ending  of  most  verbs  was    > 

probably  already  lost. 

^^^-  ^^  may  also  be  written  for     v\         ;  the'^e 

1  I  I  *'  JL  I  \  \ 


was  originally  in  the  plural  a  3  m,  in   v\  and  a  3  f . 

in  AiJ  ^^;  but  both  were  already  lost  at  a  very  remote 
period  and  only  the  3  m.  occasionally  occurs  in  the 
m.  e.:  0^  Ifv  "they  come". 
^213.         The   pseudoparticiple   apparently  had  originally 
two  forms,  an  active-transitive  and  a  passive-intransi- 
tive.   But  the  first  was  very  early  lost. 
214.         The  vocalisation  can  be  restored  only  in  the  pas- 
sive-intransitive forms,  which  are  retained  in  the  Copt.; 
thus  restored,  in  the  most  important   cases  it  runs 
about  as  follows,  the  endings  being  added  according 
to  the  later  pronunciation,  as  -e  and  -te: 
j  II  lit.  m.  mene,  f.  mente  ("remaining") 
^,  II  gem.  m.  kebe  ("cool") 
(III  inf.  m.  mosje  ("born") 
llll  lit.  m.  sodme,  f.  ^sdomte  ("heard") 
(III  gem.  m.  sepdode  ("prepared") 
(lY  lit.  m.  hemhome,  f.  hemJiomte  ("roaring"). 


b.    ITS    USE.    a.    ACT.-TRASS.    p.    PASS.-INTRANS.    FORM.    215 — 217.       89 

\  A.  The  pseudoparticiple  of  the  transitive  of  the  II  lit.  was 

pronounced  something  like  erJj'w  ("knowing"). 

In  the  case  of  the  Illae  inf.,  the  forms  |T|  l^and  215. 
occur  side  by  side,  but  the  latter  is  the  more 
frequent. — Of  the  irregular  verbs,  rdl  "give"  has  the 
form  Vs>  ,  rdlrv,  also  . o^  dlw  and 

%:v  dldlrv;  I  "go"  makes  the  3  m.  0()(l7]\5  otherwise 

b.  ITS  USE. 
a.  IN  THE  ACTIVE-TRANSITIVE  FOEM. 

The  few  old  texts,  which  still  make  this  form  of  2J6. 
the  pseudoparticiple,  employ  it  as  a  narrative  form, 
and  preferably  at  the  close  of  a  short  paragraph,  from 
which  it  draws  a  conclusion.     It,  seemingly,  s^till  oc- 
curs, only  in  the  1  sg.:    Irkwl  "and  I  did",    1  fu 

^^  y^    shikrvl  "and  I  caused  to  descend". — Only  the 

verb  rh  "know",  although  it  is  transitive,  has  preserv- 
ed a  living  pseudoparticiple;  its  use  corresponds  ex- 
actly with  that  of  the  passive-intransitive  form  (cf. 
§  217sq.,  241). 

p.  IN  THE  PASSIVE-INTRANSITIVE  FORM. 

The  pseudoparticiple  of  the  intransitives  and  pas-  217. 


sives,  as  well  as  that  of  the  transitive  verb 


I 


rh 


90  p.    IN   THE   PASSIVE-IKTRAKSITIVE    FOKM.    218.    219. 


*218. 


"know"  (cf.  §  216),  is  still  used  as  an  independent 
verb,  almost  only  in  the  1  sg.,  e.  g.  |  l90''^^~-^  V 
^    ^     I  hskrvl  hrs  "and  I  was  therefore  praised".^ 

A.  The  pyr.  still  have,  e.  g.  sJitpf  vtrwi'',  hfpwci  "he  satisfies 
the  two  gods,  and  they  are  satisfied"  2  (8  m.  du.)  and  the  like. 

It  is  more  frequently  employed  in  order  to  annex 
to  a  substantive  or  pronoun  a  closer  limitation,  where 
we  would,  for  the  most  part,  employ  a  participle.  E.  g. 

"This  command  came  <iz>^ 


A 


re 


ChCktvi   to    me,   (as)   I   stood   (in   the    midst   of   my 
tribe)".^ 


fl 


O      I 


219. 


lyAAA^AA  hugmmk  drwfsm,  htf  khti  "If  you  find  his 

sole  hot  and  his  body  cool"  (lit.  "if  you  find  his  sole, 
it  is  hot)".'' 

STV  slsy  "Look  at  him  stretched  out".^ 

B.  In  Copt,  the  remains  of  the  pseudoparticiple  have  entire- 
ly gone  over  into  participles.    Cf.  C§  181.  182. 

On  the  use  of  the  pseudoparticiple  as  apparent 
predicate  cf.  §§  240  sq.,  246 sq.,  233,  234,  402. 


1  LD  II,  122  a.  2  Pepy  I,  348. 

^  Eb.  37,  3.  6  Eb.  36,  7. 


3  Sin.   199. 


\ 


5.    COMP.    WITH    FORMS    OF    THE    USUAL    INFLECTION.    220.    221.       91 


5.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  FORMS  OF  THE  USUAL 
INFLECTION. 

a.  INTEODUCED  BY  "IT  IS". 
a.  THE  FORMS  Itv  sdmf  AND  itv  sdmnf. 

With  tiie  impersonal  auxiliary  verb  (1  ^    irv    "it  220*. 
is",  there  are  made  two  forms,  which  as  a  rule  are 
distinguished  in  usage  as  follows: 

irv  sdmf  "he  hears  (heard)", 

irv  sdm7if"-\s.Q  (had)  heard"  (past,  cf.  §  197). 

With  the  first,  both  passives  occur ;  with  the  second, 
only  the  passive  in  t.  With  nominal  subject,  the  forms 
run:  irv  sdm  ntr  "the  god  hears",  irv  sdmn  ntr  "the  god 
heard". — In  contrast  with  the  simple  forms  sdmf  and 
^dmnf  these  have  a  certain  independence  (like  other 
clauses  introduced  by  irv  cf.  §  246,  332). 

It  is  therefore  used,  where  a  fact  is  to  be  express-  221. 
-ed  in  a   single  independent  remark:    "This  plant  is 

used  so  and  so  fl^   ^  ^n^^^~^(j;  o'^'tl:!,  /wwva^  J) 
^  N^      irv  grt  srrvdtrv  sn  n  st  m  tSyfprt 

"further,  the  hair  of  a  woman  is  made  to  grow  by 
means  of  its  fruit'', ^ 

"The  prince  came  to  the  king  and  said,  (I  ^  A 

%  irv  inni  Ddi  I  have  brought  Ddi  hither".'^ 


'  Eb.  47,  19  (cf.  §  115).  2  Westc.  8,  8. 


92      a^.    AUXILIARY   fEKB    tVU.      ha..    THE    FORM    iwf  Sclmf.      222 — 225. 

222.  It,  is  used  especially  at  the  beginning  of  a  narra- 
tive or  of  one  of  its  paragraphs:    (1  ^  fU^^    1 

^  ^w  Ai&«  w^  w&^  "My  lord  sent  me  out  &c."  ^ 

(Beginning  of  the  narrative). 

•    p.  WITH  THE  AUXILIARY  VERB  vm. 

223.  The  corresponding  use  of  the  auxiliary  verb  -^^ 
Tvn  "it  is",  is  far  more  rare  and   probably  archai 
There  are  found   -^^  ^  ^\         tvn  sdmf  "he  hears ", 

AftAAAA  W\S- 

■^^  ^  ^>^  '^^^  sdmnf  "he  heard"  and  a  -^^    ^. 

^  ^v       '^w^w  sd'w/'  "he  heard". 

&.  WITH  DOUBLE  SUBJECT, 
a.  THE  FORM  iwf  sdmf. 

♦224.  This  form  [1  ^      ^  ^^       ^^^  srfw/  (lit.  "he  is, 

he  hears"),  means  "he  is  accustomed  to  hear".    With 
nominal  subject  it  runs  as  follows:  (1  ^  ]  J|^  ^n. 
irv  ntr  sdmf  "The  god  is  accustomed  to  hear".    "When 
a  number  of  verbs  in  this  form  follow  one  another, 
Iwf  is  used  with  the  first  of  them  only. 
225.         It  is  used  (similarly,  the  forms  of  §  221)  in  re- 

»  LD  II,  149  e. 


p.  THE  FORMS  lonf  sdntif  AND  wtiinf  sdmf.  226 — 228.        93 

marks,  in  which  a  fact  is  stated:  U   y>         q°\^      1 

A DO  V^  l^S  Irv  grt prts  dlttvs  hr  tB  "Further, 

its  fruit  is  accustomed  to  be  laid  upon  bread".^ 

"He  who  has  this  book  (j%>^^^_-^  ^^^    '--' 

/     f^  V  m  K^m    "^  ^      ^^  Irvf  ckf 

prf  ....  irvf  rhf  hprrvt  nf  nbt  goes  in  and  out  .... 
he  knows  all  that  happens  to  him".^ 

But  on  the  other  hand  it  is  also  employed  (like  226. 
the  forms  in  §§  246 — 249)  in  descriptions  and  des- 
criptive narratives: 

y  V^- fl ^  ^^'^^ /vwvAA (I   W  ?^ ^^  iTvl  dll  mrv 

\n  lb  "I  gave  water  to  the  thirsty".^ 

It  is  especially  preferred  in  the  case  correspond-  227. 
ing  to  §  249,  for  the  continuation  of  a  relative  clause 
ior  the  like: 

~^  A/vwwv'v\  8  J  o  "^^^^  ^7  s^^  "^  nhbtf,  Irvf  mnf  Cfi  n 
nhbtf  "A  man  on  whose  neck  there  is  a  swelling  and 
"who  has  pain  in  the  two  organs  of  his  neck".'* 

p.  THE  FORMS  wnf  sdmf  AND  wrdnf  sdmf. 
The  form  -^'^^  ^^==_  ^  V\   5^^=.-  rvnf  sdmf  is  very  228. 


I 


»  Eb.  51,  18.        2  Totb.  15  B,  6.        3  Sin.  96.        *  Eb.  51,  20. 


94    bf.  THE  FORM  hrf  sdnif.    en.,  with  chon>  and  OlC-  229.  230. 

rare;  another,  rvninf  sdmf,  which  only  occurs  where 
one  of  the  words  for  king,  forms  the  subject:    -^"  (1 

AAA/VV\        I 

majesty  sent  to  me'V  is  explained  by  §  346. 

Y-  THE  FORM  hrf  sdmf. 
229.         This  rare  formation  is  evidently  related  to  sdmh?f. 

and  like  it,  is  used  in  directions :  ^:zi>«  Y  fi  i  '^cn^ 

=^  hrk  roBhk  dtk  "lay  your  hand",^ 


o\ 


^       ^  1^  l[]  ^^^  §f*  s?  5^55  d^dSs  Im  "Let  the  woman 

anoint  her  head  with  it",^  o  %>  A 0  c^  \\   hrtw 

diirv  "Let  there  be  given".^ 

c.   WITH  A  VERB  OF  MOTION. 
a.  WITH  cAc«  AND  chC- 

*230.         The  very  frequent  combination  y         ^  ^ 

CJiCn  sdmnf  ("he  arose  and  heard"?),  originally  markc 
an  occurrence  in  the  narrative,  as  significant  (some? 
thing  like  'then  he  heard").  In  the  popular  language 
of  the  m.  e.,  however,   it  is  weakened  to  the  usual 

form  for  narrative  ("he  heard"),    v  is  also  writ- 

A      AAAAAA 

ten  archaically  ^ dv  ,  ¥    7^  ■,  and  ^  i^-^^^^. 

"'  \  'A  Aa 


1  Sin.   174.  2  Eb.  48,  3.  3  Eb.  47,  21.  «  Eb.  44,  3. 


CO..  WITH  chCn  AND  C^O    231—234.  95 

A.  In  the  language  of  the  o.  e.  this  compound  still  seems 
to  be  wanting. 

In  the  case  of  the  active  of  the  transitives,  Q^w  231*. 
always  has  the  w-form  following:    ^  <^=^^  A 

ChCn  rdlnf  "he  gave",  ^  ^^^  "=^     ^'^^'^    ^^^    ^^^^ 

"The  prince  said". 

No  example  of  the  passive  in-^  occurs;  the  unin-  232*. 
fleeted  passive,  however,  is  freely  used  after  QiCn  (cf. 

§  207):  f— ^nn    °     Hi^  V^^  ''^^'"'  ''P^  ^^ 
sspt  ''The  house  was  fitted  out'V 

Y  (-hCn  rdl  "they  (impers.)  occasioned".^ 

The  nominal  sentence  described  in  §  240sq.,  whose  233*. 
verb  is  in  the  pseudoparticiple,  is  employed  with  in- 
transitive verbs: 

"His  majesty  went  in  peace".^ 

If  the  subject  is  a  pronoun,  it  is  attached  to  CJiCn 

as  suffix:   f    a     ^  fm^'       ■Cj/^^^^^^^^H^^^''  intktvi, 

"I  sailed  up"."* 

M— ^n   ^   ^lA  chCns  grtl  "She  ceased".^ 

Other  than  in  narrative,  there  is  also  used  the  234. 

»  Westc.  3,  8.  2  ib.  8,  4.  3  LD  U,  122  a. 

♦  LD  11.  122  b.  5  Westc.  6,  3. 


96    p.  WITH  in,  prn  and  iiv.   d-  the  form  sdmf  pio.  235—237. 

form  Y  A  ^^^,  which  transitive  verbs  follow  in  the 
form  sdmf,  while  intransitives,  just  as  with  ChCn,  fol- 
low in  the  pseudoparticiple: 

nbt  "then  he  discharges  all  worms''.^ 

"flra'^']|(l^ ^^^^^«  fi^i^  ^^r  ^  "then  she 


falls  immediately".^ 

/J.  WITH  in,  prn  AND  iw. 
235.         The  forms    Q (1  -^    In  and  '~~'  ^  ,    which    are 
derived  from  ^  "come"  and  pr  "go  out",  are  far  rarer 
than  QiCn,  but  like   it  in  construction  and  original 
meaning. 

2^^-         ^    V  ^^  "^°"  ^^  ^^^^  employed  like  Qf,  cf.  y\ 
$ °^ -■t=::p5  V\  Vv?»  ^^^  mhkrvl  "then  I  am  full".^ 


d.  THE  FORM  sdm/  pw. 
237.  The  form  sdmf  pw,  in  the  first  instance,  means 

something  like  "it  is  he  who  hears"  (cf.  §  87  on  prv)'^ 
but  it  further  appears  to  denote  also  a  condition  a^ 

tained:  "When  you  find  this  or  that  in  him    1    jj 

□  ^  siibf  pw  then  he  is  well".^     The  verb  has  thi 

form  of  the  second  group,  cf.  §  184  sq. 

1  Eb.  20,  7.     2  Eb.  51,  18.     3  Math.  Hdb.  35,  36.      ^  Eb.  37,  1^ 


6.  WITH  Ir.  238.  7.  with  pseddoparticiple  or  infinitive.  240.  97 

6.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  ir  "MAKE". 

The  combination  of  Ir  "make,  do"  with  an  infi-  238. 
nitive  dependent  upon  it  as  object  ("he  does  hearing"), 
is  used: 

1.  Often  with  verbs  of  going:  ■<2>-^'^=i  ^v     « 
irt  smt  "I  went"^ 


2.  With  compound  verbs :  =?s=  Ov^  Irni 

dr-tS  "I  journeyed"^,  -<2>-         ^^zz^^  9  )  ^  Irhrk  rv^- 
dSdi  "you  multiply"^. 

B,  This  combination  first  supercedes  the  inflection,  with  the 
IV  lit.  and  cans.  Ill  lit,*,  later  with  all  verbs  (of.  C§  249). 

The  strange  combination   ^^N.    D  V^  sdm  239*. 


prv  Irnf  ("it  was  hearing  which  he  did"?)  which  is 

used  since  the  m.  e.  especially  with  verbs  of  going. 

as  a  form  of  narrative,  is  much  more  frequent.    E.  g. 

□  vs\  AAAA/v^  prt  pw  irnf  "he  went  out",  because 

pr  is  a  verb  of  going,  while  the  parallel  verbs  are 
expressed  by  means  of  sdminf  or  ChCn  sdmnf. 

7.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  THE  PSEUDOPAETICIPLE 

OR  INFINITIVE. 

a.  WITHOUT  THE  AUXILIARY  VERB  (IMPROPER 

NOMINAL  SENTENCE). 

The  model  of  the  nominal  sentence  (cf.  §  327  sq.)  240*. 
was  early  transferred  to  sentences  with  verbal  predi- 


\ 


1  Sin.  19.    2  Una  30.    3  Math.  Hdb.  41.     *■  According  to  Sethe. 
Erman,  Egypt,  granim.  Gr 


98     7.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  THE  PSEUDOPARTICIPLE  OR  INFINITIVE.  241.  242. 

cate;  the  subject  (a  noun  or  pronoun)  preceding,  the 
verb  following.  In  general,  the  verb  is  in  the  pseudo- 
participle  in  the  case  of  intransitives  and  passives; 

and  in  the  infinitive  with  the  preposition  ^  Jjr,  in 
the  case  of  transitives. 

B.  This  kind  of  sentence  was  the  origin  of  the  late  Egyptian 
forms  twfsdm  (qCOTM)  and  twfhr  sdm  (qCCJOTM).  Cf.  C§253sq. 
241.  More  exactly,  the  following  are  in  the  pseudo- 
participle: 

1.  the  passives  (ph^  "divided",  shr  "overlaid"  etc.). 

3.  the  verbs  of  going  (Ai  "descend",  Iw  "go",  / 
"go",  hr  "fall"), 

3.  the  verbs  of  condition  when  they  denote  the 
continuation  of  the  condition  (mh  "be  full",  mr  "be 
sick",  ftv  "be  broad"  &c.);  but  also  hpr  "to  be"  even 
where  it  means  "become". 


4. 
object. 


rh  "know"  (cf.  §  216),  even  with  following 


f 
242.         The    following,    however,    are    in    the    infinitive 

with  hr: 

1.  the  transitive  verbs  with  or  without  an  object 
following,  {rdl  "give",  ssp  "receive",  hrp  "lead",  m^ 
"see"  &c.), 

2.  verbs  of  condition,  when  they  denote  the 
entrance  upon  the  condition,  {m^rv  "recommence", 
ik  "diminish",  hpr  "happen"). 


7.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  THE  PSEUDOPARTICIPLE  OR  INFINITIVE.  243.  244.  99 

3.  verbs  of  crying  and  weeping  {nml  "roar,  low", 
rmy  "weep"  &c.). 

A.  In  the  oldest  language  the  infinitive  with  lir  does  not  yet 
seem  to  have  been  usage  here,  for  at  that  time  the  pseudoparti- 
ciple  was  still  made  with  all  verbs  (§  213). 

Its  use  corresponds  to  that  of  the  real  nominal  243. 

sentence  (cf.  §  328  sq.).   It  is  used,  therefore  in  asser- 
n  n  I       I       a     <::::>   o 

tn  rl  "No  contradiction  comes  out  of  my  mouth'", 
and  especially  after  mk  "behold"  (§  183)  where  the 
old  absolute  pronouns  (§  80)  are  used: 


S^-nht  iw  m  c^m  "Behold  (thou  woman),  Sinuhe  comes 
as  an  Asiatic"^. 

V   ^ ^  V^tI  a"^^^^^  Y>^^'^^^^^'^^^"B6hold, 

I  "3 

come  "*. 

It  is  further  used  in  descriptions  and  in  the  des-  244. 
criptive  parts  of  a  narrative : 

^\  )   iBw  h^rv  .  .  .  Ihw  hr  m^rv  "Old  age  comes 
on  .  .  .,  weakness(?)  recommences"^ 


G( \i.-\\t^m-^. 


AAAAAA 


1 


iLDII,  136h.     2  Sin.  265.     3  Westc.  8,  12.      «  Prisse  4,  2— 3. 

G* 


100    b.   INTRODUCED    BY    AUXILIARY    VERBS.    «.  WITH  THE  VERB  iw.  246. 

^^  iJl  ^  hdn  t^,  Tnrv  (fern,  according  to 
§  98)  Itl,  hCfi  rib  mBh  nl,  about:  "Day  broke  and  now 
came  the  people  of  Tnrv,  while  every  heart  burned  for 
me'"  (not  narrative  but  description). 

Such    a    description  is  often  introduced  by  the 

conjunction  (1  ls=s  Isf  (§  323). — Here  also,  belongs 


the    use    of    ^^  ^      j\    fn-  M  "after"  in  temporal 


clauses:    V\  A -^^         _23^'v\'Tr^  ^     m  hi 

mlrrv  hpr  "After  it  had  become  evening"^. 

245.  A  sentence  of  this  kind  is  often  also  used  as  a 

relative  clause:  ^'^  ft  fl  .  .  .     J      J    ^Afl'^? 

ijs^x^v  J  ^§««^«  •  •  •  hnbntsn  Sbhw  m  hrt 

"two  obelisks  .  .  .  whose  summits  reach  heavenV 
or  expresses  a  subordinate  circumstance  in  connec- 

tion  with  which  an  action  took  place:  >ca&; 

^'^--^^(f^\  ¥^f  M^  Wfrv  "He  sailed  down 
upon  it,  his  heart  being  glad"*. 

h.  INTRODUCED  BY  AUXILIARY  VERBS, 
o.  WITH  THE  AUXILIARY  VERB  iw. 

246.  Just  as  the  forms  sdmf  and  sdmnf  are  introduc  i 
ed  by  the  auxiliary  verb  fi^   Iw  (cf.  §§  220—222) 

1  Sin.  129—131.  2  Westc.  3,  10.  3  LD  IH,  24 « 

^  Inscription  of  Sehel. 


fe.  INTRODUCED  BY  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  a.WITHTHE  VEBB  (w.  247.248.       101 

SO  the  nominal  sentence  with  verbal  predicate  just 
treated,  is  also  often  introduced  by  irv.  The  modifi- 
cation introduced  by  this  Iw^  is  in  both  cases  the 
same. — If  the  subject  is  a  pronoun,  it  is  expressed  by 

a  suffix:  (1^^^ ,^y\   V     therefore     corresponds 

to  ^^^^,  but  (j^^^^^  to  ^^-A^- 
E.  In  the  popular  language  of  the  m.  e.  the  forms  twf  sdm 
and  twfhr  sdm,  in  the  case  of  a  pronominal  subject,  are  already 
supplanting  the  nominal  sentences  of  §§  240  sq. ;  the  use  of  twf 
sdm  especially,  later  becomes  still  more  extended.  They  are 
preserved  in  Copt,  as  FqCOTM  (cwf  sdm)  and  PqCCDTM  {iwf 
hr  sdm).    Cf.  C§  251,  262 sq. 

It  is  used  where  a  fact  is  expressed  in  a  single  247. 
independent  remark  (cf.  §  221): 

"Say  concerning  it,  (j  ^  i-=c  ^  '^'^-^  °  J  "^      ^ 

1(1  Irv  mrstfi?)  ph^tl  his  liver  (?)  is  divided"  ^ 

It   is    further   employed   at   the   beginning  of  a  248. 
narrative  or  of  one  of  its  paragraphs  (cf.  §  222): 

^\     o     Iw  twtl  shr  m  nb,  Indwtf  m  rv^sm  "My  statue 

was  overlaid  with  gold  and  its  apron  with  silver- 
gold."^ 

Even  when  the  sentence  in  question,    expresses 

«  Eb.  36    17.  2  Sin.  307. 


102  p.   WITH   THE    AUXU.IARY   VERB   WH.    250. 

only  an  accompanying  subordinate  circumstance,  this 
form  is  used  like  that  without  Irv  (cf.  §  245) : 

"^  .^===^  N^  \\    ms^  pw  Irns  hrf^  Irv  msC pn  n  stn  hr  mii 

"she  bore  upon  it,  while  this  army  of  the  king 
looked  on"^ 

249.  When  a  number  of  relative  nominal  sentences 
are  joined  to  one  noun  (cf.  §  245),  all  but  the  first 
are  introduced  by  Irv  (cf.  §  227): 

1  .<2>-  J^   .^-         <CZr>  l)       OaaaaaaIII  v,.:^^^ 

Ir  mBBk  hri-stt .  .  .  nht  hif  hrs,  Irvf  hr  mn  r-lbf  "If  you 
see  any  one  with  a  swelling  ....  whose  body  is  there- 
fore stiff  and  who  is  diseased  in  his  stomach (?)"^. 

p.  WITH  THE  AUXILIAEY  VEEB  wn. 

250.  Here  belong  the  forms,  distinguished  according 
to  §  241—242,  -^^=^1.^^  ^  mnf  sdm  (the  verb  is 

pseudoparticiple)  and  -^"^^.c^^  ^  ^  ^\     rvnf  hr  sdm: 


AA/\AAA 


'^^ '-==^-'"  l-jic^^  nn   l^vz^  rvnfhrdrvBntrw 


nb  "He  worshipped  all  gods 


"3 


1  LD  II,  149  c.         2  Eb.  26,  4.         3  Hr-hwf  II  a,  14. 


p.    WITH    THE    AUXILIARY   VERB   Wn.    251.    252.  103 

-^         ^  wnn/'  Cnh  '-He  will  live"^  (§  184, 

AAAAAA  *^^=a —       1  ® 

187). 

A  remarkable  formation,  in  which  the  auxiliary  251. 
verb  is  also  in  the  pseudoparticiple,  is  found  in  -^^ 

AAAAAA 

I  -^^  J\  '^^zi^^  VQi  jvnkl  drvnkrvl  "I  threw 


myself  down(?)"^. 

The  forms  distinguished  according  to  §  241  —  242  252* 

^^^        A   AAAAAA  ra  ^^7        A  AAAAAA   /^N,  CT 

■^^y         ^  ¥^  w«fw/  sdm  and  -^^^(1  ^^ 

roninf  hr  sdm,  which  represent  an  action  or  a  condi- 
tion as  the  result  or  conclusion  of  that  previously 
narrated,  are  more  frequent.  They  are  therefore 
employed  for  the  most  part,  at  the  close  of  a  para- 
graph: "This  or  that  was  done  to   cheer   the   king 

^^  j]  AAAAAA  O  AAAAAA  U  |  f\  ^^^^^  '^  \\v)  "^''^^  WTlln  It  tl  llUf  Jib 
AAAAAA      1  I  A       \-J.  -£^    I  A   hJ\/\f^f\/\ 

and  the  heart  of  his  majesty  was  (on  that  account) 
cheered  (lit.  cool)"^.    But  they  are  further  employed        ^ 
at  the  beginning  of  a  paragraph  also,  where  they 
then  connect  the  latter  with  that  which  precedes : 

"The  wise  man  had  the  children  called,  gave  them 
the   book  and  said  to   them  &c.".     New  paragraph: 

I   AAAAAA   I         i    n  M  _^  i:  I  |  AAAAAA   \^?s^^  M  AAAAAA   | 

S  I        I       1       1         I  O        I  I        ^     ml  AWWVI  I 


1  LD  II,  149  c.  2  Sin.  252.  3  Westc.  6,  1. 


t 


104         8.    COMPOUNDS   WITH   V   AND   THE    INFINITIVE.    253.    254. 


,  I  o  rvninsn  hr  rdlt  st  Jir  htvtsn,  wninsn 


I  I   I    I  c::^ 

hr  sdt  St  "And   they   threw   themselves   upon   their 

bellies  and  they  read  it  &c."^ 

B.  Toward  the  end  of  the  n.  e.  this  becomes  so  frequent, 
that  it  is  temporarily  the  most  common  form  of  narrative. 


8.  COMPOUNDS  WITH  r  AND  THE  INFINITIVE. 
253.  On  the  basis  of  the  construction  Itv/"  r  .  .  .  "he 
will  be  something"  (e.  g- fl%^Pf  ^^|^^  «V 
r  smr  "he  is  for  a  friend",  i.  e.  "he  will  be  a  friend"^), 
there  developed  a  kind  of  nominal  sentence,  in  which 
(cf.  §  240)  the  preposition  <^:^  r,  "to",  with  following  1 
infinitive,  indicates  the  future : 


-,  ^,,  , -  ,,^        -^,„  mk 

Tvi  r  nhm  c^k  "Behold,  I  will  take  thy  ass"^. 
#254.  The  auxiliary  verb  (1^  Irv  was  early  prefixed 
to  this  kind  of  sentence  also  (as  in  §  246  sq.)  and  the 
form  thus  originating,  (1^  ^^k.  ''^f  ^  ^^^  "^i® 
will  hear",  has  already  nearly  superceded  the  simple 
form  in  the  popular  language  of  the  m.  e. 

B.  In  Copt,  it  is  preserved  as  EqBCCDTM  (cf.  C§  269). 


1  Prisse  2,  5.         2  sin.  280.         3  Bauer  11. 


9.  IMPERATIVE.   255.   256.  105 

9.  IMPERATIVE. 
The  imperative  had  no  ending  in   the  singular:  255*. 
°^  mh  "fill"  (something  like  'mho)',  in  the  plural  it 

ended  in  ^  or  w  {'mhorv).  In  classic  orthography, 
however,  these  endings  are  almost  never  written,  and 
the  plural  of  the  imperative  is  indicated  only  by  the 

determinative  i;  ni^\  QA  i  shBw  "remember"  or  left 

entirely  unindicated. 

A.  In  the  pyr.  the  II  lit.  indicate  the  prosthetic  vowel,  in  the 
sing,  according  to  §  170 A:  ihr  "fall"  (something  like  %ro;  the 
Ilae  gem.  are  doubled,  pM.     The  plural  of  the  Illae  inf.  in   the 

pyramids  ends  in  [J(J,  i.  e.  the  third  radical  t  and  the  ending  l. 


B.  Since  the  n.  e.  the  infinitive  is  also  used  instead  of  the 
imperative;  the  Copt,  still  possesses  but  few  imperatives  of  the 
old  formation,  cf.  C§  305. 

In  detail  note  further:  256. 


impv.  of  "make,  do", 

imi  incorrectly  in  the  n.  e.   (1 


,    (J  ^\    ^^      ,  older    ^^\        ,    and   the  like, 


is  used  as  imperative  of  rrf^"give,  cause".  (Copt. 

Ma,  cf.  C§  305;  the  signs n  and  h     n  are  the  deter- 
minatives of  giving). 

^v     ml^  more  rarely  \J\i  later  .i^^  (1^    and 

•  Mar.  Ab   II,  3i; 


106  9.    IMPERATIVE.    257. 

the  like,  as  imperative  of  the  verbs  of  coming,  (Copt, 
m.  AMOy,  f.  AMH,  cf.  C§  305). 

The  distinction  in  gender  observable  in  the  two 
Copt,  forms  just  cited,  was  probably  existent  in  the 
old  language  also,  but  is  not  indicated  in  the  ortho- 
graphy. 

A.  The  pyr.  -write  mi  "give"  for  the  most  part   (J  .a -0    inu 

(with  the  sign  ^ d);  they  have  further  a  real  imperative  of  rdi, 

which  is  written  A  dt. 

B.  On  the  employment  of  (I  V\      w\  "give"  in  clauses 

expressing  a  wish,  cf.  §  182  B.      From  frequent  usage  since  the 
m.  e.,  imt  loses  its  original  meaning  "give";  imt  ditw  "cause  that 

there   be  given"  (in  the   LE.    contracted    to    (J  ^S\    ^-^^^r^       ), 
replaces  it. 
257.         The  imperative  is  often  followed  by  the  old  ab- 
solute pronoun  (cf.  §  80): 

..^Q-J\c^^s  trv  "hasten  (thou)", 

f[  \\   -'■^  /wvwv  rud^rv  tn  "go  (ye)''^ 

The  words  r-  and  Ir-^  employed  with  suffixes  for 
emphasis  (cf.  348),  often  follow  it  also : 

^^^^'^r^"gehe", 

-^^^^sij         n<zi>^/vwsA  ji;ri  i^rtn  "open  ye", 

^^v    (I         '^'^'^•^  sdmw  Irf  in  "hear  ye"^. 

1  Sin.  282.         2  Totb.  ed.  Nav.  I,  27.         3  LD  HI,  24  d. 


10a.  PARTICIPLES.  258.  259. 


107 


10.  THE  NOMINAL  FORMS  OF  THE  VERB. 
a.  PARTICIPLES. 
The  participles,  which  as  a  rule  are  written  as  258* 
follows : 

Sg.  m.    ^%\    sdm 


Pl.m.  ^^[j[j^l    and 

I.     ^^v    ^^^^  f-    ^^v  '     sdmywt(l) 

may  have,  for  the  most  part,  had  a  vocalic  ending  ^, 
as  may  be  conjectured  from  the  pi.  m.  The  sing.  m. 
furthermore,    often    has    the   masculine   substantive 

ending 

alone  as  a  substantive,  e.  g. 

:getter"\  j> — ^  V'    ^^/'^  "chosen  one" ^ 

The  participles  occur  in  active  and  passive  forms,  259. 
of  which,  those  of  the  present  and  future,  and  those 
of  the  past  seem  to  have  been  distinguished.^ 

Note  in  detail: 

1.  The    II ae    gem.    have    sometimes    separated, 

•sometimes  contracted  consonants:  -^^  wnn  "being" 

AAAAAA  *^ 

AAAAA^ 

or  -^^  rvn. 


TV  (cf.  §  96),  especially  where  it  stands 


Tvttw  "be- 


»  Mar.  Ab.  II,  25. 


2  LD  11,  122  a. 


^  fiethe. 


3  According  to 


108  lOa.    PARTICIPLES.    260. 

2.  The  Illae  inf.  in  the  active,   sometimes  double 
the  second  radical   (present),  and  sometimes  do  not 

(past):  <cz>^    mrrw  "loving",  p.      prr 


A 

"going  out",  but  (T|  1      "having  born"  (fern.),  J\ 

pr  "having  gone  out. — Beside  the  forms  with  doubling 
(present)  there  occur  in  the  passive,  others  in  which 

the  third  radical  i  (cf.  §  151)  is  visible  (past):    f^^nK 

%J\\^  ^^y^  "found"  (fern.)  but  A§^^ 
gmmt  "being  found"  (fern.) — In  the  case  of  •<2>-  "make, 
do",  is  written  for  irr^  and   ■<2>-(](|      for    try, 

according  to  §  151. 

3.  The  irregular  verb  rdi  "give"  has  the  active 
lorm  M^,  aiat,  "giving". 


260.         The  participle  is  either  used  attributively  like  an 
adjective: 

£v^t^^^.^g>-(j(]^^^^  liwwt{l)  iryrvt  rf  "the 
wrong  done  against  him"'. 

hr  liQl  "the  kings  who  were  before  me"^, 
or  like  a  substantive: 

»  Eb.  1,  13.  2  RiH  19  sq. 


10a.    PARTICIPLES.    261.  109 

ftiP'^^'^^^'W^  ^^^  -^^  "^^^  (fern.),  who 
has  born  a  boy"^ 

^^v  (l(]'v\  if   sdmytv  "the  listeners"^. 

T  ^^  ^^fc-^  ^^''^^  "^^^^  S  s  '^  mr  n  iryt  rf  "pain 

about  that  done  to  him."^ 

A  remedy   v\  '^^'ww  »j   irrwt  n  ht  oi 

•^   .Ms^<z:>  III  o    I 

that  which  is  made  for  the  body"*. 

A  substantive  or  a  suffix  is   often   added  to   a  261. 
passive    participle,    to    indicate    its   logical   subject 
(i.  e.   the   one,   from   whom  the   action  in  question 
proceeds): 

(1  (1  mry  iBrvi  "beloved  by  the  two  lands". 

^^  K^.^  [1  ]\  K.-^  sSf  mryf  "his  son  beloved 
by  him". 

The  grammatical  subject  of  a  verb  may  also  be 
retained,  when  it  is  put  in  the  passive  participle,  cf. 

especially  §400   and   examples   like :  (1  .<2>- (J  (]  T  ^^^ 

\\  AAAAAA  y  ifii  ffij-f  rf  ifi  gjif  "He   to  whom 

injury   is    done    by  his  brother"   (lit.  f actus  malum 
contra  eum  a  fratre)^. 


I  Eb.  26,  16.      2  Prisse  5,  14.       '  Bauer  25.      ■«  Eb.  19,  11. 
6  Merenre'  465;  the  whole  according  to  Sethe. 


110  b.    THE    INFINITIVE.    «.    ITS    FOKMATION.    262.    263. 


A.  The  old    expressions  /www     ^yiy   jj    "beloved    of", 


I 


f'^^''^^^   ms  n    "born  of",  tr  n   "begotten   of"  are    pro- 

AAAAAA 

bably  passive  participles  also. 


b.  THE    INFINITIVE, 
a.  ITS  FORMATION. 

*262.  The  infinitive  has  different  forms  in  the  different 

verbal  classes.  With  the  following  classes  it  has  the 
vowel  0  after  the  first  consonant,  and  no  special 
ending : 

II  lit.,  ^^.        wn  "open"  OYODN  (with  suffixes 
OYON=) ; 

III  lit.,  ^^.     sdm  "hear"   CCOTM  (with  suffixes 

COTM=); 

IV  and  V  lit.,  ^'^^^  "IT^  A   li^^t  (cf.  CoAcA,  with 

suffixes  cAccdA*). 
263.         An  0  is  found  after  the  second  consonant  of  some 
III  lit.  which  denote  a  quality,  like  <z: 


dsr  TOGO)  (for  *isor)  "become  red"  and  also  of  the 
II  ae  gem.  of  like  meaning,  like  .>>^  i^^\  ^.^  kmom 
"become  black".  Whether  the  infinitives  of  the  other 
II ae  gem.  like  ^  f'^O)  wH  "urinate",  are  also 
to  be  vocalised  thus,  is  uncertain. 


h.    THE    INFINITIVE,    a.    ITS   FORMATION.   264 — 268. 


Ill 


The  Illae  i>,  according  to  the  Copt,  have  for  the  264. 
most  part  an  a  after  the  second   consonant  in  the 

infinitive:  ^  I  "^^  i  wdB  "be  healthy"  oyxAl,  ['  U 

%^  sk5  "plow"  CKAl. 

Certain  infinitives,  like  ?  ?    a    hM  "seek",  \\  265. 

^  I  '^    "^''^^  "land"   (i.  e.    die,   MOONE),  in  careful 
orthography,  end  in  i. 

The   III  ae    inf.   have    infinitives    with   feminine  266*. 
ending  and  the  vowel  i  or  ^:  H  1^   mst  "bear"  MICF 
n.     prt  "go  out"  TTipe,  nppF,  trt  "make, 

do",  FlpF,  rn  V\  A  h^t  '-descend"  gF  &c. 

A  few  III  lit.  have  likewise  feminine  infinitives,  267. 
like  ^dh  ^^^^  "^^^''  ^-   C^HCl,   as  well  as  the 

irregular  verbs    Q  fl    /\    iit{^)  "come"  und o    rdit 

"give". 

The  causatives  of  the  II  lit.  have  likewise  femi-  268. 
nine  infinitives  (according  to  §  161):   1 j^  ^^  shrt 

"overthrow"     (from     hr     "fall"). 


e^ 


AAAAAA  ■Hi 


smnt 


"establish"  from  mn  MOyN  "remain")  CMINF.-— Among 


W 


smsi 


the  causatives  of  the  Illae  inf.  are  found 

"unbind",  but  also   ^^'^(1(1^     sh^yt    "cause    to 


112  p.   ITS    SUBSTANTIVE    NATURE.    269 — 271. 

descend", — The  causatives  of  the  III  lit,  are  classified 
with  the  IV  lit.  in  the  infinitive,  1  ^  /\  sCJiC  "get 
up",  Copt.  COOgF  (from  *soC}i'C). 

p.  ITS  SUBSTANTIVE  NATURE. 

♦269.  The  infinitive  was  originally  a  substantive  with 
the  general  meaning  of  the  verb.  It  therefore  belongs 
to  no  definite  voice  of  the  verb  and  governs  no  ob- 
ject; "to  kill  him"  is  rendered  in  possessive  form  by 
hdbf  "his  killing"  (cf.  §  79),  and  Mh  hffi  "to  kill  the 
enemy"  was  originally  undoubtedly  a  genetive,  "the 
killing  of  the  enemy",    (cf.  C§  173.) 

270.  Of  itself,  hdbf  "his  killing"    may   also   have   the 

meaning  "the  killing,  which  he  does",  as  in  fnl  ^ 
^"^  r^^^^^  wsrfr  nds  sdmf  "an  ear  whose 
hearing  is  small"  ^  (i.  e.  a  deaf  ear),  but  such  usage 
is  practically  rare  (the  substantivised  form  of  §  283 
is  preferred  in  this  case)  and  a  possessive  suffix  on 
the  infinitive  is  always  first  to  be  translated  as  the 
object  of  the  latter. 

271.  The  substantive  character  of  the  infinitive  is 
evidenced  also  by  the  fact  that  a  plural  is  made  from 
it.  In  contrast  with  the  singular  it  is  best  rendered 
by  a  substantive: 

1  Eb.  91,  2. 


■/.  ITS   USE.    272.  113 

Singular  Plural 

msrvt  "birth"'/ 
""^^o  wr^  "to  love"  "^^^"^mrw^  "love";^ 

|-^  ChC  "to  stand"  I  ^  -^    QiCrv    "standing 

place"  ;^ 
\  ^^^  Mr  "to  hunger"  Q  V^^  likrrv   "hun- 

"  4 

ger  ^ 
With  many  verbs  however,  (e.  g.  those  of  going 
and  of  rejoicing)  the  plural  infinitive  is  also  used  like 
the  singular. 

Y-  ITS  USE. 
It  stands,  precisely  like  a  substantive,  as  the  sub-  272, 
ject  of  a  sentence: 

Irt  nf  St  "My  wish  was  to  make  it  for  him"^  (Irt  is 
subject,  cf.  §  335), 

or  as  part  of  the  genetive  relation : 

Intr^  "The  day  of  the  lamp-lighting  in  the  temple",*^ 
L      fj   ^      ^    n  i  U=/]  St  krs  "place  of  burying",' 


1  Westc,  10,  8.  2  LD  H,  122  a.  3  Westc.  6,  13, 

«  LD  II,  122  b.      5  LD  IH,  24  d.      «  Siut  I,  291.      "  Westc.  7,  8. 
Erman,  Egpypt  gramm.  j[ 


114 


Y.  ITS  USE.  273—275. 


or  for  the  qualification  of  an  adjective  (cf.  §  118): 
T  I  <:=^:3  ^  Wj  w/r  mdw   "excellent  in  speak- 


"  1 


mg 
273.         Further,   as  object  after  verbs  of   willing,   like 


rvd  "command",  mr  "desire",  ^i^  q7\  snd 

"fear",  as  well  as  ^^^^=^^^8A  ^-^  "think"  and 
rh  "know,  be  able"  (cf.  C§  314): 


rf&i  St  "It  was  commanded  him  to  pay  it".^  Beside 
the  above,  the  construction  in  §  189  is  also  in  use 
with  these  verbs. 

274.  The  infinitive  may  be  dependent  upon  any  pre- 
position;  with  the  more  common  prepositions  these 
combinations  have  in  part  taken  on  special  meanings, 
which  are  noted  below: 

275.  The  infinitive  with  ^^^  m  "in",  denotes  for  the 
most  part  time, 

"They  were  astonished 


came",^ 


p^mUt  when  theyj 


but  nevertheless  occurs   with  other  meanings,  e.  g.l 

V  V  ^v         ^1  ^^  ^^  ^  ^^^  ^^^"^  "free  from  do- 

mg  sin  . 


1  Peasant  75.     2  Peasant  48.     3  Prisse  2,  4.     *  Mar.  Ab.  11,  24^ 


Y-  ITS  USE.  276.  277.  115 

With  <;:::>  r  "to",  it  almost  always  indicates  pur-  276* 
pose  (as  still  in  Copt,  with  e  cf.  C§  315): 

hntf  r  shrt  'hfUrvf  (cf.  §  7)  "He  sailed  up  to  overthrow 
his  enemies'V 

"He  went  <=:>  ^  /wwv.  ^^^ ra  r  spr  n  mr- 

pr-wr  to  beseech  the  chief  house-overseer".^ 

In  the  common  expression  <=i>  ^)  r  ^<? ''in  order 

to  say"  the  idea  of  purpose  had  already  disappeared 
in  the  m.  e.,  so  that  it,  (like  its  derivative  2£P,  C§ 
370),  only  indicates  the  beginning  of  direct  discourse, 

"I  wandered  through  the  camp 


AAAAAA      a  n^ 

^=^   1      1      0    A   ^ Q 

„      TV.  X  J^  y  U  ^         J^f'  nhm  r  dd:  irtrv  nn  mi 

m.^,  while  I  cried,  'How  is  this  done?'".^ 

With   ^  hr  it  denotes  simultaneousness  ("while ')*,  277*. 

•JUjOiv^in     ^-'^    hu  hr  smsf^'I  went,  follow- 
ing him",^ 

^'^^^l^tS^^'^^'^^^  ^ri?r^"He 
found  him  going  out"  (''as  he  was  going  out").^ 

On  the  use  of  this  combination  as  a  substitute 


*  Best  rendered  in  English  by  the  present  participle,  teansl. 
1  LD  II,  122a,      2  Bauer  33.      3  sin.  202.       *  LD  II,  122a. 
Bauer  34. 

H* 


116  Y-  ITS  USE.  '278—280. 

for  the  pseudoparticiple   with  transitive   verbs,    of. 
§  240.  242. 
278.         The  prepositions  /wvwv  n  (the  — •—  of  good  manu- 
scripts) and  ^v  mP,  with    the   infinitive,    denote 
cause: 

"I  lived,  honored  by  the  king    .=^Vi  ^^^ 

\  /wwvA  I  j\  mC  irt  mSCt  n  stn  because  I  wrought 

truth  for  the  king".* 
2 '9-         0  TinC  "with"  connects  the  infinitive  with  a 

preceding  verb  whose  meaning  it  now  adopts: 

(I  /wvAAA  Q7\  0      ^  g  (g    iwf  hr  mm  tS  500  ....   /m^ 

sTvrl  hkt  ds  100  "He  eats  500  loaves  ....  and  drinks 
100  jars  of  beer".^ 

This  method  of  continuation  is  especially  prefer- 
red with  imperative  and  optative  expressions: 

^  "CH^  O    "^^''^^^^  «dl>  AftAAAA  -y  /"S 

-<2>-         ^d^^         •  •  •  X  ' 0  °  Irhrk 

rf . . .  TinC  rdlt  nf  phrt  "Make  for  it  .  .  .  and  give  him 
the  remedy".^ 
280.         An  absolute  infinitive  is  subjoined  to  a  sentence 
for  the  addition  of  an  explanation: 


1  Prisse  19,  8.  2  Westc.  7,  3.  3  Eb.  40,  8. 


I 


C.    SUBSTANTIVIZED   FORMS,     a.    IN   GENERAL.    281.    282.  117 

•ODD 


^^^       I  AAAAAA  Vj.       O       *^^=i^  (Li    dJl 

^^^  ^rws  m  mnrvs  n  itfs  '  Imn^  Irt  nf  thnrvi  wrwi  "She 
made  (it)  as  her  monument  for  her  father  Amon, 
having  made  two  great  obelisks  for  him"^  (var.  'y 
sQ}C  "having  set  up"). 


(| 


AAAAAA  ,^,_n_^  <:  ,. 

AAAAAA    0  ^C^  \\\\\^''^^=^pshrmTV^ 

AAAAAA  AAAAAA        d 


nn  rdit  Sfryf  "Cook  (it)  in  water,  without  letting  ijb 
seethe  (?)".2 

The  logical  subject  may  be  added  to  an  infinitive  281. 
(especially  for  the  sake  of  intelligibility) ;  in  this  case 
a  nominal  subject  is  introduced  by  the  prepositin  In^ 
but  a  pronominal  subject  is  expressed  by  means  of 
the  later  absolute  pronouns  of  §  84: 

ra    <CZI^  A  AAAA/\A 

"Agreement  made  with  so  and  so   ^^\       A^ 

n    AAAA^\A  I  I    r~\  h.t\N\/^  r\  Q    AAA/W\  i  IN 

\ ^<=>J\    o.    X i ^"^h^\ 

.  .  m  rdlt  nf .  . .  hnC  prt  ntsn  .  .  .  hnC  rdit  In 

TvCh  "that  (they)  give  him  . . .  and  that  they  go  out .  .  . 
and  that  the  priest  give  .  .  ."."^ 


a 


c.  SUBSTANTIVIZED  POEMS. 
a.  IN  GENERAL. 

The  verbal  forms  of  the  later  formation  (cf.  §  170)  282*. 
s^w/and  sdmnf^  can  be  converted  into  masculine  and 

1  LD  in,  24  d.  2  Eb.  42,  7.  3  glut  I,  307. 


118  |3.    TO    DENOTE   THE    ACTION   ITSELF.    283. 

feminine  substantives  by  adding  the  substantive  end- 
ings m.  w,  f.  t,  to  their  stem.  The  "substantivized" 
forms  thus  made,  denote  in  part  the  action  itself  (the 
fact  that  he  hears),  in  part  a  person  or  an  object,  to 
which  the  action  has  reference  (he  who  hears,  that 
which  he  hears  and  the  like). 

B.  In  the  n.  e.  the  substantivized  forms  have  disappeared. 

p.  TO  DENOTE  THE  ACTION  ITSELF. 

"283.         The  forms  which  denote   the   action   itself,    are 
especially: 

sdmtf  "the  fact  that  he  hears", 

'^'^'^  sdmtnf  "the  fact  that  he  heard"  (with 

the  meaning  of  a  perfect,  cf.  §  197). 

The  formation  sdmf  of  the  first  group  (cf.  §  172) 
is  used  in  this  case  with  the  form  sdmtf  \   with  the 


II  ae  gem.  it  is  therefore  -^^^  mntf^  with  thelllae 

inf.  ,,  Jiv^^=_  prtf,  with  Ir  "make,  do"  ^^-^^ 

Irtf,  with  tdl  "give"  o  ^^i.^^  rdltf.    Only  in  the  case 

of  a  future  meaning  do  forms  of  the  second  group 

seem  to  be  employed  here,  \    ^    -^^  ^^zz:^ 

tr  n  rvnntk  "the  time  when  you  will  be"^  (lit.  "the 
time  of  the  fact  that  you  will  be"). 

»  I'risse  JO,  10. 


p.    TO    DENOTE   THE    ACTION   ITSELF.    284 — 286,  119 

These  substantivized  forms  are  treated  precisely  284. 
like  substantives  and  are  used  with  special  frequency 
after  prepositions,  where  we  would  expect  a  conjunc- 
tion with  a  dependent  clause.    E.  g. 

^v.  mI  P  V'^   ^*  ^^^^   ^^    "when   she   bore 

Sw'} 

"on    New-years-day  <zi>  A  c^  [331  '^'^^^ 

hft  rdlt  p}-  n  nhf  when  the  house  gives  (presents)  to 
its  lord".^ 

They  gave  him  this  piece   rum  <iz>  A  o 

/wsAAA  l/wwvA   hnt  rdltnf  nsn   before   he   had   given   to 
tiiem".^ 

Note,  further,  the  absolute  use  of  this  substan-  285. 
tivized  form.    If  it  follows  a  sentence,  it  adds  to  it 
an  explanatory  limitation: 

"Agreement,  that  they  give  him  a  loaf  <=>  A  o 

AAAAAA  I AAAAAA  I  v dltfif  HSH  Jivs  hc,  havlug  givcu 

i;hem  ...  for  it".^ 

If,  however,  it  precedes  the  sentence,  it  contains  286. 
a  temporal  qualification: 

o    ^  0   I  J^±5^  c:^::^  1  IJJEL  4  1/vwvvA 

^W  I^Jl    ^^^'^  ^^^   ^  rdwil,   dmlnl  inbw  hkB 

'■  Eb.  95,  8.      2  siut  I,  289.       3  Siut  I,  276.       *  Siut  I,  274. 


120  f.   TO    DENOTE    A    PERSON    OK    AN   OBJECT.    287 — 289. 

"When  1  had  given  the  way  to  my  feet,  (i.  e.  fled),  I 
came  to  the  wall  of  the  prince"/ 

287.  It  sometimes  stands  independently  at  the  he- 
ginning  of  a  text  after  a  date,  e.  g.  in  J  ^  n 

n  ^-^     czsiD  lO     MM    o 

I  n  ^^    X    X  rnpt  18  Irt  hnf  tBS  rst^.    This  is 

probably  to  he  understood  as:  "In  the  year  18  (oc- 
curred) the  cirumstance,  that  his  majesty  made  the 
southern  boundary",  i.  e.  "his  maj.  made  the  southern 
boundary." 

288.  As  may  be  seen,  the  use  of  this  form  is  for  the 
most  part,  identical  with  that  of  the  infinitive.  In 
general  they  are  distinguished  as  follows:  the  infini- 
tive is  used  where  its  (logical)  subject  is  identical 
with  the  subject  of  the  preceding  sentence,  whereas 
the  substantivized  form  is  otherwise  chosen.     Thus, 

'■'■They  were  astonished  when  they  came"    ^^^  \\\\    r. 

m  lit,  but  "/  was  astonished  when  they  came" 


A 


m  ItSH. 

I    i    ! 


Y-  TO  DENOTE  A  PEESON  OR  AN  OBJECT. 
♦289.         The  substantivized  forms  which  denote  the  person 
or  thing  to  which  the  action  of  the  verb  has  refer- 
ence (he  who  hears,  that   which  he  hears   etc.)  are 
theoretically  as  follows: 

1  Sin.  15.  2  LD  II,  136h. 


Y-    TO   DENOTE    A   PERSON   OR    AN   OBJECT.    290.    291.  121 

m.  sdmrvf  m.  sdmrvnf 

f.   sdmtf  f.  sdmtnf 

in  which  the  n-form  is  again  used  for  the  past. — The 
formation  of  the  second  group  (§  184)  is  used  for  the 
forms  sdmrvf  and  sdmtf  (in  contrast  with  the  form  of 
§  283);  with  the  Illae  inf.  it  is  therefore 

^^     mtrtf   with  ir  "make,  do"  Irrif  with 

rdi  "give'  dlditf. — In  the  case  of  the  II  lit. 

and  III  lit.  as  well  as  with  all  verbs  in  the  w-form, 
these  substantivized  forms  are  not  to  be  distinguished 
from  those  of  the  first  kind. 

On  the  use  of  these  forms  in  relative  sentences  290. 
cf.  §  394.    Certain  of  them  are  furthermore  employed 
with  definite  meaning,   precisely  after  the  manner  of 
real  substantives  as  subject,  as  object,  in  the  genetive, 
or  after  a  preposition. 

The  forms   ^  ^\  sdmtf  and    ^  ^^^  '^""'^  291*. 

sdmtnf  with  the  meanings  "that  which  he  hears"  and 
"that  which  he  heard"  are  the  most  frequent: 

I  ^  ^  ^/^  ^^^^^  ^^  "That  which  I  do 

thee  is  good".* 

^^^  A  ^ZXZ  H  Q  mr  Innt  hCp '^Oxerseer  oHha,t 
vhich  the  Nile  brings'. - 

•-         »  Sin.  77.  2  LD  II,   149  c. 


122  d.    VERBAL   ADJECTIVE.    292.    293. 

^  ^'^'^'^(j^^    §A  ddtnfim  "according  to  that 

which  he  had  said  about  it"^  (while  he  was  still  liv- 

ing). — The  not  infrequent  masculine  I        dldisn 

fl    I  I  1 

"that  which  they  give"^  is  noteworthy. 
292.  The    form   sdmrvf  denotes  persons  and  is  used 

almost  only  with  nominal  subject: 

hssm  nbf^^he  whom  his  lord  lovesV 


ifr^^ 


"K  ^^5^  Vh^  ^'v^^-  J\  I    tvnnw    sndf  ht 


"  4 


smwt  "he,  whose  fear  comes  after  the  lands 

d.  VERBAL  ADJECTIVE. 

*293.  The  archaic  forms : 

Sg.  m.  sdmtif'i,      f.  sdmt'isi, 

PI.         sdmttsn 
almost  always  mean  "he  (she),  who  will  hear"  and  are 
employed  both  as  adjectives  and  substantives: 

J^       ^    ^  <CZ>  Ul    iCi  "^      W         S    _^^  Xcm  /wwv^ 

s^l  rib  srrvdt'if'i  tSi  pn  "every  son  of  mine   who  shall 
make  this  boundary  increase".^ 

3 


"as  something  brilliant  (i.  e.  useful)  for  him  who  will 
hear  it".« 


1  LD  II,  34 d.         2  gin.  137,         3  lD  n,  113f.         <  Sin.  44 
5  LD  II,  136h.  c  prisse  5,  8. 


11.    APPENDIX    TO   THE    VERB;    THE    OBJECT.    294 — 297.  123 

In  classic  orthography,  the  endings  are  for  the  294. 
most  part  written: 

Sg.  m.  2<..::=_  or  ,     f.  o  l\«v  or  o  1 

PI.      n     or  ^n 

Willi  till 

in  the  singular,  however,  \  f.    ,    K\^  also  occur. 

In  respect  of  the  formation,    it  is   to  be  noted,  295. 
that 

the  II  ae  gem.  always  double  the  second  radical, 

•^^  I W    rvnnt'isi, 

the  Illae  inf.  in  part  take  w  for  the  ending  of  the 

stem,  rn  ^^  ^  p^'i.=:^h^rvt'ift  (ct  §  151  A);  <r  "make, 

do"  has     ^  ; 

rdi  "give"  has    <=>  A  rdldfi. 

11.  APPENDIX  TO  THE  VERB;  THE  OBJECT. 

The  direct  object  (accusative)  is  to  be  recognis-  296. 
ed  only  by  the  order  of  words,  cf.  §  337  sq.     If  it  is 
a  pronoun  it  is  always  expressed  by  the  old  prono- 
mina  absoluia,  cf.  §  30. 

On  account  of  its  substantive  character,  the  in-  297. 
finitive  could  not  originally  govern  an  object;  it  is 


»  Mar.  Cat.  d'Aby.  807.  2  sin.  75. 


124  PARTICLES.       1.    ADVERBS.    298 300. 

therefore,    according  to   §   269,    combined   with   the 
possessive  suffixes,  r  mrtf  "for  his  loving",  i,  e.  "in 

order  to  love  him".      Only  the  neuter  pronoun    l'^ 

St  "it"  (cf.  §  82)  can  also  follow  the  infinitive,  r  mrt 
St  "in  order  to  love  it"  ("them). 

298.  Transitive    verbs   which  have  no   special  object, 

are  often  followed  by  the  word  iht  "thing"  as  a 

general   object,    not  to  be   translated  by  us.     Note 
especially : 

^  r^  iht  ''the  one  knowing  (something)",^ 

i.  e.  the  wise  man, 

Irt  iht  "to  do  (something")'-  for  the  god, 

i.  e.  to  make  offering. 

299.  The  indirect  object  (dative)  is  expressed  by  means 
of  the  preposition  ^^aaaa  n  (cf.  §  306),  which  by  good 
manuscripts,  is  written  — :_,  before  substantives. 

PAETICLES. 
1.  ADVERBS. 

300.  A   special    adverbial  formation    does   not    exist.; 
Beside  the  prepositions  (cf.  §  303)  and  absolute  sub- 
stantives (cf.  §  117),  the  adjectives  are  used  as  ad- 
verbs, thus: 

1  Siut  I,  223.  2  glut  I,  271. 


2.   PREPOSITIONS,     a.  IN    GENERAL.    301.    302.  125 

1.  With  the  preposition  r,  in   the  masculine  or 
feminine : 


^  ;   r  mnh  "excellently",' 
^    r  CBt  "very".^ 


AAAAAA 


2.  Alone,  in  the  masculine;  or  more  rarely,  in 
the  feminine  (especially  with  the  intensifying  wrt 
"very") : 

vomits  often".^ 

"He  wept  ^"^'^'^•[1^^^  <;i'wwr^  very  sorely".^ 

2.  PREPOSITIONS. 
a.  m  GENERAL. 

The  prepositions  are  in  part  simple  {m  "in",  hnC  301. 
"with"),  in  part  compound  {m  sB  "in  the  hack",  i.  e. 
"hehind").  Since  they  were  originally  suhstantives, 
as  is  still  clear  in  the  case  of  many,  they  are  com- 
bined with  the  possessive  suffixes  {lirf  "upon  him" 
lit.  "his  face"). 

They  are  in  part  employed  like  conjunctions  also,  302. 
that  is  to  say,  verbs  may  be  dependent  upon  them. 
Cf.  §  190  and  for  details  §  306 sq. 


1  Eb.  66,  18.    '2  Eb.  37,  20.       3  Eb.  37,  17.       <  Peasant  25. 


126  b.    SIMPLE    PREPOSITIONS.    303 — 306. 

303.  They  are  very  often   used   as  adverbs  also,  i.  e. 
with  the  suppression  of  the  suffix,  which,  according 
to  the  connection,  they  should  properly  have,  e.  g. 
referring  to  brv  "place" :  smnf  im  "he  had  gone  into"    ll 
("into"  for  imf  "into  it"). 

304.  The  prepositional  phrase  (i.  e.  the  preposition  and 
the  word  dependent  it)  is  frequently  subjoined  to  a 
substantive,  where  we  would  employ  a  relative  clause 
or  an  adjective.  Note  especially  the  expressions  for 
"entire"  (cf.  C§  152): 

<z:>  ^  a;^^_  t^  pn  r  drf  "this  land  up 
to  its  boundary"/  i.  e.  "this  entire  land". 


y  V  1/vwvAA  gsw'i  ml  kdsn  "the  two  sides 

according  to  their  extent",^  i.  e.  "the  entire  sides". 
305.         The   prepositional  phrase   is   sometimes   treated 

like  a  substantive  also,  6.  g.   0  I  ^  QA  i         1 

hswt  nf  hr  stn  "the  rewards  of  the   with-the-king",^ 

i.  e.  the  rewards  on  the  part  of  the  king. 

b.  SIMPLE  PREPOSITIONS, 

♦306.  AAAAAA  n  is  pronounced  before  nouns,    something 

like  *'^n,  with  suffixes  *na-  (cf.  C§  349);  manuscripts 

dating  from  the  end  of  the  m.  e.  and  the  beginning 

of  the  n.  e.  distinguish  each  as  — :—  ('^n)  and  

1  Priase  2,  7.  2  Una  U.  3  gin.  310. 


b.    SIMPLE   PREPOSITIONS.    307.  127 

(na-). — The  original  meaning  is  "for  the  advantage 
of  any  one";  in  particular  it  then  means: 

1.  to  do  something  for  some  one,  to  bring  or  give 
something  to  some  one,  to  say  something  to  some  one 
(dative), 

2.  to  come  to  some  one  (only  with  persons), 

3.  because  of  a  thing, 

4.  in  a  period  of  time. 

As  a  conjunction  and  before  the  infinitive  (cf.  §  278) 
it  means  "because",  "because  of". 

^^^  m  is  pronounced  before  nouns  something  like  307*. 

**»?,  before  suffixes  ^emo-,  written    (1  ^^  Im-  (cf.  C§ 

350). — The  original  meaning  is  "within",  without  any 
accompanying  idea  of  direction;  itisused  in  particular: 

1.  of  place;  existent  m,  into  something,  out  of 
something  (inexact  for  "«r) ; 

2.  of  time,  in  the  year,  on  the  day  and  the  like; 

3.  among  a  number,  belonging  to  something,  con- 
sisting o/ something,  made  out  o/ something;  provid- 
ed with  something,  empty  of  something ; 

4.  in  the  capacity  of,  «s;  in  the  manner  of,  like\ 
according  to  a  command; 

5.  in  a  condition; 

6.  after  the  verbs  "to  be"  or  "to  make  (into)  some- 


128  b.    SIMPLE    PREPOSITIONS.    308. 

things",  (j^^^.^^^'^n^^^  iw/'m  nds  "He  is 

a  citizen"  ^  (cf.  C§  350,  4) ; 

7.  occasionally  for  the  introduction  of  direct  dis- 
course, where  it  remains  untranslated; 

8.  by  means  of  a  tool. 

On  m  before  the  infinitive  cf.  §  275.      As  a  con- 
junction it  means   "when"  and  "if  (§  391).     As  an 

adverb  it  has  the  form    (1  ^v     and    means    "therein 

(there),  thereinto,  thereout,  therefrom,  therewith  (by 
means  of)" ;  it  is  also  joined  to  a  substantive,  e.  g. 

«^     ^s^s.    ^^  ^'^  "*^^  servant  there"  ^  (humbly 
for  "I"). 
*308  <=>  (*<^r,  with  suff.  ^^  *erof,  cf.  C§  348)  origin- 

ally meant  "at"  or  "by"  something,  without  any  accom- 
panying idea  of  direction.    Its  usual  meanings  are: 

1.  existent  at  or  by  something; 

2.  thither  to  something  (the  most  frequent  mean- 
ing) ;  into  something  (inexact  for  m) ;  as  far  as ; 

3.  to  speak  to  some  one ; 

4.  hostile  toward  some  one  (in  contrast  with  «); 

5.  distributively  of  time,  '■'per  day",  '•''every  four 
days"  and  the  like ; 

6.  especially  after  adjectives  '■'■more  than\  where  we  | 

»  Westc.  7,  1.  2  gin.  175. 


6.    SIMPLE   PREPOSITIONS.     309.  129 

would  employ  our  comparative,    T  <=:>  .-^-^ 

nfr  r  tht  nbt  "more  beautiful  than  everything".^ 

As  a  conjunction  it  means  "until"  and  "so  that"; 
on  its  use  before  the  infinitive  cf.  §  276.  Cf.  also 
§  2.53. 

A.  In  the  pyr.  it  is  also  written  (I  <zz> ,  with  or  without 
the  suffix. 

^    hr  (lit.  "face"),  with  suffixes  is  written      ^    309*. 

hr-  in  correct  orthography  (C§  351),  and  means  es- 
pecially: 

1.'  existent  upon  something  (the  most  frequent 
meaning);  also  in  inexact  specifications  of  place  and 
time,  in  the  north  and  the  like,  at  the  time  of  and 
the  like; 

2.  down  upon  something,  in  addition  to  something ; 

3.  to  pass  by  something,  to  deviate  from  some- 
thing, and  the  like; 

4.  distributively,  upon  each  one; 

5.  anoint,  cook  &c.  with  something; 

6.  pleasant  for  the  heart,  and  the  like; 

7.  because  of  something  (frequent). 

On  its  use  in  the  co-ordination  of  substantives  cf. 
§  120;  on  hr  with  the  infinitive  cf.  §  277.  As  a  con- 
junction it  means  "because". 


1  Westc.  12,  8, 
Erman,  Egypt,  gramm. 


130  b.    SIMPLE   PREPOSITIONS.    310 — 313. 

♦310.  ^     hr,  lit.   "under"  (also  of  direction),  is  also 

used  of  being  laden  (because  the  bearer  is  under  the 
burden)  and  therefore  often  means  ^carrying  or  posses- 
sing something".      Cf.  C§  352. 

311.  hr,  originally,  existent  rvith  some  one  and  the 

like;  also,  to  receive  something  /rom  some  one;  it  is 
obsolete  and  still  used  almost  only  in  specifications 
of  reigns  (under  King  X.). — On  its  use  in  the  passive 
cf.  §  169. 

312.  ^^^      mC  (perhaps  arising  from  m  c  «in  the  arm") 
means : 

1.  in  the  possession  of; 

2.  take   something  from  some  one,   receive  from 
some  one,  and  the  like;  rescue  from  some  one; 

3.  something  is  done  by  some  one; 

4.  because  of  a  thing. 

On  mC  with  the  infinitive  cf.  §  278. 

®  o 

313.  hft  (on  orthography  cf.  §  7)  originally  meant 

"m  front  of\  but  is  for  the  most  part  employed  for^ 
according  to,  corresponding  to  and  also  for,  simultam 
ously  with. — As  an  adverb  it  means  "in  front",  as 
conjunction^  "when". 

Note  further  the  simple  prepositions: 


C.    COMPOUND    PREPOSITIONS.    314.    315.  131 

ir  ^v^'^  V  ^^^^^  (^^  *^®  Py^'-  i'^'f^ii)}  "between,  314. 
in  the  midst  of". 

(1 AAAAAA    In  only  for  the  expression  of  the  subject 
with  the  passive  and  the  infinitive.      Cf.  §  169. 

1)  (1  mi  (in  the  pyr.  often  y  <:i=>    mr)  "like".     As 
a  conjunction,  "as,  if"  (cf.  §  391). 

^'^  JiB  (lit.  occiput),  "behind". 

O    AAAAAA 

9  hnC  "together  with".— Cf.  also  §  120;  with 

the  infin.  §  279. 

Cm\  hnt  (lit.  nose)  "before"  (rest  or  motion) ; 

as  an  adverb,  hniw  "before". 


^    dr  "when,  since" 


tp  (lit.  head  or  the  like)  "upon" ;  it  is  obsolete. 


c.  COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS. 

Many  prepositions   are  compounded  with  a  sub-  315. 
stantive  (usually  the  name  of  a  part  of  the  body). 
Note  especially: 

^iv.^  P*^^  VI   ^  ^^^  ^^^  compensation),  "as  re- 
ward for". 

))   rCU  "opposite". 


132 


J 


C.    COMPOUND    PREPOSITIONS.    315 


1= 


m  m. 


m  h^h  („in  the  fore- 
skin", cf.  C§  359),  "before  some  one"  (also  as  an  ad- 
verb).— 

^^(=Qidr  hBh  as  an  adverb,  "formerly". 

m  m  "among  persons". 

-^  n  mrrvt^  in  the  m.  e^  /ww\a         iju^ 
(for  love),  often  as  a  conjunction,  "in  order  that". 

^-^  mhCt  (cf.  C§  356),  ^-^  fir  JiQ,    "at 
the  summit";  hr  hQ^  as  an  adverb,  "formerly". 

^^^  '^  mhr  "in  front  of,  "^  hft  hr  "in  front 

of". 

X  m  hr-lb:  "in  the  midst  of". 

y^  0  V        ^  ^^^   "^^  ^^®  inside  of"  (cf. 

J\  m  ht  "behind,  after";  as  an  adverb, 

"afterward";  as  a  conjunction,  "after"  (cf.  §  244,385). 

^  ^  m  s9  ("in  the  back")  <=>  ^  r  sS,^^  hr 

s9  "behind,  after";  r  si,  is  also  used  as  a  conjunction, 
"after".     As  an  adverb  "afterward",  r  si,  hr  sB  are 

used,  also 


C§  357), 


/wwvA  ^   n  si. 
I 


C.  COMPOUND  PEEPOSmOSS.     316.   317.  133 

^  ^  J^  ^  ^^^  ^"^^  *^®  entrails'y  "in  the 
midst  of". 

<zi>  r  gs  ("at  the  side"),   "^  Jir  gs:  "be- 

side". 

^^^  wrf^'  "together  with";  in  the  m.  e.  very  rare, 
in  the  LE.  frequent  cf.  (C§  359.  338). 

<=>  ^  vK.  r  drw  ("up  to  the  boundary"),  "as 
far  as". 

^^  Tir  dMB  ("upon  the  head"),  "upon"  cf.  C§  361. 

With  others,  there  is  prefixed  to  the  preposition,  316. 
a  word  more  exactly  qualifying  it;  thus  in: 

X  ^  ^  Tvprv   hr  "except"  (also  for  "but"  con- 
junction), and  the  old    ^     wprv  r  "except". 
^   ^^X^<cz>  hrrv  r  "apart  from". 
\\\\\    ^    <^^>  nfryt  r  "as  far  as". 

^^  ^^  ^  "before  some  one,  something";  as  an 
adverb  according  to  §  307  ^  (j  ^  tp  Im  "formerly". 
Finally,  there  are  such  peculiar  formations  as:       317. 
'=^^:;5;  y    A    ^  *'^^  ("i°  order  to  separate"), 
"between"  (cf.  C§  354). 

1  Brugsch,  Wb.  Suppl.  s.  v. 


134     3.  coNjuNCTioxs.  a.  in  gen.  h.  enclitic  conj.  318.  319. 


LM 


s^c  m  ("in  order  to  begin 


with"),  "from"  (cf.  C§  355). 


r  mn  m}  ("in  order  to  remain  with"), 


"as  far  as". 


3.  CONJUNCTIONS. 

a.  IN  GENERAL. 
318.  The  conjunctions  are  in  part  enclitically  joined 

to  the  first  word  of  the  sentence,  in  part  appear  at 
its  beginning  also.  On  those  prepositions  which  are 
used  as  conjunctions,  cf.  §  302.  306  sq. — Apart  from 
the  conjunctions  noted   in   the  following,    there  are 

others  which  are  treated  elsewhere,  thus  and 


§347,      I     D 


^§121, 


319. 


§  257.  348.  349, 
(^  §  363. 

b.  ENCLITIC  CONJUNCTIONS. 

^s  serves  for  the  most  part  (like  our  "namely") 
to  introduce  an  explanatory  addition: 

C/T  •  •  •  4;  M  '  •  •  •  '^^^  nf  .. .  stn  is  . . . 

"I  made  it  for  him  ...  (I)  the  king  .  .  .".^ 


1  LD  II,  124,  35.  2  LD  lU,  24(1. 


h.    ENCLITIC    CONJUNCTIONS.      320.    321.  135 

On  the  other  hand  .:^a_^(1  I  n  is  means  "but  not", 
as  a  restricting  adjunct. 

A.  In  the  pyr.  this  is  is  very  frequent;  on  the  is  of  the 
later  language  cf.  §  323  B. 

1  ^  srvt  and  ^  ^^  1}^  (like  our  "but")  ex-  320. 
press  the  opposite  of  that  which  precedes: 

"All  men  who  injure  the  tomb,  who  &c.  (1  <ci:>  I 
V^   g — >^  Ir  srvt  rmtt  (cf.  §  97)  nht  but  all  men 

Jl         C^     \\\     O:^ 

(who  preserve  it,  who  &c.)".^ 

But  this  contrast  is  sometimes  so  weak  that  these 
conjunctions  really  serve  for  the  attachment  of  the 
clause  only. 

<=:>  grt^  also  properly  means  "but",  e.  g.  "If  the  321. 
eye  bleeds,  then  .  .  .  i)^=>,^^  HJ  "^  ^^^^  (1  ^H 
Ir  grt  hB  mrv  Ims  but  if  water  comes  out  of  it  &c.''^ 

As  a  rule,  however,  it  joins  an  explanation  or 
a  continuation,  like  "further"  or  our  weaker  use 
of  "but": 

"This  plant  is  employed  so  and  so,   (1  Vi.    ^    ^ 

^^   IU%  I     Z\  ifv  grt  prts  ditws  hr  tB  but  its 

fruit  is  laid  upon  bread  &c."^  (or  "Further,  its  f.  is 
laid  upon  b."). 

1  Siut  I,  225.  2  Eb.  66,  8.  3  Eb.  51,  18. 


136  C.   CONJUNCTIONS   NOT  ENCLITIC.   322.    323. 

322.  Rarer  conjunctions  of  this  kind  are : 

1.  The  archaic  ^\  twC^,  which  seems  to  intro- 
duce the  sentence  as  the  result  or  consequence  of 
that  which  has  been  previously  narrated; 

2.  mnQ()  »*s  in  direct  discourse;  designates  that 
which  has  been  stated  as  something  self-evident  or 
well  known. 

c.  CONJUNCTIONS  NOT  ENCLITIC. 

323.  (1P^=  i^h  (IP^  (older  H  s=5  is()   specifies   the 
circumstances  under  which  anything  happens : 

wi  m  si&  .  . .,  rdl  rvi  hnf  m  smr  "I  was  judge  ,  .  .,  then 
his  majesty  made  me  friend"-  (i.  e.  when  I  was  j.,  his 
maj.  made  me  f.). 

ist^  is  especially  used,  where  these  circumstances 
are  to  be  emphasized  as  remarkable. 

Since  the  m.  e.  it  is  employed  for  the  introduc- 
tion of  parenthetical  or  incidental  remarks,  especially 
with  following  r/ (cf.  §  348,  349): 

pn  "this  peasant  said  (this)  however,  at  the  time  of 
king  Nb-kr.^ 

1  Una  5.  45.         2  jb.  8.  3  Bauer  71. 


C.    CONJUNCTIONS    NOT   ENCLITIC    324  —  326.  137 

A.  The  pyr.  use  ist  enclitically  also,  cf.  §  120  A. 

B.  In  LE  it  is  written  tstio\  the  late  Egyptian  Is  also,  Copt. 
ElC->  seems  to  have  arisen  from  Ist. 

n  I  '^^n^  Isk  (older   I  ^=^:=:^    Isk)    mostly    designates  324. 

(like  the  more  frequent  1st)  the  circumstances  under 
which,  or  the  time  at  which  something  occurs: 

"He  erected  this  tomb  for  his  son   l^z::^  1^  ^v 

%  sk  stv  m  hrd  when  he  was  a  child".^ 

®    ^,  older   []^^^   thr  originally  intro-  325. 

duced  a  substantiating  clause  (like  for  or  because). 
Then,  with  much  weakened  significance,  it  also  intro- 
duces new  paragraphs  of  a  narrative  and  precedes 
especially  temporal  clauses: 

hrw  sjv^  hr  nn  ^^No?v,  after  the  days  had  passed  by 
this,  then  &c."2 

B.   In  LA  hr  is  very  frequent,  with  many  varied  meanings. 

7\  ^i  is  used  in  promises,  threats  and  326. 
directions,  in  order  to  strengthen  that  which  is  stated: 

"^""^  ^^  Sh         ^         ^'^''^  k^rduhprmTv"S\LTe- 
ly,  I  will  cause  water  to  be".^ 


1  Mar.  Mast.  200.  2  Westc.  12,  9.  3  ib.  9,  17. 


138  la.   THE    SIMPLE    NOMINAL    SENTENCE.    327.    328. 

Occasionally  it  receives  the  suffix  of  the  2  m. : 

"^^^^ ^  ^^1  ^'v^ "^^^  ^^^  ^^^^  "'^^^^  ^^^^^ 
throw".^ 

A.   In  the  oldest  language  kS  is  also  used  enclitically. 

THE  SENTENCE. 

1.  THE  NOMINAL  SENTENCE. 

a.  THE  SIMPLE  NOMINAL  SENTENCE. 

*327.  By  the  (pure)  nominal  sentence  is  understood  a 
sentence  without  a  verb,  whose  predicate  is  then  a 
substantive,  adjective  or  prepositional  phrase,  while 
its  subject  is  a  noun  or  absolute  pronoun.  The  sub- 
ject precedes  the  predicate. 

328.         It  is  used  in  assertions:  ^^^^^^^  0  inwk  nb 

ImSt  "I  am  the  lord  of  graciousness";^ 

^=^T  rnk  nfr  "Thy  name  is  beautiful";* 

AAAAAA  0  <. '> 

and  is  especially  frequent  after  rnk  "behold"  (§  183), 
where  the  old  pronouns  of  §  80  are  then  employed 
as  subject: 

m  hShk  "Behold  I  (am)  before  thee";^ 


1  Westc.  3.  3.     2  Louvre  C  172.     3  Prisse  5,  14.     *  Sin.  263. 


a.    THE    SIMPLE    NOMINAL    SENTENCE.    329.    330.  139 

n  ihrvt  .  .  .  hr  St  hrk  "Behold  these  things  .  .  .  are 
under  thy  charge"*  (lit.  are  under  the  place  of  thy 
face). 

It  is,  further,  often  used  in  descriptions:  329. 

<:^>    ^    ^  I  ^^^  ^  ""^  '  '  '  </A:r  nb  hr  htwf  «A11 

fruits  are  upon  its  trees'',^ 

and  often  also  as  a  relative  clause  (cf.  §  393): 

man  on  whose  neck  are  swellings".^ 

Occasionally,  in  violation  of  the  rule,  the  predi-  330. 
cate  precedes  the  subject;  the  predicate  is  thereby 
emphasized.     Thus : 

1.  in  expressions  with  rn  "name",  like    1^  ^\ 

1         D  v\     "^         QA  I  sm^  snwtt  rns  "an  herb  whose 

name  is  Snwtf  ^  (for:  rns  S7iwtt); 

2.  when  the  subject  is  a  demonstrative  or  an  ab- 
solute pronoun:  ^  qA  ^^  {^  1  I  dpt  mrvt  nn 
"This  is  the  taste  of  death".^ 

^^■^  MO  I  ^^'^\\o^  n  rmtj  Is  nt  m  St 
"They  are  not  people  of  strength'""  (for :  n  st  rmtt  ni  ift). 


»  Siat  I,  269.  2  Sin.  83.  »  Eb.  51,  19.  *  Eb.  51,  15. 

»     Sin.  23.  6  LD  II,  136  h. 


140      h.    THE  NOMINAL  SENTENCE  INTRODUCED  BY  llV  AND  IVn.  331.  332. 

*331.         This  inverted  order  is  especially  frequent,  where 
the  predicate  is  an  adjective: 

1  ^     c^    I  }^  ^"^  Vwi  nfr  mint  "My  way  is    { 

good".*  j 

In  this  case  the  adjective  often  receives  an  ending 
^  rv'i^  which  perhaps  lends  it  a  special  emphasis: 

I         ^  nfrrv'i  hrk  "How  beautiful   is  thy 

face!" 

A.  In  the  pyr.  this  ending  is  written   v\  or 


h.   THE  NOMINAL  SENTENCE  INTRODUCED  BY  iw  AND  wn. 

332.         The  nominal  sentence  is  sometimes  introduced  byj 

the  auxiliary  verb  (1  Vi^    iw    "to    be"    (cf.    §§    220  sq. 

246 sq.),  especially  when  the  predicate  is  a  preposi-j 
tional  phrase: 

mrv  "His  one  way  was  under  water".^ 

B.  In   the  popular  language  of  the   m.  e.,    the   pronouns 
where  they  would  stand  as  the  subject  of  a  nominal  sentence 

are  superceded  by  the  forms  of  this  verb :     (1    v\  ^^    for 
Inwk  &c. 

1  Bauer  3.  2  Butler  16. 


C.    THE    NOMINAL    SENTENCE    WITH    'pW.    333 — 335.  141 

More  rarely  it  is  introduced  by  the  auxiliary  verb  333. 
^^  rvn  (cf.  §  223,  250  sq.)  as  e.  g.  in  ^^    \     \^^^ 
n      '^v'  1  rvnin  nfr  st  hr  ibsn  "It  was  good  for 

their  heart"/  (for  st  nfr  cf.  §  330,  2),  where  wnm 
precedes. 

c.  THE  NOMINAL  SENTENCE  WITH  ptv. 

Sentences  like    ^^^'^d\\    BC  pw  «It  is  ReC",'  334. 

^  o  ^  °  ^  ^^'*^  ^"^  "-^^  '^  ^^^*"''  i  ^  ^  ^^  ^ 
D  ^  fiwrw  prv  "They  are  paupers",^  properly  have  as 

subject,  the  demonstrative  prv  "this",  which  follows 
the  predicate  according  to  §  330, 2 ;  but  this  pw  is  now 
weakened  to  an  unchangeable  word  having  the  mean- 
ing "he",  "she",  "it"  or  "they". — If  the  predicate  is  a  long 

expression,  prv  may  be  inserted  within  it:  °  D  v\ 

■^^  ^^  •    PJi^t  P^  ^f  rvn-m^c  «It  is  a  remedy  of 

truth"  ^  (cf.  §  103). 

B.  This  yw  is  already  superceded  by  the  demonstrative  pB'i, 
tS'i,  nS'i  in  the  LE;  the  similar  word  TTE,  TF,  NE  probably 
arose  from  this. 

This  construction  is  then  used  to  emphasize  the  335. 
predicate  of  a  nominal  sentence;  in  order  to  render 


1  Prisse  2,  6.         2  Mar.  Ab.  II,  25.       3  ib.       *  LD  II,  136h. 
5  Eb.  75,  12. 


i 


142  2  a.   THE    ORDER   OF   WORDS.    336 — 339. 

emphatic  the  word  iht  "horizon"  in  Ipt  tht  "Karnak 
is  the  horizon",  the  sentence  tht  prv  "It  is  the  horizon" 
is  first  made,  and  Ipt  then  follows  as  apposition  to 

prv  "it":    ^  n'^(l°  jl'^©    Iht  pw    ipt   "It   is  the 

horizon,  viz.  Karnak'V  i.  e.  "The  horizon  is  Karnak". 

2.  THE  PARTS  OP  THE  SENTENCE. 
a.  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS. 

336.  The  order  of  words  is  to  he  especially  noted,  for 
it  is  often  the  case,  that  it  alone  indicates  how  a  sen-]] 
tence  is  to  be  analysed. 

337.  The  sentence  is  divided  into  two  parts:  one  pre 
ceding,  containing  the  verb,  subject,  direct  and  in- 
direct object;  and  one  following,  containing  specifi-^ 
cations  of  time  and  place  and  the  like. 

*338.  In  the  preceding  part  of  the  sentence  the  order] 
is  in  principle:  1.  verb,  2.  subject,  3.  direct  object| 
4.  indirect  object  (cf.  §  299).    E.  g.     ■ 


-^ 


(^    FS^ 


AA/W\A  O    O     O 


M^^.:^^   rdln  stn  nb 

bkf  "The  king  gave  his  servant  gold". 
♦339.         But   if  parts  2 — 4  are  partly  substantives  an< 
partly  pronouns,  the  pronouns  precede  the  substai 
tives.    E.  g. 

1  LD  III,  24d. 


C.    THE    ORDER    OF    WORDS.    340 342.  143 

a  \Si   1  rdm  ni  stn  nb  „The  king  gave 

AAAAAA       S!l        T   AAAAAA  O    O     O 

me  gold". 

Q  1  ^  I  /www  (^^        ^   r<?«';i  s/y  sifw  w  hkf 

AftAAAA     1         /T        I    AAAAAA  _/ J.  ^Cda — 

"The  king  gave  it  to  his  servant". 

0^^.^^     v^  rdlnf  nl  rib  "He  gave  me  gold". 

AAAAAA  Sr       O    O    O 

If  both  objects  are  pronouns,  the  indirect  precedes  340*. 
the  direct,  that  is,  the  pronominal  suffix  precedes  the 
absolute  pronoun: 

a  v^  1  V  4  '"'^^^  ^^  ^^  *^^  "The  king  gave 

AAAAAA       <^       T       11       T  AAAAAA 

it  to  me". 

CZIZI^^  AAAA/V\   AAAAAA  O     .C\ 

vgi    I  v\  rdinf  nl  srv  "He  gave  it  to  me". 

Except  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  (cf.  §  343  sq.)  the  341. 
above  laws  are  inviolable;  under  certain  circumstances, 
however,  for  stylistic  purposes,  an  expression  which 
belongs  in  the  latter  part  of  the  sentence,  may  be 
inserted  by  exception,   in  the  part  which  precedes: 

QiSrvf  "1  caused  that  his  weapons  pass  by  me"^  (for 
swB  ChBrvf  hrl). 

A  vocative  stands  as  a  rule  at  the  end   of  the  342. 
sentence : 

»  Sin.  136. 


144         6  a.   IN    GENERAL.       p.    WITHOUT   INTRODUCTION.    343.    344. 


^ 


f'=Ti) 


1, 


mk  rvi  r  nhm  c^k,  sht'i,  hr  wmf  "Be- 


hold,  I  will  take  away  thy  ass,  0  peasant,  because  he 
devours  &c."^ 

If  it  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  address, 

as  in  '^^:z7  J) ^ (] "^  A^7\  ^k.  ^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^^  "^^ 
lord,  I  have  found",^  it  is  somewhat  ceremonial;  it  is 
then  often  introduced  by  an  interjection,  like  [1  q7\    t^ 

ru  K\    hS  and  the  like. 


h.  EMPHASIS, 
a.  IN  GENERAL. 

343.  Emphasis  consists  in  placing  before  the  sentence, 
a  word  to  which  it  is  desired  to  attract  attention, 
and  as  a  rule  resuming  it  by  a  pronoun  in  the  sent- 
ence. It  is  very  frequently  used  and  often  contrary 
to  our  sense;  thus,  e.  g.  the  word  'king'  is  often  em- 
phasized without  reason. — Cf.  also  §  330.  331.  335. 

p.  WITHOUT  INTRODUCTION. 

344.  The  original  method  of  emphasis  leaves  the  em- 
phasized word  without  further   introduction,  e.  g.:; 


1  Bauer  11. 


2  Bauer  74. 


p.    WITHOUT   INTRODUCTION.     345.    346.  145 

§  ?  ""^  V§^  D  §  _SS)fl  °  ^  ^s^*  i>/*«  J3^  "My  praise, 
it  reached  heaven"  ^  (for  j97«  As^*'  pt). 

I                                   r    i      AAAAAA    cii.     I  '^.^a — 


k^tnf  irt  st  ri  irni  st  rf  "That  which  he  had  thought 
to  do  it  to  me,  I  had  done  it  to  him"-  (for  Irni  kBtnf 
Irt  st  ri  rf). 

r\      I      £^1  -Zl    J\      2i  1      1   _Zl    AAAAAA    cl  CI^I^ 

vR  [1  ^\     I  smt  nbt  rrvtnl  rs,  irv  irni  hd  ims  "Every  land 

to  which  I  went,  I  was  a  hero(?)  therein"^  (for  irv 
irni  hd  m  smt  nbt,  rrvini  rs). 

The  resumptive  pronoun  is  occasionally  omitted,  345. 
especially  in  poetry: 

m  Itrm  swrif  mrk  "The  water  in  the  stream,  he  drinks 
(it)  if  thou  wishest".* 

If  the  sentence  has   one  of  the  compound  verbal  346. 
forms  as  its  verb,  the  auxiliary  verb  with  which  it.  is 
formed,  stands  before  the  emphasized  word: 

T  I  t!?^  •  •  •  U    f^  (^h<^n  hn  n  sin 

bit'i  .  .  ,  minnf  "The  majesty  of  the  king  of  upper  and 
lower  Egypt  .  .  .  expired".^ 


1  LD  II,  122a.  2  Sin.  144.  3  gin.  101.         *  Sin.  233. 

?risse  2,  8. 
Erman,  Egypt,  gramm.  Yi 


146  Y-  WITH  ir,  ir-,  r-  and  in.  347. 


^     1  wnln  hnf  tbf  rvS  r  hrvt(?)  hrs  "The  heart  of  his 
majesty  was  sad  concerning  it".^ 


rvn 

AAAAAA   LJ      V^     l\f\f\f\J\f\  ^     I         U 


Iht  nbt,  Tvdt  nl  linf^  rvn  hprnl  ml  kd  "All  that  his  majesty 
commanded  me,  I  entirely  completed".' 
Cf.  also  §  228. 

Y.  WITH  \r,  ir-,  r-,  AND  in. 
347.  The  emphatic  particle     H      Ir  is  used  with  every 

kind  of  sentence;  the  resumption  of  the  emphasized     ; 
word  by  means  of  a  pronoun  is    only   occasionally 
suppressed,  in  the  case  of  the  subject  of  a  nominal 
sentence^  e.  g. 

sdm  St  "All  that  is  written,  hear  it"^ 

t\<=>  ^    '^[]''^~^^^^n\>^'^^{^  tr  firw  nhtntr, 

1       /wwvA  I  III  (3(3(3  nnn    _zr        1  i  • 

r  360  pn>  n  rnpi  "A  temple-day,  (that)  is  V360  o^  ^^^ 
year".^ 

Here  also,  an  auxiliary  verb  is  treated  according 
to  §  346. 

B.  This  construction  is  still  i-egarded  as  ceremonious  in  thel 
m.  e.  (often  in  legal  style);  but  in  the  n.  e.  it  superceded  all  the] 
other  methods  of  emphasizing. 

1  Westc.  9,  12.      2  Una  42.      3  prisse  2,  4.       *  Siut  I,  30C 


Y-  WITH  ir,  b--,  r-  and  in.  348 — 350.  147 

The  emphatic  word  [1         <>/,  which,  in  many  texts  348. 

(like  that  of  §  349),  is  written  rf,    follows    the 

word  to  be  emphasized  JiT^  (1  dsk  irf  "thou  thy- 

self".^ 

It  is  often  used  in  interrogative  sentences  (cf.  §  356) 
and  with  imperatives  and  optatives;  in  the  last  case 
it  often  still  has  the  archaic  form  rk  (cf.  A): 

^  ^.  (J         "■''''''^  sdmrv  irf  tn  "hear  ye",^ 
^    dik  rk  ni  "give  me".^ 

A.  In  the  pyr.  this  tr  takes  the  suffix  corresponding  to  the 
subject  of  the  sentence:  Irt,  irk,  Irf,  Irs. 

That  r/,  which  is  added  to  the  verb  (espe-  349. 

cially  those  of  going)   at  the  beginning  of  short  sec- 
tions seems  to  be  different  from  irf  rf\ 

T  ^  AAAAA/v  Mn  rf  tS  "The  earth  became 

light'/ 


A\\ 


irvin    rf    shti  pn 


"This  peasant  came".^ 

A.  This  r-  had  originallj'  changeable  suffixes  also. 

The  subject  of  a  sentence  is  often  emphasized  by  350. 

1  Westc.  7,  8.      2  LD  III.  24  d.      3  Peasant  29.     *  Sin.  248. 
'5  Peasant  52. 

K* 


148 


C.    THE    ELLIPSE.    351. 


means  of      \     In  (old  writing  (1  ^^  in) ;  the  resump- 

AAA/SAA  1  J   ^ 

tive  pronoun  is  for  the  most  part  omitted  as  self 
evident: 

in  hnf  rdi  irtf  "His  majesty 


I  A\'w\A  y 


- Q' 


caused  that  it  be  made"'  (for  in  hnf  rdif  irtf). 

If  the  subject  to  be  emphasized  is  a  pronoun,  the 
pronouns  ntk,  ntf  &c.  are  substituted  for  in  and  the 
pronoun  according  to  §  84: 

ntf  ssm    wi  "It   is  he   who 


leads  me",^ 


ntsn  irsn  ni  "It  is  they 


AAAAAA  r\  n  '^ 

I  I   N\fy/\y^  -<2>-|  I  AAAAAA 

who  do  it  for  me".^ 

B.  In  LE  this  In  is  written:  ^^\     (i.  e.  *n  according  to  late 

pronunciation).  4 

c.  THE  ELLIPSE. 

351.  The  frequent  ellipses  (i.  e.  the  omission  of  effec- 

tive words  as  dispensable)  often  render  the  under- 
standing of  the  text  very  difficult.  They  are  found 
first  of  all  in  the  parallel  members  in  poetry,  where, 
in  the  second  member,  one  or  more  indentical  words 
are  suppressed: 


I       I       I     AAAAAA 


1  Sin.  308.  2  LD  III,  24  d. 


I    5^"    AAAAAA 
III     I       I       I 


I    yr  AAAAAA 
III    I      I      I 


3  Siut  I,  289.         *  Sethe 


C.    THE    EIXIPSE.    352.    353.  149 

iml  mi  m  r  n  linrvtn 

sh^l  hr  msTvtn 
"Establish  my  name  in  the  mouth  of  your  servants, 
(Establish)  my  memory  with  your  children".^ 


^      f    ^^  ^  tms  hrf  r  dd  m^Q,  mkhS  ddrv  grg 
"Turning  his  countenance  to  him  who  speaks  truth, 
(turning)  the  back  of  (his)  head  (to)  those  who  speak 
lies".- 

Similar  is  the  ellipse  in  comparisons,  where  it  is  352. 
found  in  the  second  compared  member: 

AAAftAA  sfwf  lb  n  bk  im  ml  hkB  n.smt  nbt  "He  re- 

joices  (lit.  broadens)  the  heart  of  the  servant  there 
(i.  e.  mine)  like  (the  heart  of)  the  prince  of  any  land".^ 

When  several  successive  verbs  have  the  same  sub-  353. 
ject,  the  latter  is   sometimes   written  with  the  first 
only;  thus  in  animated  narrative: 

>  Mar.  Ab.  II,  31.  2  Louvre  C  26.  3  gin.  176. 


150  C    THE    ELLIPSE.    354.    355. 

inni  hrrvsn,  pr  r  hnmrvtsn^  hrv  kBrvsn^  rvhB  its?i,  rdl  sdt 
Im  "I  captured  their  women,  I  led  away  their  people, 
went  to  their  wells,  slew  their  steers,  cut  down  their 
barley,  set  fire  thereon".^ 
354.  An  object  may  likewise  remain  unexpressed,  where 
it  is  clear  from  that   which  precedes.      Thus,  e.  g. 

"He  stole  his  ass,  he  drove  (him),  (    «    "^^     s^^k  for 

sCk  sw,  with  accompanying  ellipse  of  the  subject)  into 
his  village".^ 


"She  takes  Egypt  like  the  god  ''Ir-s?i   lO        ^^-=^ 
<::^   V  /I  ^        ^'^^-^    shprnf  (for  shprnf  si)  r  rvtj  ffwf 
he  created  (her)  to  wear  his  diadem  (lit.  to  lift  up)".^ 
355.         Another  form  is  the  ellipse  of        |)  dd  "say"  in  ex- 
pressions like: 

<^^%  §r^w  "it  is  said"."* 

[] /wvAAA  Q  ^',2  jRC  "saith  Re",    (]/wwv^  Maaaaaa  /^^^^  "they 
say", 

I  I  ]'^  ntrm  lir  "the  gods  say"^ 
These  stand  fiir  ddhrtrv,  ddinsn,  ntrrv  Jw  dd. 
B.     (I  QA  is  later  written  for  Inf. 


»  LD  II,  136h.     2  Peasant  24.     3  lD  III,  24  d.     *  Eb.  9.  20. 
5    Stele  from  Kuban. 


< 


3fl.  INTEREOGATIVE  SENTENCE.  356 — 358.  151 

3.  KINDS  OF  SENTENCE. 
a.  INTEREOGATIVE  SENTENCE. 

The  indication  of  the  question  by  the  accent  alone  356. 
is  very  rare;  as  a  rule  it  is  externally  marked.     Fre- 
quent emphasizing  whether   of  the  verb    or   of  the 
interrogative  particle,  is  characteristic  of  the  inter- 
rogative sentence. 

If  the  sentence  contains  no  special  interrogative,  357*. 
it  is  introduced  by  means  of  (Jaaaaaa  in  or  [Jaaaaaa  [1  v^ 

1 Q  0  1  Jm  o    Ji  ^  2^-=^  _M^  ^  n 

Crvitrvl  rf  m    .  .  tf   "Shall    I   be    robbed    upon   his 

land(?)?".^ 

n  /www  [1  v^  ^'     °^^-^  □  v^  In  irv  m^Ct  piv  "Is  it 
truth?"  2 

B.  in  iw  is  perhaps  preserved  in  PNE,  cf.  C§  394. 

As  a  rule,  the  interrogatives  stand  at  the  end  of  358*. 
the  sentence  (cf.  C§  392).      The  most  common  inter- 
rogative pronoun  is    v\         mii^  ml  cf.  on  the  read- 
ing, §  34)  "what?,  who?": 

/y  ^J^J^^-^f  phnk  nn  hr  m?  "Why  (on  ac- 
count of  what)  have  you  reached  this  (place)  ?''^ 

"^^^  %  1 1 2  (1  ^^  irtw  nn  mi  m  ?  "Like  what 
is  this  done?"'' 

»  Peasant  18.         2  Westc.  8,  3.         3  sin.  35.         <  ib.  202. 


152  a.    INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCE.  359 — 361. 

B.    In    LE.   m    is   already    superceded   by  (I  Ih    A(l) 

"what?";  cf.  C§  60.  "~^^ 

359.  '^.         as  subject  with   the   meaning  "who?",  is 

usually  emphasized  by  in  (cf.  §  350): 

A  A^AA^A  ^— ^  "^  1  "^  ^^;i//,^^5;y?«Whosaysit?''^ 


"Who  brings  it?"^  (with  doub 


m  m  irf  inf  sw  ? 
e  emphasis). 

B.   This  in  m  is  already  written    aaaaaa  \^\         3^  at  the  end 
of  the  m.  e.;  in  LE  there  has  arisen  from  in  m,   a  new  word 

AAAAAA    PI  jQ 

n'im  "who"  MIM  (cf,  C§  60,  2), 


w 

360.  Other   old   expressions   for    "who?,    what?"    are 
(jg[l^^  m^and^;^ijij|«^sy(?).    Cf.  e.  g. 

(Igp^^D^  Isstpfv  "What  is  it?  who  is  it?"^ 
-75-(l(j  |d^  /sy(?)  pw  "Who  is  it?"^ 
Here  belongs  also  TO"        O^O  is  {l)-nw  "When?"'' 
(lit.  "What  of  the  time?"). 

361.  The  interrogative  for  "where?"  is  ^  V^^=^tn.Qi.: 

AAAAAA  I       (T^ 

I'VI'^^^  ^  '|W£5£f>*V/^w?"Wherei8it?"' 
(with  emphasis). 

^^^^<=>  ^  \%&q^  Irt  r  tn?  "Whither  goest 
thou?"^  (lit.  "Toward  where  makest  thou";  2  f.  sg.). 

1  Math.  Hdb.  35.     2  Eb.  58,  10.      3  Math.  Hdb.  30.      "  Sin.  35. 
6  Totb.  126,  Schlr.  46.     6  Westc.  9,  15.     7  ib.  9,  4.     8ib,  12,  14. 


I 


b.    NEGATIVE    SENTENCES.       a.    WITH    «    AND    ««.    362  —  364.  153 

A.  In  the  pyr.  it  is  written,  tnl,  tn,  and  even  without  a  pre- 
position, means  "whither?,  whence?" 

B.  In  LE.  tmc,  Copt.  TCDN.    Cf.  C§  364. 

The  common  word,  archaically  written  (1]  Q7\,  362. 

1  ^  ptfi,  pif-i  hut  generally  -I  QA  pi'i^  is  pro- 

bably not  an  interrogative,  but  something  like  an 
imperative,  "show"  or  the  like.  It  always  stands  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence : 

°    (^'^§'^1'^--    Pt'i   ^W    "What    is    his 
field?"  ^ 

°    f^^^^l^  P^'^  ^f  ^^  "What  is  it?" 2  (with 
emphasis). 

As  a  characteristic  of  the  interrogative  sentence,  363, 
note  further  the  particle  trw^  which  follows  the  first 
word : 

shJnk  "Didst  thou  remember?"^ 

A.  B.  In  the  pyr.  and  in  LE.  it  is  written  trc. 

b.  NEGATIVE  SENTENCES. 
o.  "WITH  n  AND  nn. 

The  usual  negation  v^ii-^  (more  rarely  /  \)  appears  354* 

in  two  different  forms,  which  are  usually  distinguished 
in  good  orthography:  .^n_„  and  '^■'^.    Their  pronun- 

1  Math.  Hdb.  49.         2  Totb.  ed.  Nav.  17,  31.        3  Eb.  2,  3. 


154  6.   NEGATIVES    SENTENCES.       0..    WITH   n   AND   nU.    365 — 367. 

ciation   was    perhaps    approximately    n    and    nn    or 
similar, 

A.  In  the  pyr.  both  forms  are  written  c^JU^. 

B.  LE.  always  has  ^;;0^;  in  Copt,  the  negation  is  preserved 
as  N-.    (Cf.  C§  389). 

365.  ,^-A-^  is  used  with  the  verbal  form  sdmf,  in  so  far 
as  it  is  not  future  in  meaning,  and  always  with  the 
w-form : 

n  rhi  srv  "I  know  him  not".' 


mw 


"Lay  this  upon  the  snake's  hole,  .^n^         J\ 
(]  ^v    n  prnf  im  then  it  will  not  come  out".^ 
366.  however,  is  used  with  the  form  sdmf^  when 

it  has  the  meaning  of  a  future  (that  is,  belongs  to  the 
second  group,  cf.  §  184sq.): 

-^    nn  pssf  "He  shall  (will)  not  di- 


AA^/^AA  M- 


367.         Before  the  absolute  infinitive  (cf.  §  280)  i& 

AAAAAA 

used.    Especially  frequent  in  this  case  is  onn 

rdit  "without  giving,  without  causing": 

-J- a— ^^2  ^/^^  rvdC,  nn  rdit  hr  gs  "Judg- 

ing,  without  putting  upon  one  side"*  (i.  e.  without 
being  partisan). 


1  Sin.   114.      2  Eb.  97,  19.      3  Siut  I,  311.       *  LD  II,  U9e. 


b.    NEGATIVE    SENTENCES.       a.    WITH    H    AND    mi.    368 370.  155 

"Set  it  where  it  is  cool  ^^"^^3^  '^  "^  P  B 
^  O  nn  rdit  m^^s  srv  without  permitting  the  sun  to 
see  it".^ 

In  this  combination,  rdit  has  sometimes  lost  its 
causative  meaning,  and  only  means  "without"  (e.  g. 
nn  rdit  pssf  st^  "without  his  dividing  it"). 

o^A^  stands  before  the  nominal  sentence,  and  in  368. 
this  case  when  the  subject  is  a  pronoun,  the  later  ab- 
solute pronouns  are  used  (cf.  §  84): 

,^n-^  c:^    D  ^  ^   ^^       .   \  n  ntf  pw  m  msCt  "It 


lo  \ 
is  not  really  he".^ 

-^-^^^  however,  is  very  frequently  used  with  a  fol-  369. 
lowing  noun  or  old  absolute  pronoun  (cf.  §  80)  for  "it 
does  not  exist".  -^^^  nn  wn  also  appears  with 

the  same  meaning: 

AA/VAAA  AAAAAA      1  _iir^  AAA/W\        /T    >^\        \   _/J^^ 

Im  "There  is  no  water  there,  I  am  not  there".^ 

^n®^-^^^N.    n  wsht,  nn  hms  «A  ship 

which  has  no  rudder".^ 

Note  further  the  combinations   ,^a_^(1  I  n  Is   "but  370. 

not"  and    s^-a.^  ^  c^    n  grt   "however  not"  (weaker 
than  the  former): 

1  Eb.  43,  17.         2  Siat  I,  272.         3  sin.  267.         <  Eb.  69,  6. 
5  Sin.  13. 


156  a.  WITH  n  AND  nn.  p.  the  circujil.  with  im-.  m,  tm-.  371 — 373. 

n  wsh  Is  prv  "It  was  narrow,  but  it  was  not  wide"J 

"His  skin  grows,  v;^-n-^[j  l^^o  n  is  rvrt  but  not 
much".^ 


371.         ^^^jT_^     ^  n  sp  means  "never"  : 

n  ® 

-^^r^fc^ra^y      yc^£^£i     ^      Q\nsp 

hS  mUif  hr  smt  tn  dr  rk  ntr  "One  like  him  never  came 
down  in  this  land,  since  the  time  of  the  god".^ 

A.  In  old  texts,  the  subject  of  such  a  sentence  is  often  em- 
phasized by  means  of  the  demonstrative  fB,  f.  pBt:  n  sp  pBt  irt 


mitt  "The  like  was  never  done".  4     .^^JU^,  V\         _     hot  sp   with 

Jl    D  ® 
an  old  negative  iwt  also  occurs  (of.  §  378). 

372.  A  strengthening  of  the  negative,  probably  obsolete 
in  the  classic  language,  is  found  in  w/r  n: 

|1  "^^^^I         v^-f^  ^^  %\  in  nfr  n  rvnn  niCtii 

"If  it  is  not  in  your  possession".^ 

Jy      nfr  n  irt  mitt  "Never  was  the  like 
done".*^ 

p.  THE  CIRCUMLOCUTIONS  WITH  im-,  m,  tm-. 

373.  The    usual  negatives    are    avoided   with   certaii 
forms  of  the  verb,  and  replaced  by  circumlocution^ 


1  Butler  15.        2  Eb.  104,  8.        3  LD  II,  149  e.       ^  Una  31 
5  Gr6baut,  musee  Egyptien,  pi.  18.         6  Mar.  Mast.  390. 


^i.  THE  CIRCUMLOCUTIONS  WITH  im-,  M,  tm-.  374.  375.         157 


witli  the  obsolete  verbs  Im-  and  tm-.  These  are  fol- 
lowed by  a  (participial?)  form  of  the  verb,  in  which 
the  II  ae  gem.   are  doubled,  the  Illae    inf.  are  not 

doubled  and  rdl  "give"  has  the  form 

H  ^s.       ^^  ^^  Vi^Q^  when  the  verb  to  be  denied  is  374. 
optative  or  final  in  meaning  and  has  a  pronominal 
subject: 

"Treat  it  with  cold  fi  |\  ^"^C30  l\  l\   Q  mf 


smm  that  it  may  not  become  hot".^ 


I  I  I 


imk  ir  iht  rs  "Do  not  do 


anything  for  it".^ 

The  imperative  of  the  old  verb,  which  is  written  375. 

m,  serves  for  the  negation  of  imperatives  and 


optatives  with  a  nominal  subject: 


.^^ 


m  CB  ibk  "Let  not  thy  heart 


be  proud".^ 


A 


SI 


m  ChC  rim 


mtrw  "Do  not  stand  against  me  as  a  witness".^ 


plural 


A.   In  the  pyr.  it  is  written     ^\.         ;     they    have    also     a 


1  Eb.  91,  6.  2  Eb.   110,  3. 

ed.  Nav.  30  A  2.  B  3. 


3  Prisse  5,  8.  *  Totb. 


158         p.    THE    CIRCUMLOCUTIONS    WITH    im-,    M   AND    tm-.    376.    377. 

B.  Instead  of  m  the  language  of  the  n.  e.  emplo3's  the  cir- 
cumlocution  ^^^^  m  cr  "do  not",  from  which  arose  the  Copt, 
MTfp.    Cf.  C§  305,  7. 

376.  ^iezil  ^^^^  tm-^  the  use  of  which  is  more  extended, 

is  found,  among  other  uses,  in  the  conditional 
sentence : 

\\  <==> cvjr^  l:^^  ^  ^^  ''^Tifl ^  ir  tmf  wU  St  "If 
he  does  not  discharge  it";' 
in  the  form  sdmhrf  (cf.  §  204) : 

hsbt  "If  it  does  not  become  worms"  ;^ 
and  in  the  verbal  adjective  (cf.  §  293): 

fhtf'i  stv,  imtf'i  QiB  lirf  "He  who  unlooses  it  (the  boun- 
dary) and  does  not  contend  for  it";^ 
further  as  an  optative  in  final  and  interrogative  clauses. 

377.  The  circumlocution  ^^imr  ^^^  tm  rdl,    which 

according  to  the  above  means  "not  to  cause  that",  is 
very  often  employed  to  substantivize  a  negative  clause 
of  intention ;  since  tm  is  then  an  infinitive,  this  com- 
bination is  also  construed  as  such: 

"The  boundary  is  erected  <=z>^^ii=n:  ^^^^         ^"^i 

1  Eb.  26,  7.         2  Eb.  25,  6.         3  LD  II,  136  h. 


Y-    THE    NEGATIVK    ADJECTIVE.    378.  159 

>)■  ^^  Q     <^  ^^~~^  ^  ^^  ^^^  ^^   ^^  ^^^^  ^^  ^^  order 

_-Zl    A/vvv\A  /N  I     iinr 

that  no  negro  at  all  should  overstep  it"  ^  (lit.  "to  cause 
that  not  any  negro  should  overstep  it"). 

rdi  hnp  drrvyt  prv  "It  is  something  (i,  e.  a  remedy)  in 
order  that  the  vulture  may  not  steal".^ 

B.  In  the  popular  language  of  the  n.  e.  tm  rdl  occurs  with 
weakened  meaning,  for  simple  negation;  tm  rdi  mBni  tiv  "that  I 
did  not  see  thee".  3. 

Y.  THE  NEGATIVE  ADJECTIVE. 


The  adjective  ^^^^  Itvtt^  which  belongs  to  the  378. 

formations  of  §  132  sq.  and  is  derived  from  the  ne- 
gative irvt  of  §  371  A,  originally  meant  something  like 
"not  having",  e.  g. : 

which  has  not  its  writing",^  i.  e.  a  book  without 
writing. 

^  Tk  "^^^v  rlj  ^^^=^  itvt'imrvtf^ihe  motherless  one".^ 

A.  The  pyr.  write  it  [I  v\  vj-O-t,  A  iwU;  the    rare    writing 

2ti  also  seems  to  be  old. 
W 

B.  In  such  combinations  it  has  also  been  preserved  in  the 

Copt,  as  AT-.    Cf.  C§  89. 


1  LD  n,  136i.       2  Eb.  98,  5.        3  Westc.  8,  11.       •»  Eb.  30,  7. 
*  Peasant  64. 


160  C.  DEPEND.    AND    SUBSTANTIVIZ.    CLAUSES.    379 — 381. 

379.  It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  this  irvt'i  is  used  in 
the  old  language  as  a  negative  companion  to  the  re- 
lative adjective  ntl  (of.  §  401  sq.)  and  like  the  latter 
attaches  clauses  of  all  kinds : 

I  "^  1  ^5*^  twy  nt  i^hrv(?),  irvtt  skdrvt  hrs  "This  place(?) 

of  the  spirits,  on  which  there  is  no  navigation"  ^  (with 
junction  of  the  nominal  sentence  skdrvt  hrs  "Navigation 
is  upon  it"). 

v\   I    ®         v\  I  ¥\    iTVt'irv  rh  bw  nt'i 

o    -^  I  :=^^  J  Jl  ^  W    o    1  _M^ 

St  m  "Those  whose  place  is  not  known",  (clause:  rh 
hrv  "The  place  is  known"). -^ 

380.  As  is  observable  from  the  examples  cited,    this 

"^^^  is   often   employed   as  a  substantive  also; 

where  it  stands  in  the  feminine  entirely  without  ad- 
dition (cf.  95,  4),  it  means  "that  which  is  not": 

"that  which  is  and  that  which  is  not""* 
(i.  e.  everything). 

c.  DEPENDENT  AND  SUBSTANTIVIZED  CLAUSES. 

381.  On  the  usual  case  of  the  dependent  clause,  where 
a  verb  is  dependent  upon  rdl    "to    cause"    cf.  . 


1  Totb.  ed.  Nav.  149  c,  17.         2  ib.  79,  5.  3  LD  II,  149. 


C.    DEPEND.    AND    SUBSTANTIVIZ.    CLAUSES.    382.    383. 


161 


§  179. — On  clauses  dependent  upon  other  verbs  cf. 
§  189.  —  On  the  dependence  upon  conjunctions  cf. 
§  190.  302. 

The  substantivized  forms  of  §  282  sq.  take  the  382. 
place  of  a  great  part  of  the  dependent  clauses  of  our 
own  language;  parallel  with  these,  another  method 
of  substantivizing  is  used  in  the  same  manner,  viz. 
by  prefixing  ntt^  every  sentence  may  be  converted  into 
a  substantive  and  made  dependent  upon  verbs  or  pre- 
positions: 

Iwl  rhkrvl  ntt  tht  prv  ipt  "I  know  that  Karnak  is  a 
region  of  light". ^ 

A  I WAAA  A  I  A  ""         hr  ntt  rdlsn  tB-hd 
pn  "Because  they  give  this  white  bread". ^ 

If  a  sentence  of  the  kind  treated  in  §  246  ( 0  ^  383. 


%  iwl  rhkrvL)  be  substantivized  by 

means  of  this  ntt^  the  subject  is  not  expressed  by  the 
auxiliary  verb,  but  by  means  of  jibe  old  absolute 
pronouns  of  §  80: 

i<=>oJi^®U       Jim- 

cause  of  the  fact  that  I  know"  (i.  e.  "because  I  know"), 


'-  LD  m,  24d.         2  siut  I,  311. 
Erman,  Eg^pt.  gramm. 


3  Totb.  ed.  Nav.  72,  5. 
L 


162  d.    TEMPORAL    CLAUSES.    384.    385. 

d.  TEMPORAL  CLAUSES. 

384.  If  no  conjunction  is  used  for  the  introduction  of 
the  temporal  clause,  it  can  be  recognized  as  such 
only  by  means  of  the  connection.  As  a  rule  it  pre- 
cedes the  principal  clause,  cf.  e.  g. 

"As  the  earth  became  light,  I  came  to  Ptn".^ 

'^""'^  ^,  sdm  St  nt'iw  m  t^-Mrl^  w^hsn  d^dBrvsn  m  tB 
"When  those  who  are  in  Egypt  heard  it,  they  laid 
their  heads  upon  the  earth".^ 

More  rarely  it  follows  the  principal  clause : 

Irvf  hr  mdrvt  hint  "Be  not  silent,  when  he  is  at  (?  as 
we  say  "at  work")  a  wicked  speech".^ 

385,  The  temporal  clauses  which   are   introduced  by 

the  conjunctions  (really  prepositions)  hft  "when, 

as",  ^^''^^  J\mht  "after",  <=:>^  r  5i*  "after",  as 
a  rule,  follow  the  principal  clause: 

nhi  hft  hntf  "I  followed  my  lord  as  he  sailed  up".^ 

»  Sinuhe  20.      2  ld  II,  149  f.     3  Prisse  5,  14.     *  Siut  I,  298. 
5  LD  II,  122  a. 


e.    THE    CONDITIOKAL    SENTENCE.    386  —  388. 


163 


On  the  other  hand  the  clauses  with 

J\  hr  mht  "now  after'  so   common  at  beginning  of 
paragraphs,  always  precede  (of.  §  325;  244). 


e.  THE  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCE. 

The    conditional   clause   precedes    the    principal  386. 
clause.    It  may  be  introduced  by  means  of  a  particle 
like  ir  and  ml,  but  may  also  stand  without  such  in- 
troduction. 

It  is  always  left  without  a  particle,  when  it  con-  387. 
tains  any  other  verbal   form  than  sdmf  (frequently 
sdmhrf  ci.  §  204)  or  is  a  nominal  sentence: 


rvhmhrk  mi  . . .  ddhrk  "If  you  examine  again  (lit.  repeat 
the  examining)  .  .  .  then  say  &c.".^ 

hrl^  imi  mhkrvi  "A  third  of  me  (added)  to  me,  then  I 
am  full".^ 

If  the  conditional  clause  contains  the  form  sdmf^  388. 
it  can  likewise  be  left  without  a  particle;  the  verbal 
form    then    always    belongs   to   the    "second   group" 
(of.  §  184.  188): 


X        ^AAAAA 


s  ^® 


•  Eb.  36,  15,         2  Math.  Hdb.  35.  36. 


L* 


164  e.    THE    CONDITIONAL    SENTENCE.    389 — 391. 

psstn  art  Iht  nbt  .  .  .  hprt  prv  m  r  360  "If 
now  ye  divide  all  .  .  .,  it  (the  result)  is  i/seo"-^ 
389.  As  a  rule,  however,  a  conditional  sentence  con- 
taining the  form  sdm/",  is  introduced  by  (J'==^^^^^^  tr;  in 
this  case  the  verbal  form  always  belongs  to  the  "first 
group" : 


^  tr   gmk   dUsw   .  .   .  him   Crvik  "If 

thou  findest  a  wise  man  .  .  .  then  bend  thy  arms"  - 
(out  of  reverence). 

A.  In  the  pyr.  a  (I  awaaa  In  is  used  instead  of  Ir. 
390.         If  a  number  of  conditional  clauses  are  connected, 
the  construction  with  Ir  is,  as  a  rule,  employed  only 
with  the  first,  while  the  second  is  treated  according 
to  §  388: 

q<==^„v^i  T 


'^^       ^ 


(abbreviation)  s  hr  mn  ri-ibf,  gmmk  st  hr  psdf. . .  ddhrk 
"If  you  examine  a  man  who  is  diseased  in  his  sto- 
mach (?),  and  you  find  it  upon  his  back  .  .  .  then 
say  &c.".3 
391.  The  introduction  of  the  conditional  clause  by 
means   of   I]  (1  mi  or  ^v    m,  is  far  more  rare: 

1  Siut  I,  286.  300.         »  Prisse  5,   10— 11.         3  Eb.  40,  5. 


/.    REL.    CLAU8.     a.    WITH.    A    CON.     |3.    WITH    SUBST.    VERBS.    392/4.       165 


I  ^  V\  K      I  *^-^=^—  »»«  dd  nk:  ifd  n  3ht  n  hi 


.— fl tk   s^ 

s  I         n 

II    o\\ 
10  r  lit  2,  pti Bhtf  "If  there  be  said  to  you:  'A  square 

of  field  of  10  measures  by  2  measures',  what  is  its 
content?"^  (lit.  its  field). 

v\  <=::>  ^'wvAA  ^^  .  .  .    ^1  m  mrrtn  Inprv 

.  . .  (Jdtn  "If  ye  love  Anubis  .  .  .  say".- 


/.  EELATIVE  CLAUSES, 
a.  WITHOUT  A  CONNECTIVE. 

The  custom  of  joining  one  of  the  usual  verbal  392. 
forms  as  a  relative,  directly  to  a  noun,  is  rare  and 
doubtless    obsolete.     The    j)seudoparticiple   is    thus 

used  in  (Tl  '  CT)  "^^^  v^  Vh^  [|  ^  ^^  t^    msktvl  imf 

H    illll  ^         Jr  ^1_M5j 

"The  land  in  which  I  was  born".^ 

Nominal  clauses,  however,   are  frequently  joined  393. 
to  a  noun  in  this  manner;   cf.  §§  329.  330.  245.  249 
and  227. 

p.  WITH  SUBSTANTIVIZED  VERBS. 

The  peculiar  verbal  forms  of  the  usual  relative  394. 
clause,   are  identical  with  the  substantivized  forms 
treated  in  §  289  sq.     They  are  co-ordinated  with  the 
noun  as  an  apposition,   at  the  same  time  agreeing 


1  Math.  Hdb,  49.     2  Mar.  Cat.  d'Ab.  711.     3  Sin.  159. 


166  j3.    WITH    SUBSTANTIVIZED    VERBS.    395 397. 

with  it  in  gender ;  hence,  for  "the  woman  whom  I 
love"  is  said  hmt  mrrti  "the  woman,  the  one  I  love" ; 
but  "the  brother  whom  I  love",  must  be  written  sn 
mrrrvi. 
395.  As  was  remarked  in  §  289,  the  forms  sdmrvi, 
sdmtl  belong  to  the  second  group  (§  184)  of  the  form 
sdmf\    in  the  case  of  the  Ilae  gem.   it  is  therefore 


^^_  rvnntf,  Illae  inf.  ^^^     prrtf, 

rdi  "give"  dldttfko,. — Furthermore,  the  mas- 


culine ending  w  in  the  form  sdmrvf  is  not  usually 
written  out  (most  frequently  with  a  nominal  subject, 
when  written),  just  as  in  other  cases,  it  is  not  every- 
where uniformly  inserted  (cf.  §  96). 

A.  In  the  pyr.  the  ic  is  frequently  written,  e.  g.  ht  piv  n  Cnh, 
Cnhwsn  tmf  "that  tree  of  life,  from  which  they  Uve"'. 

396.  Corresponding  to  the  statement  in  §  197,  the 
forms  derived  from  the  «-form  have  here  also,  nearly 
always  the  meaning  of  the  past.  The  masculine 
ending  w,  which  in  the  «-form,  stands  quite  within 
the  word,  is  here  never  written  out. 

397.  In  those  sentences  in  which  the  subject  of  the 
relative  clause  would  be  indentical  with  the  substan- 
tive to  which  the  relative  clause  is  connected,  an  at- 
tributive participle  is,  as  a  rule,  used  in  its  stead 


1  Merenre'  616. 


(3.    WITH    SUBSTANTIVIZED    VEUBS.    398.    399.  167 

(cf.  §  260).  There  are,  however,  examples,  in  which, 
even  in  this  case,  a  relative  clause  seems  to  be  used, 
whose  pronominal  subject  is,  to  be  sure,  omitted: 

"300  asses,  which  are  laden  with  incense".^ 

thn  hr  psdf '■'■W,  is  the  ills(?),  which  have  invaded  his 
back"^  (for  thnsn). 

The  pronoun  which  refers  to  the  substantive  to  398. 
which  the  relative  clause  is  joined,  is  almost  always 
wanting,  if  it  is  the  object  of  the  relative  clause*: 

rvhi  w<'"this  white  bread,  ye  give  me"^  (for  diditvtn  nisw). 

^'^\       1/vwvvs  ww#  hkStsn    "the    villages,    they 

govern"/ 

9     _L©S'  XC13  Vl/W\A  A^ft/v\A 

boundary  whicb  my  majesty  hath  made".^ 

struction  which  he  (lit.)  made".^ 

On  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  dependent  upon  a  pre-  399. 
position,  the  pronoun  is,  for  the  most  part,  expressed: 

II  Hr-hwf  C.  4.         2  Eb.  40,  6.        3  Siut  I,  276.        «  Una  108. 
»  LD  II,  136  h.         6  Mar.  Abyd.  II,  25. 


y  ,^    t^s    pn    irn    lyni   "this 


168         Y-   WITH    A    PASS.    PARTIC.    0.   WITH   THE    ADJECT,   tltl.   400.    401. 

<^^^  \>    A    ^  '^^^^^\\  smt   7ibt.    rwtni   rs 
^    I   ^  Jl  JA   ^  1 

"every  land  to  which  I  journeyed '.^ 

Only  with  the  preposition  m  "in",  "by  means  of 
&c.  it  is  often  wanting: 

"the  place  in  which  my  heart  tarries'.^ 

Y.  WITH  A  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

400.  The  substitution  of  an  attributive  participle  for 
a  relative  clause  is  also  extended  (in  violation  of 
§  397)  to  clauses  whose  subject  is  different  from  the 
substantive  to  which  they  are  joined ;  this  is  the  par- 
ticipial construction  treated  in  §  261,  e.  g. 

try  nfmltt  "There  is  no  humble  one,  to  whom  the  like 
is  done"^  (properly,  parvus  factus  ei  idem). 

0.  WITH  THE  ADJECTIVE  nti. 

401.  The  adjective  nti  "which",  which  belongs  to  those 
treated  in  §  132  sq.,  was  originally  used  in  purely 
nominal  relative  clauses  without  a  verb,  especially  if 
the  subject  of  the  relative  clause  was  identical  with 
the  noun  to  which  it  was  joined: 


1  Sin.  101.      2  Sin.  168.     3  sinuhe  309.     Ace.  to  Sethe. 


6.    WITH   THE   ADJECTIVE    ntt.    402.  169 


AAAAAA 


|]<::z>'      °V\5iKz::7  '^    a;^      iri-Cf  nb,   nt'i  hrf 

"every  officer  who  was  with  him".' 

Hot  t\  =^^^  ddft  nbty  ntt  m 

Jit/'  "all  worms  which  are  in  his  body".^ 

l— '%2r  ^  1^    ^  f^^^  mrw-k^t 

o  ^)  M I  ^  W  m  I  I  <c:=> 

«f?w  /?r  //r?  "the  overseers  of  the  works,  who  are  upon 
the  mountain".'^ 

W>         P^fl  ^^  &w  nt'i  St  im  "the  place  where 
they  are""*  (with  a  different  subject). 

A.  In  the  pyramids  is  Avritten  for  «ft',    1^v    ^  forniw. 

AAAAv\A   I 

Another  archaic  writing  for  JiiVw?  is  ^^  ^  I  • 

B.  inXi  early  becomes  an  unchangeable  particle;  it  first  loses 
'■    the  plural  (e.  g.  msw  nt'i  m  ChCf  "the  children  who  are  in  his 

palace"  6  instead  of  nt'ito),  later  also  the  feminine. 

The  sentences  of  §  240  sq.  made  after  the  analogy  402. 
of  the'pure  nominal  sentence,  may  also  be  so  joined; 
their  verb  is  always  in  the  pseudoparticiple  or  the  in- 
finitive with  hr: 

"a  man  who  suffers  with  heat",' 

^  I         T  ^s.  ^i^^  s  nt'i  mr  "a  man  who  is  ill. 


i 

^  H /\/WJV^  ^    ,1 1 1 1 IJ  l| 


»  Louvre  C  172.       2  Eb.  20,  8.       3  Sin.  303.       ■»  Westc.  9,  3. 
»  M.  495  =  P.  L  262.     «  gin.  176.     ^  Eb.  32,  21.     8  Eb.  35,  10. 


170  0.   WITH   THE    ADJECTIVE    Tltl.   403.    404. 

403.  nt'i  was  then  further  used  to  connect  verbal  rela- 
tive clauses  also ;  with  negative  clauses,  this  is  always 
the  case ;  but  it  occurs  elsewhere  also,  where  a  mis- 
understanding might  be  apprehended  if  there  were 
no  express  connection : 

A.AAAAA  -rr-      /-^  ^-- -^ 

nt'i    n   mrf  "who   is    not 


III 


sick".i 

"1^  tk    ^/~V  9^5?  •<2>-  fv  ^~^    i\      A     n  ^ 

6/ /TH  _ac^  C_Zj  A  iCi     <ZZ>  _Z1    Sti.         _crN^  aawaa -ad  Li 

/^      \\  UJ        Si  AAAAAA    T    _ZI 

knbt,  nt'i  rdini  ntn  sjv  "this  bread  and  beer,  which  the 
officials  deliver  to  me,  and  which  I  have  given  you".^ 
404.         nti  is  also  often  used  independently,  as  a  substan- 
tive "he  who"  (f.  ntt  "that  which''): 

^1^  1  ^^^^^  ml  ^      nt'iw  m  smsf  "those  who  are  m 

his  following".^ 

itt  nbt  m  ss  "all  that  was  in 


(^  ^   ^1:1 
writing"  (i.  e.  written).^ 


I       <;Z>       I    AA'^A   A    2-1'   /WAAAA  C^     \\      I     <!II>     I      I      I     —CT^  lO         I 

swrlln  nt'i  mrwt  m  htf  "Let  him  drink  (it),  in  whose 
body  there  are  ills".'' 


1  Eb.  47,  18.  2  siut  I,  295.  3  Mar.  Ab.  II,  25. 

*  Prisse  2,  4.         »  Eb.  14,  6. 


0.    WITH    THE    ADJECTIVE    uU.    404.  171 

AA/^A^A 

with  the  meaning  "that  which  is"  is  also  used 
alone,  especially  in  the  idiom  cited  in  §  380. — On 
the  use  of  ntt  to  substantivize  clauses  cf.  S  382.      On 


the  relative  use  of  ^^^  cf.  §  379. 

^   w 


TABLE   OF   SIGNS. 

The  more  important  signs  and  meanings  are  taken  up,  in 
the  order  and  with  the  numbering  current  in  the  list  of  Thein- 
hardt  even  where  this  is  probably  incorrect.  The  phonetic 
values  are  given  as  exactly  as  possible  (distinguishing  between 
d,  d,  t,  t),  but  there  are  many  details  here  which  are  still  uncertain. 
The  feminine  ending  is  separated  from  the  stem. 

The  abbreviations  signify: 
Prop.,  the  proper  meaning  as  an  ideogram  (§§  36 — 39); 
Trfd.,  the  most  frequent  transferred  meaning  (§  40);   it  was  not 

the  intention  to  enumerate  all  the  homophonous  words  for 

which  each  sign  can  be  used. 
Ort.  Com.,  orthographic  compound;   indicates  the  origin  of  the 

sign  by  the  combination  of  two  others. 
Phon.,  the  phonetic  value  as  a  sjllabic  sign  or  as  an  alphabetic 

sign  (§  32-35); 
Det.,  value  as  a  determinative  (§§  45 — 47),  or  the  syllable  which 

the  determinative  always  accompanies  (§  52). 
Abb.,  that  the  determinative   occurs   at  the  abbreviation   of  a 

word  (§  68). 

A.   MEN. 

Det.         supplicate;       sTDet.    high,    rejoice; 

Abb.  f/wi  supplicate,  Abb.    /i    high,     Jj'^ 

Bm  adoration.  rejoice. 

7  ^Det.  hn  to  praise.  10^^  Phon.  in. 


173 


15    jj  Det.  dance. 

19  ^  Det,  to  bow  down; 
Abb.  ks  bow  down. 

27    1     Det.  statue,  mum- 
my ;  Abb.  ^w^statue. 
t=:±3  Det.  mummy. 

29  TO     Prop.  Tvr  great,  sr 
(sir)  prince. 
Det.  old; 
Abb.  i:^w  old. 
Det.    that     which 
demands  strength. 
Prop,  ^ws  build. 

Prop,  kd  build. 

Phon.  As. 

70  l|    Det.  king; 

Abb.  t(y  king. 

71  ^  Det.    child;    Abb. 

^rd  child;  Phon.i^w. 

79  -^i  Det.  enemy,  death; 
Abb.  hft'i  enemy. 

82  ^  Prop.  msC(^)  sold- 
ier; Det.  soldier. 


85 
89 
91 

92 


95 


100 


Det.  captive,  bar- 
barian. 

Det.  man,    1.  ps. 
sing.  (cf.  §  74). 
Det.  that  which  is 

done     with     the 
mouth. 

Det.  rest. 


93  47"^  Det.  hn  to  praise. 

94  ^   Det.  </wi  suppli- 

cate. 

Det.  conceal; 
Abb.  imn  conceal. 
Prop.  ^i/> conceal 

(originated  from 
0  48.) 

101  /^  Prop.  TvCb  priest; 

Tfrd.  TvCb  pure. 

105  y^  Det.toload,build; 

Abb.  ^tp  to  load, 
/i"  carry,  k:$-t 
work. 

106  ^  Prop,    hh    great 
number. 


174 
110 

113 

119 

128 


B.    WOMEN.      C.    GODS. 


Det.  revered  dead 
(masc). 

Det.  revered  per- 
son   (corresponds 
to  A  89). 
Det.  king. 

Pro  p.  5i  shepherd; 


Trfd.     si    watch 
over,  si  break. 

129    M  Det.  revered  dead 

(masc). 
131    ^  Trfd.  sps  glorious 

or  sim. 
133^ Det.  fall; 

Abb.  hr  fall. 


B.  WOMEN. 


7 

9 

12 


4 
11 

27 


15 


Det.woman  (corres- 
ponds to  A  89). 

Det.  revered  dead 
(fern.). 

Trfd.  frJf  existent  at. 


C.  GODS. 

Det.  and  Abb.  JVs-     31 
*V(?)  Osiris.  Qo 

Det.  Abb.  Pth  Ptah. 


^ 


14  }f  Det.  pregnant; 

Abb.  &A-i  pregnant. 


Det,  Abb.7mw  Amon. 
Det.  Abb.  RC  Re. 


55 


Det.  bear; 
Abb.  ms  bear. 


Det.  Abb.  St  Set. 

Det.     Abb.     B/pvt'i 

Thoth. 

Det.      Abb     m^C-t 

goddess   M.,   mi(^-^ 

truth. 


D.    MEMBERS    OF    THE    BODY. 


175 


D.  MEMBERS 
1    ^   Prop,     tp-t    head, 
dMB  head ;  Trfd.  ip 
upon;  Det.  head. 
3    ^  Prop,  ^r  face;  Trfd. 
hr  upon;  Phon.  hr. 
5  ^  Det.  hair,  color,  wsr 
destroyed;  Abb.  In 
hair,wlr  destroyed. 
10  -cs:-  Prop.  wr-?(?)  eye,  mS 
see;   Trfd.  Ir   do; 
Phon.  Ir,  m:^{f). 
12-^^  Det.  eye,  see. 
13:^>=Det.  eye  cosmetic. 
14^^ Det.  weep; 

Abb.  rm  weep. 
Trfd.  Cn  beautiful; 
Phon.  Cn. 

Det.  divine  eye; 
Abb.  jvd^-t  divine 
eye. 

Prop,  ir  pupil  (of 
the  eye) ;  Phon.  ir. 

28  (/p| Prop,  htit  nose; 

F5  ^  J  iibtr.  ?}nt  in  front; 


15 


17 


I 


OP  THE  BODY. 

Det.  nose,    breath 

(cf.  T  26  and  F  4); 

Abb.  fnd  nose. 

29<==>Prop.  r^(-^.)  mouth; 

Phon.  rS{'^),  r. 

31    ^."n^Prop.s/?^ 

lip; 

N28/'=^Prop.si?r 

Confusion 

rib; 

■     with 

Trfd.si?r 

N  30. 

arrive 

at. 

33/^  Det.    that    which 
flows  from  the  body. 

35    \    Trfd.  mdw  speak. 

37  >^  Det.  the  back,  cut 

up; 

Abb.  i^-t  back. 

39   ^  Det. breast,  nurse; 

Abb.  mnC-t  nurse. 

40  (   )  Prop.  s$« embrace; 

Trfd.  slm   happen; 

Det.  embrace,  jo^i. 

42  A  Variant  of  D  47. 

176 


D.    MEMBERS    OF    THE    BODY. 


46  U  Prop.  A'i,  kind  of 

spirit ;  Phon.  k^. 

47  _/u.  Prop,   n  (tin)   not, 

irvt'i    not    having; 
Phon.  n  (nn) ; 
Det.  negation. 

I  Trfd.rfsr  splendid 
or  sim. 


49  \=^ 
51^ 


Prop,  hn  to  row; 
Phon.  hn. 

52  Q/^  Prop,  c/ii  to   com- 
bat; Phon.  ai. 

58  hr^  Prop.  $w  reign. 

59^^ DProp.<^arm,</«'give; 

Phon.  C;  Det.  that 
which  demands 
strength  (=D69), 
(=  D  63). 

62 /—^  Prop,  w^ ell, 
rmn  arm ; 
Trfd.  rmn 
carry;  Det. 
arm,  that 
which  is 
done  with 
the  arm. 


Con- 

fus- 

>  ion 

with 

H  17. 


63  a nProp.  di  give,  mc 

give  (imp\>.). 

65-0 — oProp.  mi  give 
(impv.). 

66  Q oProp.  hnk  to  pre- 
sent. 

69L=/]Det.  that  which 
demands  strength; 
Abb.  nht  strong. 

72  ^^ ^  Prop,  hrp  to  lead. 

76 c:^^ Prop,  d-t  hand; 

82  ti)   Det.  fist,  grasp ; 
Abb.  im  grasp. 

84  ^  ]  Prop.  ^&c  finger  (cf. 
T  1); 

Tfrd.  dbc  10,000. 
Det.  middle,    cor- 
rect, mtr ;  Abk.  c/cS 
correct,  w^r  middle, 
witness. 

90  ('==0)  Prop.  b:^h  phallus ; 
Phon.  mt;  Det.  mas-, 
culine ;  Abb.^imas 
culine,  kS  steer 

93  "fl^  Incorrect  for  T  20, 
Q  12. 


ii: 


I 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


17* 


Second  Part. 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe  ( 


TW^ 


S^-nht). 

Published 


(Epic  poem  of  the  middle  empire   in  the  archaic  language, 
L.  D.  VI,  104  seq.) 

I.  (11.  12 — 34.)  Sinuhe,  a  man  of  high  position  at  the  court  of 
Amen-em-he't  I.  (c.  2100  B.  «J.),  while  on  a  campaign  against  the 
Libyans,  learns  the  death  of  his  king;  this  news,  for  unknown 
reasons,  so  terrifies  him  that  he  immediately  seeks  flight  to 
Palestine. 


o. 


IP^^, 


^   I 


AA/WA/» 

■1   I  L 


^  3J  r  A^AAA^-| 

AA/WA/»    I         


] 


N.P 


X 


T 


(I  passed  by  the  red  mountain.) 

h 


© 


^^ 


^1z!iOM,M  H^-«P-r 


a  „by  means  of"  or  sim.  is  wanting,  b  the  peculiar  ending 
is  explained  by  the  coming  together  of  the  dual  ending  and  the 
suffix  1  sg.  c  Name  of  a  fortification  on  the  isthmus  of  Suez. 
hk^  is  written  defectively  in  this  old  name. 

Erraan,  Eg^pt.  gramm.  Bb 


18*  From  the  Story  of  Sinube. 


CSI 


^?.?,?Q^  ilSl.^?P 


cy 


1"^ 


^^AAAAAA    □     ^ 


(At  the 


r^^^ 


r\^''v/1  Km-wr  I  fell  down  for  thirst.) 

330,2  286  d 


D  ^ 


AAAAAA    [ 


I « ■ ' ' «  t      1 1 1 1 1 1  t 


/VWAAA   /VWAAA 


^ 


^kl-¥Pfl.l,^,    P^ 


AA/W\A   VS\ 


l^f^ 


^:.^ 


>  A/VV\AA  AA/VWA  AA/VAAA 
J]  '^^^a —       HI       AAAAftA 


a  poetic  for  „I  concealed  myself".  &  the  sentries,  e  con- 
strued as  if  it  were  fem.  referring  to  a  collective  „the  guard**. 
d  like  our  vulgar  „pull  one's  self  together",  or  „gather  one's  self". 
e  p^  like  a  noun,  in  apposition  with  mtn. 


I 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


1  C^  A^^AAA  1  I 


19=^ 


.^ 


I  I  I 


A 


rv^^^ 


-H AA/\AAA 


A 


r^^^ 


AAAAAA   \\  I       W 


AA/^AA^  Q 


f^^^^^ 


/-^ — 1^ 


^ 


I    W    J 

f 


p"j^|    AAAAAA 

o    I  I  1 


i:=^¥ 


O  f\rAfiAf\  . 


27.    (II.  78 — 94.)    Sinuhe,  heaped  with  benefits  by  the  prince  of 
Tntc,  lives  manj'  years  with  him. 


'\m 


AAAAA/V 


a  perhaps  to  be  corrected  „he  cooked  for  me",  b  read  whwt. 
c  cancel  r  in  irtnsn  according  to  151.  d  „a  half  year"?  „a  year  and 
a  half"?  e  probably  „thou  art  prosperous  with  me"; 80.330.  /"  125  B. 


20* 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


I    D  ^^=i=.® 


ro\ 


I  A/w^A^ 


X    31 


£1^     ilii      I 


S      I 


\J        AAA/W\ 


^^-^J 


0    I   I   I 


^K\^     I 


^1 

:=>       III         I  o   1^^^ 


(C^      O  O    O         Awv\^  ■ 


.^1- 


1  I «  I  I t  I        I  I  t  I  11  I 


'5^ 


(He  also  made  me  prince  of  a  tribe.) 

f^^^r^^   -2x   jf\  I  1  .M:^#  1    O   III  ID 

[J  -fv  n      n=^-=>-i   □   a       la.     □ 


I  \\  I 


^?  lYI^fl 


^    I 
#  tk  -n- 


IfV^ 

I 


a  the  determinative  applies  to  tlie  entire  expression.  6  125B 
tvnt  refers  to  the  land,    c  The  determinatives  of  d^b  can  not  be 
read  with  certainty  in  the  hieratic. 


J 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


21=* 


(By  means  of  the  hunt  I  also  gained  a  great  deal.) 


.f\        .<T:r>.  AAAA.NA 


^W\    fl 


'::^l 


111^  <zz 


C^  AAAAAA    ifLL      I         I       I 

AAAAAA  @ 


^^K 


III 


I       I       I 


1"^^^I1M?!4 


III.  (11.  109 — 145.)    Sinuhe  defeats  a  hero  in  single  combat. 

—Zi.  ^-^  -'"~  O       Jj    iljL  /VSAAAA        JL      ' 


A/NAAAA 
AAAAA^   _  /    C>  n    AA/\AAA 


^^^ — n^^  B  n 

^         —    AAAAAA   O    "fV   ^^ 


AA/\AAA   AAAAA/\ 


^ 


(I  accepted  the  challenge  and  prepared  my  weapons.) 

210 

AA/VW\ 


s:     I 


°^]^--]^^^    ^J: 


a  the  word  is  Avanting  in  the  manuscript,     b  sell.  Jq^r,  351. 
c  the  land  of  Tmv,  cf.  98. 


22* 


From  the  Storj'  of  Sinuhe. 


/W^AAA  I  I  ! 


I 
olio 


242,3 


78 

a 


1 


-0. 
I 


(He  seized  his  weapons  and  the  combat  began.) 


^ 


Q 


(J 


.  AA/\AAA         V  J^ 


D^ 


I  I  I 


3X       I  OO 


e 

R5         A^/v\AA  n      n  /^  Ann  iO    A^^^AA  ^  AA/'AA^ 


^ 


1 


a 


(I  stepped  upon  his  neck.) 


I 


0 


a  like  a  relative,  397.  b  m  lit  probably  as  an  adverb  „there- 
after".  c  inexact  s  cf.  22. 161.  d  a  verb  is  probablj'  wanting:  „[they 
fell  to]  the  ground  useless",    e  he  shoots  him  therefore  from  behind. 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


23" 


)  O  []  &  AAAAAA 

^  Vfii Q  ^\         AAAAAA  \^  I       \\ 

ifLL    AA/VV>A  WV^  AA/VNAA  AAAAAA 


y^^ 


0"^  f~"l 


©  -^ 


zd 


n  f I r*  I         I  t I  I  I  I  t 

AA^SAAA  A^\^>A 

A/VWAA 


AA^NAAA  J  J  ^AAAAA   r    i     I      I      1 

I      I      I  -^    /^  ^     AAA/v^A 


r 


1'  2^^=^     iC:^ 

/^>        AAAAAA  AAAAAA 

a   "^  ^o 


JF.  (Z.  241 — 257,)  As  an  old  man  Sinuhe-receives  from  King  TT^i 
tsn  I.  the  permission  to  return  home  and  goes  to  Egypt. 


A  i^  AAAAAA    Cli.        I      _C 


Ml 


Mm%. 


168 
O         ®      U        Ji  QaaaJ. 


AAAAAA 


fl  AAAAAA 


^ 


7\         m 


^  o 


A 


I     1  2lM  I  I 
a  the  people  of  the  dead  man.    b  emphasis,  344. 


[13 


a^ 


I  I  I 


24*  From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 

305 

a  h 

/J   AAAAAA  TV  (9      r\ 

(He  goes  further  to  the  city  of  the  king.) 

4 

AAAAAA  H—  lira  /^v 


>Ti^^ 


(I  trod  the  palace.) 

in  I  1  u  D 


crzD 


J] 


1       £1^      2ti     I    Ci 
261 


IJ^fJ, 


f^miT] 


III 


,^^ 


I 


MkJ^^i^-1 


a  „Tvho  had  followed  me,  while  they  led  me",  b  he  presents 
them,  c  Impersonal;  one  expects  r  l^§.  d  indicates  the  action  of 
the  people  who  lead  him  forth,  e  Nominal  sentence,  f  old  writing 
according  to  109.    f  the  order  of  words  is  free  according  to  341. 


I 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuho. 


25* 


(then  terror  seized  me) 


^±!^^  ^-rk^^-^PflT'^l 


I  I  1 


Zl-'W  QkM< 


V.  (Z.  263 — 269.)    The  king  presents  Sinuhe  to  the  queen, 


a 

A 


-a  AAAAAA 


^ 


ra 


J\ 


IHf'^l,^,  ^ 


\ 


X 


Jl^ 


^^ 


o 


I  1  I 


<-^ 


I  I 


6 
"I 


c^O     I 


I    I    I 


AA/WW 


o  \ 


AA/WW 

o   D 


f^^"^ 


;p 


AAAAAA 
AAAAAA 

I   I   I 

AAAAAA 


I   I   I  I   1  I   I 
I 


a  Perhaps  relative  sentence:  „as  an  Cim  whom  the  S.  made". 
b  hieratic  sign  of  unknown  meaning.  c  i.  e.  „altogether". 
(I  for  they  had  hrought  them  with  them,  e  „m  their  hands"? 
cf.  312.  76. 

Bb* 


26* 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 


YI.  {Z.  279 — 310.)     At  the  intercession  of  the  queen,  Sinuhe  is 
pardoned  and  concludes  his  life  at  the  court  in  great  prosperity. 


"1  ^ ! 

t-=^^  \    AAAAAA   A 


f?^^t&-"&^P-^l>, 


h 


-•  -*      A/VWVv  " 
I     I     I    I     I      I 

sic 


9 


^ 


Jl  ,     w 


I    I    I 


\^ 


r  ^ 


286 


I    I    i 


A  A/WV\A 
I     1      I 


X  fl  AAAAAA 

I     o 

o 

W 


\  W 


mrrA 


A 


.C\    \\    j^  t\N\N\f\ 


(and  there  were  other  good  things  therein) 


CTT]       [Z-ZJ 


^     I       Ollll^  AAAAAA^  l^^^_^ffi.¥. 


^liin  c^ 


X    r-^ 

%^]  111 


a  for  mm  315.  h  passive,  c  read  <=>  ?  d  329  as  accom- 
panying circumstance,  e  read  «t  and  Cxc'i,  f  read  mrrf?  „P. 
whom  the  king  loves"?    g  „they  caused"  (impersonal  „they".) 


From  the  Story  of  Sinuhe.  27* 


^'-%^r"i^ 


1-35-1  o        — »_~»3 ji 


I'm      ^51 

°        n  ^  -^ 
111      Tl^jr 

(and  there  was  built  for  me  my  own  house) 

e 

A^AftAA  AAAAAA 


IS    -Pk  n    A^AftAA  AAAAAA  -<T1  n 


ra  tko 


±1- 0 


A/^WAA  AAAAAA 


ii_a^t^cr=i 


f 

a  „they  gave";  the  sense  is,  „the  dirt  etc.  I  now  resigned 
to  the  desert",  b  i.  e.  the  coarse  ones,  c  upon  which  I  had 
hitherto  slept,  in  contrast  with  hnkyt.  d  in  contrast  with  tptl; 
read  nt.    e  passive,   f  read  hw8. 


28* 


^^r 


Prom  the  Story  of  Sinuhe. 
(it  was  furnished  with  the  best) 


J] 


AAAA/Vv    A    (^ 


>A 


ra 


/n 


0        if^^ 


.F^^ 


'^^^ 


I   AAAAAA 
I 


1 


From  the  Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 

(Prose  text  of  the  middle  empire  in  language  not  so  markedly  archaic; 
only  the  speeches  of  the  peasant  are  poetic.    Published  LD  VI  108  seq.; 

the  beginning  by  Griffith,  Proc.  Soc.  Bibl.  Archaeol.  1892.) 
Content:    a  Peasant  who   complains  of    an  injustice    done  him,  before 
Mrwitns'i  a  prince  of  Herakleopolis,    so   charms  the  latter  by  his   elo- 
quence,  that,   with   the  King's   assent  he  prolongs  the   peasant's  affair 
in  order  thus  to  prompt  him  to  further  discourse. 

I.  (Butler  2 — 13.)    An  inferior  official  meets  the  peasant  as  he 
journeys    toward    Herakleopolis,    and    desires    to    rob    him    of 

his  ass. 


l^-\ 


f 


I  o\\ 


s 


^ 


a  which  he  needs  for  his  grave,  h  the  statue;  passive,  c  one 
expects  the  plural.    <?  50  B.    e  read  <--^->  A      f  ^^ead 


m 


Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


29* 


J\ 


't3. 


i.    AAAAA/" 


AAA/V\A    I        VS 


D 

AAAAAA 


AAAAAA 
f 


I  I  I  I    I 


^i— MC 


0V>,  ,, ^jos^^ 


AAAAAA 
^  .    < 


°  [It'] 


JJ.  (Butler  13 — 19.)    The  official  plans  a  stratagem  for  him. 

L^  J   I  2^^=>_  I  I    W      ii    ^  A.VWVA      I         q?     S         I  I 


^\f]\ 


,%5 


^X32_ 


^     ^li         m        AAAAAA 

n  '"i       AAAA^W 

.^ 0    I      <:        J>  AAAAAA 


a  a  hieratic  sign  of  unknown  meaning.  5  the  name  of  the 
man  is  wanting,  c  i.  e.  one  of  the  peasantry,  d  temporal  clause. 
e  the  asses  which  pleased  him  or  sim.  f  here  he  hegins  direct 
discourse.  The  following  is  probably  an  elliptical  oath:  may  every 
excellent  image  [of  a  god]  ....  for  me  I"  g  The  situation  must 
be:  a  narrow  road;  on  one  side  water,  on  the  other,  upper  side 
a  field,    h  „his  one  way"  i.  e.  probably  „one  edge  of  the  road". 


30* 


Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


D  3 

AV\A/^A  ^ 

I  I  AAA^A^ 

I    III 


w 


c_J.  I  J  J  r\N\/-Af\  i-LL    Id—a 


>^. 


"7:\ 


A^A^A^  I     \\    I 


(and  spreads  out  the  clothes  in  the  way.) 


HI.  (Butler  22—23;  Berliner  Papyrus  Z.  1—24.)    The  peasant  is 
robbed  and  derided. 


I     I     I      O  .r^ 


\ 


D         ^ 


njkT 


D 

AAAAAA 
1.^ 


D 
A/V/VAAA 


w 

AAAA^^  I      (T^  I    I    I  y^\ 

I     \\i 


I 1    /^         .^  AAAAAA 


A^^AA^ 

^^     D 

Y\    r  .1     AAAA/^A 


Ci        I 


0  <II>  L  _£!>*V^  J   AAAAAA  I 


a  passive,  b  the  middle  of  the  road,    c  „have  a  care"  or  sim. 
is  wanting,    d  „[Take  care]  my  fruit  is  on  (<=>)  the  road". 


I  I 


Storj'  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 
a 

■^.    Q  n        ®        AAAAAA  35  "ft  \oJ    ra 

M+i  (I  AAAAAA  /I  ^^'^T[      ^^ 


<__^->     Till  '  ^  AA/^A^^ 

JIT. 


M 


I  I  I 


I  I  1 1  ^   I 


w 


'=^ 


^ 


^5=^  I    I    I 


AAAftAA  r      '-      i 


31* 
I  I   I 


X 


i^^v) 


IW-^ZK  ^q 


r'=^ 


h 


L  AA^^AA 


0  C >  _iir^  AAAAAA      I 


X 


X 


^.xn2_ 


AA/\AAA 


1 1 1 

JL       AAAA/' 


o     I 


J 


^^1 


a  [The  lower  part  of  the  road  is]  under  water,  b  „Wil] 
you  not  let  us  pass  by  then!"  e  meaning  something  like:  since 
one  [lower  path]  is  obstructed,  I  will  go  along  its  [upper]  edge. 
d  read  mhM 


I 


32* 


Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


I— H- 1     ^ 

O  W  AAAAAA 
AAAAAA         TTT 


/vvvvv> 


n 


[TZ] 


W    Ci 


W 


^^' 


D 

AAAAAA 


'^' 


.^^ 


.^^5>^/ 


^V 


lO    V>  AAAAVV 

/'    AAAAAA  A 


S1fc,t 


Jl      O      I    I    I 


I  AAA/VNA   AAAAAA 


^^q-^' 


sio 


AAAAAA 


353 

AAAAAA    ra 


C 


1<^ 


^^=11) 


tl 


I      I      I 


354 


JF.  (ib.  Z.  24 — 32.)     The  peasant  implores  the  official  in  vain.     ■ 

f      _  * 


AAAAAA  AAAAAA 


A\ 


a  relative  belonging  to  Jin.  h  probably  a  proverb:  instead 
of  the  poor  man  one  makes  mention  of  his  lord,  c  meaning: 
though  you  should  address  me,  you  think  first  of  my  lord. 
d  the  tamarisk  was  not  dry ;  rf  is  probably  corrupt,  e  read  the 
n-form.    e  peculiar  infinitive. 


story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


33* 


^^ 


c:.l\\ 


D 


3\\ 


jr  ^1 1  I  < 


s 


n 

/^AAAA^ 
I     I     1    ^ 


.- flf 


^fl 


AAAAAA    Q^ 


A  AAA/V\A  /I 


2^  A/V\AAA  f^    (^ 


I      I      I 

J] 


.<E>- 


Mil 


ra  Ik  o    @ 

;=:>Jrilll       I 


v^A^ 


•  AAAAAA 


lo  \ 


f 


F.  (ib.  Z.  32—42).  The  peasant  goes  to  the  prince  and  relates  to 
him  his  matter. 

3    V^    y^'   AAAAA> 


[3III 


a  „yoa  are  to"  for  „you  go  to",  b  in  the  place  of  the  god 
of  the  dead  one  must  not  make  noise,  c  perhaps  an  invocation, 
to  be  connected  with  the  following,  d  182,  the  meaning  of  the 
sentence  is  not  clear,     e  probably  error  for  O  or  O.    f  against 

the  injustice. 

Erman,  Egfypt  gpramm.  "  Qq 


34* 


story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant 


kZ^^! 


A. 


h' 


Ol 


ra^^_y^<=>^^^ 


A\ 


>j^i^ 


I 


AAAAAA 


W) 


a 


.  AA^^^A  £^ ) 


I  I 


\V\AA  I     U      O     SAj  AAAAAA  ■ 


^ 


FJ.  (ib.  Z.  42—51.)    The  prince  questions  his  counsellors. 


AA/^/yA^  AAAA^^ 


/CilW 


/\A/v/\AA 


P^^^,^ 


[J  AA/NAAA       1 


/WW\A  AAAAAA 

I    I    I  5*L=_ 


o  As  the  prince  desires  to  sail  away  the  peasant  would  not 
detain  him.  6  they  mean:  it  is  probably  a  peasant  suhject  to 
him,  who  unlawfully   desired  to  deliver  his  taxdues  to  another. 


story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


35* 


AAAAAA 


D 


III 

^      AAAAAA  ^ 

I     I      I  O       .-^-^   I      I      1 


,^,(i:t:  j^\ 


^p 


■<2>- 


A  AA/^AA^      ^  H ^ 

a 

/-X  AAAA/> 

I  ra 


I  I  1 1 1 


AAAAAA  '5ffY^^^i2i 


a  ra 


P--J 


X 


w 


D 

A/WAAA 


^^ 


FIT.  (ib.  Z.  52—71.)    The  first  complaint  of  the  peasant. 


—ill        AA/^AA^  I  C—J.  r-"^^  \ 


Ezm 


a  Sense  probably,  he  must  pay  this  as  a  fine;  or,  he  should 
be  punished  because  of  the  natron  etc.  (with  which  the  asses  were 
loaded)?     b  His  reply  is  not  given. 


36* 


Story  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


(Thou  wilt  be  fortunate  in  everj-thing) 


1  ^^^== —  CLL  AA/^^^^  V 


(■==11) 


.X  "  J)     9 


AAAAA\ 
6 


I        S  A/VVV\A 


in  D 


i: 


I  wvV    77  -^  -"  icl  I    _Z1  WxS       AAA^w  I 


J]  I 


'0\ 


m. 


^  sic         g 


kA/WvAA 
ra 


o  read  nif.  6  treat  me  so  justly  that  I  shall  prefer  thy 
name  to  aU  laws,  c  imperative,  d  imperative,  e  imperative,  f  '^ 
is  wanting,  g  sense  is  probably,  prove,  how  much  I  have  to  bear. 


I 


Storj'  of  the  Eloquent  Peasant. 


37* 


YIII.  (ib.  Z.  71 — 77.)    The  prince  announces  it  to  the  King, 
W 


sic 


.7^' 


-<2=- 


W     ^ 


w 


^-  -M  ^^^^¥--1 


A   AAAftAA  /' 


ioV\ 


- fl 


I  I  I 


V. 


Supplement. 

A  writing  of  Thutmosis  I.  to  the  Authorities  in  Elephantine. 

(Stone  in  the  Cairo  Museum.    Published  Aeg.  Ztsch.  29, 117  from  a  copy 
of  Heinrich  Brugscb.) 

I.  Announcement  of  the  coronation.    (The  king  writes  to  you) 


© 


0^  o 

78 


mn^i.-m^i 


O      1      -J1         AA^w^  O  UL 


AAAAAA     n  Q  ^      w 

^^^^  ®  Jx  I  I  I 


AA^/^A^  O     /T       >\ 

II.  The  titulary  of  the  new  ruler 

AAAAAA 


U^ 


c:^ 


M 


a  passive,    b  sense  optative. 


^ 


A  writing  of  Thutmosis  I. 


o 

H  I  I 


Jfffp^^-^ 


1 


III.  What  name  is  to  be  used  in  the  cult. 


1  c±f=]^ — Ji        - — a   I 


o  n  I  I  1 


mnm 


MPhih^fip  mi^i 


IV.  What  name  is  to  be  used  in  taking  oath. 


^AW^filw       in 


f 


/O       ^^  n     AAAAAA    f\  AAAAAA 


h  MP  J 11 

F.  Concluding  formula, 
d  e  f 


£^  £Ii    T  AAAAAA 


a  read  Q.  5  lit.  „cause  that  one  cause  that  the  oath 
remain",  c  259,  2  passive,  defectively  written,  d  formula  of 
correspondence  for  „this  writing  purposes",  e  that  which  is 
communicated,    f  likewise  further  that  etc. 


J 


Examples  of  the  Eoj^al  Titularies. 
VI.  Date. 


onni    ^^^'i'—^O® 


39* 


s 


\rT,k 


Examples  of  the  Royal  Titularies. 

(Written    in    abbreviations    throughout;    for   explanation  compare   the 
titulary  fully  written  out  in  the  preceding  letter.) 

I.  Wsrtsn  I.    (Lepsius,  Konigbucla  177). 


"^^^l 


V a 


TTmrr 


11   n 


f5SS^ 


Q 


IL  Thutmosis  HI.  (ib.  349) 


n 


0| 

I  = 


s  III  O 

1%  ^ 


^ 


^ 


Iaaaaaa 


o 


-3 


>d2 


□  o 


40* 


\ 0 


M 


r — I 


o  III 


o  III 


Examples  of  QTave-formulae. 
lU.  Ramses  11.  (ib.  420). 

4 

o 


o 


ffl 


Examples  of  Grave-formulae. 

(Filled  with  abbreviations  throughout,  and  often  in  barbarous  orthography) . 
I.  The  sacrificial  formula.    (Gravestone  in  Alnwick  Castle). 


llLi 


\M^U'^  f^A 


v-i^_-^  ^Al>i3^' 


z2i  Di  I  T 


AlH^ilfJe    AP-oTs^^ 


^£7 


:::ii  ^Jrj.f.l^k  -^f^l 


jr.  The  same  in  another  form.    (Gravestone  in  Florence). 
a  unintelligible  formula,    b  optative,    c  relative  clause. 


291     _  291  291 

'     Q  AAAAAA   Q    _  1}  AAAAAA 

^AAAAAA   0  /WWV\ 

£Ii       A        D        AAAAAA 


Examples  of  Grave-formulae.  41* 

291  291 

— ^U  —  f)  ^l^f^^ — ^fliri'^Pjl 

a 

M  -CaS-     O    AAAAAA  /  I 

I  AAAAAA  JJ  'Vir:- —  «3=a 

7ZZ.  The  same,  shorter  (Gravestone  in  Turin). 
IV.  Invocation  to  the  visitors  to  the  grave  (LD  II,  122). 

— fl  1  A^AAAA     1    1 

V.  The  same,  in  different  form  (RIH  16). 

391 

_Cr^'^~~— -*  AAAA^V*       I       AAAAAA  W  c^>  \  AAAAAA  JS  _Hr^    0  "^ ^  C^     Dill 


I 


a  259,  2,  passive  defectively  written,  b  259,  2  active,  plural. 
c  Impv.  d.  the  pronouncing  of  this  formula  procures  the  deceased 
nourishment. 

Cc* 


GLOSSARY. 

PREFATORY  NOTES. 

The  correct  orthography  occupies  the  first  place;  abbr.  designates 
a  writing  as  an  abbreviation  in  accordance  with  §§  63 — 68; 
arch,  as  archaic. 

Compound  words  are  to  be  found  under  the  first  part  of  the  compound. 

The  endings  are  separated  by  -,  and  are  not  taken  into  considera- 
tion in  the  alphabetic  arrangement. 

To  a  considerable  extent  the  meanings  can  be  only  approximately 
determined;  to  such  tcords,  or  sim.    has  been  added. 

The  meaning  of  the  causative  has  been  subjoined,  only  where  it 
does  not  entirely  correspond  to  that  of  the  simple  stem. —  The 
construction  of  the  verb  has  been  added  by  CO. — The  §§  cited 
refer  to  the  grammar.  With  proper  names  n.  I.  denotes  the 
name  of  a  place,  n.  pr.  m.  that  of  a  man,  n.  pr.  f.  that  of 
a  woman. 


i6- 


fj 

u 


^Q  (§  48,  for  ^) 
\       hour. 

cease,  or  sim. 


n.    1.    Ele- 


f^^^  phantine. 
9b-dw  T  1    ^    n.  1.  Abydos, 


goose  (abbr. 


roast. 


perish, 
(abbr,)  to  load. 


Sd 


angry? 


43* 

to   outrage?    be 


0! 


/ij? 


Ay^  (§  160)  come, 

^n.l. 

1 


branch, 
orsim. 
(Ill  ae  gem.) 
grow  old. 


iSr-t 


— ^^        frait, 
c^  III  orsim. 

\  (cc.  n)  call. 
J  someone, 
to  be.   (§  168.  220. 
224.  246.  253  f.) 
/\'t^(§  160;  cc.n)  walk, 
come  to  anyone. 

t^  t^  (§  378. 379)  he 
who  has  not. 


ilV 

iw 
iwt-i 


twt-t    '        ^^^^(§380)  nothing. 


ih         V"  heart. 


(§  64A)  meat. 


Ibdw     --c?^  (abbr.)  month. 

D 


tfd    I] 


count. 


2^^^ 


§  307 


chest. 


w 


im-i      -\\-W  (arch.ij- 


-§135) 


existent  in. 

tmBm   \\ ^'^  ^^^1;^^;        (§29. 

157)  tent. 


ImBh    fl  "^    (abbr.         '') 

venerableness. 

§  100)  honored  (cc.  hr: 
by  anyone). 

182  B.)  give,  set,  cause. 
^mn      \\  M    (abbr.    ||) 

Amon. 


44* 


imn-y  If^^Nl  n.  pr.  m.  (§  100). 

tmn'fi  ft      existent  in  the  west; 
I'W 
hnti  tmnt'iw  "he  who  is  at 

the  head  of  the  dwellers 

in  the  west,    (i.  e.   the 

dead)". 


Imn-tt 
Imr-w 

in 

in-t 

in 

inwk 

inb 

inr 

ins-t 

intf 

Ir 

yr'i 


/CiO 


s     I 


(§  137)  the  west. 


deaf,   or 
sim. 

§  314.  350.  357. 


Sim. 


AAAAAA 

AA/V\AA  I 


kind  of 
fish. 

Jj      (§  160)    bring   on 

or  near;   bring    thither, 
lead  away. 


0 


(abbr.)  wall. 


n        nnni  stone. 

1    AAAAAA   I  J>     Sim. 

WAAA 

'^     n.  pr.  m.  et  f. 
:>  §  347.  348.  389 


1 


IT  '1 


§  135)  belonging  to;  irt 


irt-t 

ih 
ih-w 

ih 
ih-t 

ihil) 

ih-tO) 

ihf 


that  which  pertains  to 
any  one,  his  duty. 
.<2>-  (Illae.  inf.  §  151) 
make,  beget ;  spend  time  ; 
to  be.  aux.  verb:  §  238. 
239. 

'0      . 


1 


D    III 


1  o  o  1 1 1     V  1  Oi  iC^i     y 
milk. 

"^^  (abbr.)  ox  cf.  Ari. 

IX  Jl    ^^mentalin- 
firmity  or  sim. 


I  I  I 


^§64^ 


thing. 


shine,  be  ex- 


I 


celleut  or  sim. 

that  which  is 
brilliant,    ex- 


cellent or  sim. 


HAAAAAA       inundat- 
^^.1= —  AAAAAA     I 

ed  land,  or  sim. 


§  319. 
~]T'  J\  hasten. 


Tama- 
risk. 


! 


46* 


issl       (I  1  I  (I  n.  pr.  m 
c^  §  323. 


tstw 

ckr 

It 


100) 
pr.m. 


\ 


excellent  or  aim; 
J  be  excellent. 

■^^  barley. 

o  o  o 

M7i  (§  31)  father; 
It  ntr  kind  of  priest. 


%(•)  J1  king  or  sim. 

itf        cf.  it. 
ctn-w    1 1 


H 


DY\^^(CC.»H) 

refractory    toward,     or 
sim. 
itl  Ifi  °-jj-'r-       n    take    away; 
spend  (time). 


Itn 


O  sun. 


(Dual 
-fl'tkw 


)  arm. 

Ar-C,  hr-Cw'i  immedia- 
tely; 
tpiw  Cw'i  ancestors. 

(^-t  Q.  member. 

c^  \ 

C-t  chamber,    small 

on 
house  (as  part  of  j3r). 

^^  ^^."^{Icabbr.^^, 


o=>)  great,  large. 
CS-hpr-  ^  t  ^  k     g 


Thutmosis'  I. 


Ci.fei.«_^  up  I  n.pr.f. 


rj  "Sn- — ^   strike    or 
a  _M^        sim. 

ass. 

Ar)  to  please? 

uninjured,  or  sim 


ca 

CCb 


Bedouin    or 
sim. 


/I  V\2i   *^^    °'^*>    °^ 
-fl  1  ^   sim. 


J^- 


braid? 


comb? 


*46 


GLOSSARY. 


Cw-t 
CwB 

CwB 
Cwn 

Cb9 

Cff 

Cm-mw'i- 
nn-Si 

Cnh 


Y 


animals. 


"Kv         )  rob,  plunder. 

f[    _M-       Si  ber. 
J]  Cwn- lb 


AAAAAA 

deceitfulness,  or  sim. 

JA^ sacrifici- 
Y  al  tablet. 

fly,  or  sim. 


AAA/VNA  A^^AAA 


n.  pr.  m. 

(§  70). 


HI 

p)     AA/\AAA  p) 

T  •    '"'''■  T'^ 

live  (cc.  m  on  anything). 

-?-(  n  abbr.   Cnh  wd^ 

snb :  "living,  sound, 
healthy"  (as  adjunct  to 
royal  name). 


Crr-1/t  <=^[ll  pa- 

lace or  sim. 

CU  Q£l^  to  contend. 

Ch9  Q^^  a  combat. 

Ch^-w  [Kx 
ChC 


arrow,  or 
sim. 


oath. 

® 


Cnh 

Cnttw 

Cr 


■V-^  ear. 


O 


myrrh, 
goat,  or  sim. 


ChC-w 
ChC-w 

ChC 
ChC 


. — J  stand. 

J\  ChCn  §  230  ff. 

a 

Tk   Q  time,  or  sim. 

:^=i  (pi.)   quan- 


1   1   I  tity,number. 


or  Sim. 


^^1 


kind  of  ship. 


nru 


palace. 


Chn-wtl a  5^  d'^'II 

AAAAAA        _Z1     U 
X  AA/WV   Ol     U 

§  109  )  royal  chamber. 


Ck-w 


A 


numerous, 
I   many. 

enter. 

CZD      Plur.: 
I   I   1         food. 


CHiOeSART. 


47* 


w 


\ 


wB 


tvS-t 


w^-wt- 
Er 


U'^h-'i 

w^s-t 

wBd 
w^dic 


I  (sic,  contrary  to  § 
S51)  districtjOrsim, 

Pf]^4^    (abbr. 
<C  _  f)  caus.  cc.  hr  pass 


by  something. 


f] 


^     I 


=5= 
)  way,  road. 


(abbr. 


I  I  I 


.)n.,. 


^       abbr 
I  I   I 

)  to  increase;   caus. 
sw^h  to  visit,  or  aim. 


fl 


nrz2 

chamber  in  the  palace. 

1  %^^  ^^  ^^^  *^®^°" 
i,  _zr  late,  or  sim. 

flm  III  ^""^' 

to  praise,  or  sim. 

green. 

o 
green  cosmetic. 


wC 

wC 

wCb 
wCb 
wCf 


wp-tvt 


§  80. 


<^^ 


abbr.  |)  (§  116)  one  (as 
subst.). 

(§  143)  one  (as  adj.). 


pure,  clean. 


5 


I    (^    to  bend, 
\>=/l  or  sim. 

I        household 


servant,  cook. 
wp-w^wtX/^:^     J^=^  (abbr. 


message. 


^:^) 


god  of  the  dead. 


name  of  a 


wf^ 


)  praise, 


applause,  or  sim. 


Jl  L__J  or  sim. 
wn  ^^  (Ilae  gem.)  to  be : 

AftAA/V\  ' 

aux.  verb.  §  223.  250  sq. 


48* 


QLOSSABT. 


41-^  (for  -f 


ton)  e^t. 
lontc-f    -^^^      "jlc  hour. 

AAAAAA  <0 

twiw-f   -^^     i<:  S       lay 

priesthood,  or  sim. 
t^nn-nfr^l"^^     name 


AAA'VSA 

of  Osiris. 


magnate. 
,   in  titles 


wrh 

tvrS 
lord 


also    !^)  great. 

anoint. 

■^_fC=3a    spend    the 


>o 


day. 

to  rest,  or 
sim. 


Bedouin  tribe. 


§     100) 


w8-ir 
wsm 


IrO)  jj 

1 


Osiris. 


wsr 


F«^   silver- gold 
o  1 1 1  alloy. 

I  (abbr.)  strong,  or  sim. 


wsr 
mXt-BC 

wsrtsn 

wsh 

w§C 


p.-^"    p  (abbr.)      name 
m  of  Bamses  II. 


^^' 


di       AAAAAA 


n.  pr.m. 


broad. 


dSSU. 


to 

answer. 


wdn 

wd 

wdB 


\>  bite,  or  sim. 
also  of  itching. 
wih         W^  J  X 

weakness,  indolence,  or 
sim. 

^^^^^     (niae    inf.) 
X 
throw,  (also  of  emission 

of  a  cry). 

Jl /wvAAAvli       or  Sim. 
(§57  Illae   inf.) 
command. 

(abbr.   I) 

_  _  _       _  cHj 

be  well,  be  fortunate; 
8wd^  lb  hr  to  rejoice  the 
heart  concerning  some- 
thing, polite  phrase  for 
communicating  some- 
thing. 

go. 

forsaken 
one?? 


wdB 
wdC-t 


a°i 


I 


GLOSSARY. 


49* 


J 


J 


h^-t  W  (^^^  VC\       branch,   |   htn 

or  Sim.,  thicket,  orsim.       ^j^  ^^^  jj^ 

hole. 


hBh 

bi-t 
bt-ti 


(abbr.      |     )  in  m  JiA, 
dr  bsh  §  315. 

J   ■ 


70| 

ID 


<  °"- 


I  honey. 


king  of  lower 
'^  Egypt. 


hw 

bnrt 

btiTi 

bhs 


cf.  6/ 

J^  place  (§  103). 

l|   I   I    (§  28)  date. 


1% 


date  wine. 


calf. 


bk(bikl)'^^       servant; 

bk    cm    "the     servant 
there"  i.  e.  "I." 

bd-t         l^"^^"^^  spelt  (kind 
I    iO    o  o  o  of  wheat). 


D  ^ 
pt  heaven, 

t        ) 

P^        ;J^  "^    §  ^^• 
PU)        □%  §  87. 


p    D 
pr 


Py        □  U  t]  M>  flea. 


pn 


°      § 
D 


AAftAAA 

Erman,  Eg:ypt.  gramm. 


^^ 


(  I 1  j     house, 

also  for  possessions. 

P'>'-H     CTID  ?  imi        "silver 

house"  i.  e.  treasury. 

^  ^^^A    (Illae    inf.) 

go    out,    depart   (from 
the  way,  &c.). 


pry 


prom- 


inent?? 


Dd 


I 


50* 


GLOSSART. 


pr't        ^^>o  winter  (one  of 

the  three  seasons). 
pr4        '^\J/'\\\  (abbr.)  fruits. 

vrt-Snw  V   />        L&>  "hair 

^  _MI1I|  I  Mil 

fruit"    as    name    of    a 
fruit. 

f™(?)  T  <»"'"••*  ""^"'-^ 

for  the  dead. 


ph 


arrive  at,  attain  to. 


ph-U      d|  -^^  (abb'^-  *3^) 


dual:  strength. 


Ph^ 


divide ; 


caus.  spliB  ht  purge. 


phr-t 

p7ir-t(l) 
ps 
psJi 
pk-t 

ptn 
pth-Mp 


D     <= 
(abbr. 


I   I   I 


O)  remedy. 

>lll 


n 


g    troop,  or 
I   I   1  sim. 


3    Q  (§  159)  to 
^'4  ctpfst. 


cook 


bite. 


j       finest 
I      linen. 


l.^T 


D  ^(\/\ri  n.  1. 

is  satisfied"  n.  pr.  m. 


/ 


/«'  ^^  belong, large, 

broad;  of  the  heart  "be 
glad". 


sents,  or  sim. 


fnd 

fb 
fd 


n.  pr.  m. ;  pr- 
/fi  n.  1. 


loosen;  go  fur- 
_j\  ther,  or  sim. 

pull  out. 

1^^ D 


m 


§  307. 


Negation  §  375. 


GLOSSARY. 


51* 


§  183  behold. 


mi         ^ 

mSw 


new. 


self,  recur. 


.^1 


renew 


mi         ^'^  (I^  ^e    gem.) 
see. 


mBC       ^^  in  rdcmSC  cc.  obj. 
offer  up  something. 


mt-tw 


ml-tt 


mc-w 


\P^\  one  like  (§  135. 
^  ^  137). 

^^|^(§137)thatwhich 
is  like  (something);  m 
mttt  "likewise". 


true. 


for 


^   \ 

P|§48(abbr.^^) 


m^Ct 


truth,  justice. 

m^C-t    A   (abbr.)  goddess    of 
Yl  truth. 

miC- 
hrw 


o    III 


daily  (food). 


AAAAAA 

- 0 


etc.  of.  mnt. 


§  312. 


;wwvv  (§  111)  water. 

'1 


A     (abbr. 

)  "true  of 
voice"  i.  e.  declared 
just,  appellation  of  the 
dead. 


'f\  bum,  or 
v  sim. 


mi/t 

ml         ^l^inhhr.  0)§314 


trnvt 


m  m 


mn 


mn 


mn-t 


mother, 
die. 


>'*°m^ 


§315. 


i'^^*^ 


(i^^^    abbr.) 


remain. 

^^%6    suffer    (cc. 
obj,:  with  something.) 

'       '  /~^  diseased 

AAA/v\A  ^tt^  place. 
Dd* 


52* 


GLOSSARY. 


mni        '' '■' 

{mini)         AAAAAA 


qi 


(§  62) 


to    land 


marry,  or  sim.    (cc.  m 

anyone). 
mni        a^^ 
(mini)    /wvAAA 

(euphemistic  for  die) 

mnl4      ^^^l\^^    kind    of 

(mlnfi)    /w^A^^    ?       ^11 

musical  instrument. 
ntn-w      i^^^    (§  104  A)    plur. 
(mlnWi)DOD  monuments. 


mr-tO) 


mnmn-t  ^r^^^^lher*!' 

A     excellent,    or 

sim.;    caus.   make    ex- 
cellent. 

1.1      1^    jju    god  01 
■war. 


mnh 

mntw 
mr 

mr 
mr 

mr 

mr 

mr 


c^ 


K^ii^) 


overseer. 
,  canal. 

I — C  Vft 


people,    or 
sill  sim. 


? 


"'^^^^  be  sick, 


be  sad. 


--^  mourning, 
^^fe^  suffering. 


mr 


mrc 

mrw'i- 
tnsi 


mry-t 
mrh-t 

mh 

mh-tt 
ms 


'  Thou  (belongs  per- 
haps to  an  other  word 
of  mas.  gen.). 

abbr.^  (Ulae  inf.)    to 

love,  desire;  mr^  ntr 
"beloved  of  god",  priest- 
ly title. 

''^^(If©  Egypt. 

<CZ>  -21      I  AA/\AAA  I        1   CU. 

n.  pr.  m. 

"^^[JH^dyke. 

grease,  oil. 

fill,  be  full. 

«x=>^      northern,  north 

O  W       (§  137). 

(Illae  inf.)  bear,  give 
birth  to. 


GLOSSABY. 


53* 


ms-io 


J  ren. 


ms-yt     ipijlj 


o 


I  I  I 


I     kind    of 
)| 
food  which  was  eaten 

on  stated  (?)  evenings. 

*"*^  ^^  ~^  J\  bring 
on  or  near;  play  (an 
instrument). 


msdm-t 

msdd 

mk 

mt 


cosmetic. 


II 


eye 


- a 

o  \ 


Ulllaegem.) 
il  to  hate. 
(§  13  B)  pro- 
tect. 


organ  (of  body.) 


mtn 


mtn 


mtr 


m 


tB 


mdw 


AAAAAA  i      (T"^     I     I     I 

way,  road. 
I  1^ 


sheikh  of  the  Bedouins, 
or  sim. 


give  testi- 
mony (cc,  obj.  about 
anyone). 

V    ^  to 
challenge??  to  insult?? 
speak. 


md-t 
{mdw-tl)l}    c^ 

matter,  affair. 


speech, 
mdni-t    ^  ^^^^  (]  j^  ©  n.  1. 


n  /wwv\  ( )  §  306. 

n'i        AAAAAA  of  the  gen.  §  125. 
^  -^  (Xdi;^)  §  364  ff. 


n-tCi)    ^     city. 
n-fi      §  §  134  urban. 


AAAAAA 

nB         1K    §  94. 


^^ 


nCC 
nCffwl 
ny-t      H  Ij 


of.  nd. 

'^      '(?)  abbr.  powder,  or 
O  III  Sim. 

AAAAAA         r^      1  1 

'-'   kernel,  grain, 
Ill  or  Sim. 

)   lord,  master. 


64* 

nh-kBw-  ^  ^ ^  \    i , 

T}^         O  ^^^^^^  I I  I         name 

BC        ^  III 

of  an  unknown  king. 
nb  ^^— ^  everj',  all. 

nb  f^^^^^^iii  gold. 

nb-p       FS^  [J  (J  goldsmith. 

199). 


GLOSSARY. 


nfr         t  "^^^  (t  abbr.  § 


good,  beautiful,  be  good. 

AAAAAA 

cry  out, 
to    low. 


nmi         (  ^^\  (1 J 

AAAAAA 


_— ^  1 

[=^^  °  (cf.  sC)  name  of 

.- Oil  I  the  Bedouins. 


***^^       I  ^v  I  f^  »^orphan. 


nn 
nr 

nh 

nh-w 

nh-t 


AAA/WA' 
AAA/WA  /OS  _ 

<c=:>  ^       strength, 
manhood,  or  sim. 

AAAAAA  O 

(iJ  "^^111  something. 

ra 

or  sim. 
[— I  a  U  sycomore. 

AAA/v^A 


lack,  mis- 
fortune, 


w7«m 
nhh 

nh-tvt 
nhb-t 

nht 

nht 
nht 

nht 

ns 

nsr-t 


-Dtakeaway, 
^  -S'^       or  sim. 


V  j  eternity. 


^     com- 
Hi'  plaint  ? 

)  titulary. 


X  I  I   I 


(/vwvvN    n 
®  J 

alary. 
(^>=/l   abbr.) 


ngS-w 

nti 
nt-t 


be  strong,  stifif. 

^-^fc/^M5ihero. 

W=^       abbr.      might, 
i:2i     victory. 

AAA/\AA 

"^^^■^  n,  pr.  m. 
•'^    (§  139)  possess. 

n  [^  flame  (as 

name  of  the  royal  ser- 
pent, the  symbol  of  the 
royal  rank). 

n.  1. 

^  §  401  flf, 

^^  §  382.  401.  404. 


^^ 


nt-pr-hd 


ntf 


nts 


ntk 


ntr 


(§  103) 


that  which  belongs  to 
the  treasury  i.  e.  costly 
furnishing,  or  sim. 

o     §  84. 

c^    aaaaaap^  sprinkle? 

AAAAA^ 

^     §  84. 


1(10 


god. 


"#-«    ^t|lj^ 


littleness, 


nd 


ndm 
ndm 
ndnd 

nds 


ICpH 


triturate ; 


55* 

t 


1 
)\nd  snCC  rub 


fine  (on  the  palette). 


sweet. 


be  well. 


AAAAA^    AAAAAA        I 

counsel,  or  sire 

AAAAAA  r\ 


to 


be  small. 


ri'(?) 


rC 


<=>  §  308. 
<:Z>   particle    of    em- 
phasis (§  348.  349). 

.  mouth,  opening. 
In  ri"  n  Ktnt  affairs?? 
language??  In  rS  n 
wBt  =  ? 

O 


sun,  sungod.    (most 


proper  names  made 
with  rC  are  to  be  found 
under  the  second  word 
in  the  name). 


rC-ms- 
sw 

rw-t 


rwd 


jlP^n.pr.m. 


Bamses. 


exterior, 


or  sim.    rwt'i  writ  part 
of  the  palace. 

<=>'^(|j^    (irreg.) 


grow;  caus 


srivd   and    srd:   make 
grow,  restore. 


66* 


GLOSSARY. 


rpC.n    ^      (^  abbr.)   \  ^p-t   ['^      ([o,     [,     [g) 


hereditary  prince,  or 
sim.  (title  of  the  no- 
bility). 


r-pw  0\\%  121. 

r-pn-t  unknown 

I      AA/^A^^S  I 

local  name. 


year. 


r-pr 


rmt 


I     I  v 

temple. 


•weep. 


rh 


rh 


D 


Oj 


(niaeinf.) 


know,  be  learned. 

^       cans,      de- 
^li  nounce. 
^^^~>  scholar,  wise 
>r    man. 


south,  cf.  tp-rs. 

o 
4>     southern  grain,  i.  e. 

Sill  ^ 

barley. 


rs-wt  v\  lov. 


'^^^jD     (§    64.    97) 
o    I   1   I  people. 


f/c 


,o 


time  of  anything, 


/SAAft/\AC_l!  \a/VAAAA 


XA/VAAAAy 


epoch. 
»-<i  ^  <?  legs,  feet. 

rit  ^         ^  cf.  di. 

a  \l^ aJ 


h  ra 


h^        HJ  ^\  j\  descend,  (also 

of  going  on  board  ship) ; 
enter. 

h^'W    rU^X  'vN""^^^ pi.  time 
or  place  of  a  thing. 

^b      rU^^.    J  La  send,  send 
as  messenger. 


1  ^  band. 

hb  rn  1-5^  to  plow? 

hp     ^^  law, 

hnw     '  ^  O  V\    earthen  vessel. 

AAAAAA  /T       I 

hrw     ^  ^^  (Oabbr.)day. 


57* 


h 


h-t  \  I — I  large  house,  castle. 
lit  ntr  temple. 

Ai  1i/^'fex^d()  particle  (?) 
of  wishing:  "if  only",  or 
aim. 

increase,  addition. 

\      ^       take    as 
^_ a  booty. 

AC        " 


hb 


h^k 


Q     I  body. 


hC  (?) 


^J) 


cc.m:  begin  here 


(as  superscription). 

hC-t     ■ ^  beginning;  m  hCt 

o^     I  and  hr  hCt  §  315. 

hCfi    ■ ^  abbr.  prince,  (as  title 

fl  of  the  nobility). 


hCp      ^ 


hCti     =^ 
o\\ 


n  AAAAAA 

AAAAAA     Nile. 


!^  heart. 


'-n\^'i  (m 


strike. 


hivr-w 


Jffi 


feast  cf.Ar-A6. 


A  -idJ  /]  mourn  for? 

^5s      i  J  P     N  '  *o  clothe. 


I  I    I  )  garment. 


embrace. 
nut  serpent. 
Am      ^t\  N,     rudder. 


X 


hm-t 


^ 


woman,  wife. 

salt. 

! 

obstruct,    or 
sim. 

hn        y  I    majesty  or  sim.  (cir- 
cumlocution for  king), 
slave,  servant. 


hm^-t 


/\  AAAAAA 


hn 


AAAAAA 

hnC       ^  §  314.  120.  279. 


hnw     Q     \^  O^'^'^^^  things, 


pauper. 


58* 


GLOSSARY. 


Ci         yC.  A/W\AA 


hns 


hnk 


I   AA/\AAA  J-1 
!0 

n 


hnn-stn  J.  ^J  '^  n.l. 

(Heracleopolis). 


narrow. 


to   offer, 


AAAAW  C 

present. 


^1 


hntSsw 


hr 


hr-t 


AAWV\ 

bed? 

^^ 

AAAAA^    L^ 

"=5=1^^  lizard. 


1 


^  §  309. 
I 

^    w 


existent 


i^ g  above 


upper 
part. 


kr-w 

hr-dSd^'^^  §  315 

hri-dBdS  "^  ^  chief  j  overlord. 


hr-yt 

hr 
hr-nb 


superior 


§  316. 


^  terror, 

•n-i   I   I 

Horus,  title  of  tbe 
king. 

title  of  the  king. 


[hr-w^wt]  cf.  iv^-wt. 


hs 
hst 


hsst 


hs 

hsb 

hsmn 

m-t 

hk-t 
hkS 


n 


(III  ae  inf.) 
to  pi-aise. 


Y  I  ^iii  Qj\  )  approba- 
tion, sign  of  favor. — ir 
hstf  "do  according  to 
his  wish". 


praise, 
or  sim. 


praised. 


approach,  or 
_/j    sim. 

O)    abbr.    reckoning, 
,   w. ,  cf.  tp-hsb. 

vilo 


AAAAAA  vii/  I  I  I    Vvy/  Q       III 

abbr.  ^  natron. 


) 


name    of  a 
goddess. 

^11! 
abbr.  \  beer. 


a>  5 


M) 


ruler,  prince. 


OLOSSABT. 


59* 


hJcn^     0  o"^  ^praise. 

A  AAAAAA  /T    y  W 


Mp-t 

htp 


o  n 


o  D, 


be  satisfied, 
oflfering. 


'( 


o  D I  1  I Vo  D 
abbr.  \     offering;    htp 

ntr    offering   (for   the 
gods). 


htm 

hdbl 

hd 
hd 


cans,  destroy,  or  sim. 

feiJVi    (cc.    hr) 
arrive  at?? 

Y  TTj)  become  light. 
T       I  lessen,  or  sim. 


h  m  and 


h-t 
h^w 


cf.  iht. 


thousand. 
hSm    ®T  % 


let  (the 
arms) 


hw8 


hpr 


pi^v 


,p^ 


(for 


A—n 


)  build. 


h^r-t 
hCte 


droop,  or  sim 

I  (S  abbr.)  shine. 


S 

e 


wi- 
dow. 


pi.  bright- 
111 

ness;  coronation;  weap- 
ons. 

Au;-«(?)C^'^  ^  I  the  bad. 


hprt 

hfn 

hm 
hm 


^     (^  abbr.)  become, 

be;  hpr  dsf  begetting 
himself;  caus.  shpr 
create. 

(^  ^^  that  which 
Or?  1  ^  1  happens. 


I  c^ 


§  7.  313. 

^^  (§  7)  enemy, 
not  to  know. 

Ignorant one. 


60* 


GLOSSARY. 


km 
limC 

hms 


'M 


be  hot. 

- — a        flee? 
J\    attack? 

,a fl    bend, 


bow,  or  sim. 


hmt     C^=^  —  think,  intend  or 
c>,     - 
sim.  (§  52.  141). 

nn  vK    ^A  apparent- 

ly  a  pleonastic  addition 
with  words  of  speaking; 
hn  n  mdivt  for  simple 
mdwt. 


hnt'i 
hn 


^W 


figure,  statue. 


A 


(cc.  m)  meet,  hit 
upon,  or  sim. 


hn-w    AT>  DV^  CnH  interior, 

AAAAA^         _Zl 

interior  of  a  house ;  court 
of  the  king. 


hn-Cl 


interior     of 


- Qt 


the  arms,  i.  e.  embrace? 
hnmw  Q^  j|   god  Chnum. 

hnms 


hnt 


AAAAAA  VJ  _Cr^   I 

friend,  or  sim. 


hnt-i 

hnt 
hnty-t 

hnd 

hr 
hr-t 


hr 
hr 
hr 
hr-'i 


[\  existent  in  front, 


harem. 


hntt  tmntiw  cf.  Imnti. 

journeyup-stream,  jour- 
ney toward  the  south. 

d^  ^  ^     Step 
(on  anything). 
®     §  311. 

that  belong- 


ing to  something,  §msio 
n  hrt  thf  favorite  ser- 
vant, one  trusted, 

®  J^  to  fall. 
®    ^^   §  325. 

^     §  310. 

/I\  ..      having   some- 
<:zr>      thing. 


hr-t-hrio 


/i\   e   ra 


o 


<=>  I  I  1  <=: 

that  which  is  daily ;  (lit. 

that  which  has  the  day). 


hrw 


J 


61* 


hrp 


hr-hb 


hrd 


hh 
hs 


be  first;  hrp 

lb  possessed  of  a  good 
understanding  and  dis- 
position, or  sim. ;  offer, 
sacrifice. 

(for    ^ 


X     1 )  kind  of  priest. 

aP^  abbr.^  children. 
Ill  J 

©if 

I  neck. 


^^  (niae    inf.) 
be  wretched. 


8-t 
s-t-C 

s-t-wrt 
s-t-Hr 


i 


Ir'i  correct, 


seat,  place ;  m  st 


i 


Imiiw  st-C 


kind  of  priest. 


l|^^^=f_^1   name 


in. 


fl  ^v  *^^^*  I 


n    of 

J    the 
throne. 


^^    (cc.  obg.)   to  re- 
pulse;   (cc.    n)    punish 


anyone,  or  sim. 


ksm 

ht 
hf 

hd 
and 


holy    of 


holies  in  the  temple, 
tree,  wood. 

§  315 ;  afterward, future. 


fl 


[st-ir] 

si 
sB-nht 

sB-t 


to    journey 

down    stream,  journey 
toward  north. 


[j-<S5-  cf.  Ws-tr. 
'5  back;  m  sB  %  315 


son. 
A«Xn.pr. 

ra^y^  m. 

son  of  the  sycomore. 

daughter. 
*^^  goose  (cf.  Bpd). 


62* 

si 

8^i 


S^k 


StJ? 


(cc.    m) 
defend  one's  self  against. 


cf.  sti. 


designation  of  anything 
bad. 


land,  arrive  at. 
together,  or  sim. 
(§  62)  recognize. 


to 


draw 


sip-n      ll(J"\\i       inspection, 
]iz^      U    or  aim. 


] 


§80. 


swnl  n.  1. 


1^ 


swrt 

s6  -TT- 


to  drink. 


lead. 


J^ 


I  I  I 

I 

I  lice  ?  ? 


s6i 

sbS-w 

sbB-yt 
shB 


■^  ^\  ^  to  teach;  cc. 
r  train  as.  (trans.) 

^^'^^  teach- 
ing.  (substantive?) 

'^     teach- 


sbh 


spr 
spr 

8f 


i=£=3  mg. 
door. 

y\  cry  out. 


m 

^    su  2,  sign  that  the 
II 
preceding    word   is    to 

be  repeated  in  reading; 
sp  pw  for  the  intro- 
duction of  a  courteous 
proposal  ("here  is  an 
opportunity  to  .  .  ."). 


rive  at. 


o 


^  (cc.  n)  request 
ill  anyone. 

yesterday. 


GLOSSARY. 


sfisf^?)^ 


^'^^^  be  mild,  or 
<£)    ^11  sim. 
sm-t       ^^^^-^     desert,     foreign 
c^     I  land. 

swi-fi    i  lit.  "uniting  of 

land";    unknown   local 
designation. 

smB-id'i  ^^  uniter,  i.  e.  lord 

of    upper    and     lower 
Egypt. 


sniB 


smi 


smwn 


to  slaught^. 


D 


cream,  or  sim. 


smr 


-*—^\    -i^^^oj^ /\  pro. 

bably  an  expression  of 
deprecation  (like,  "Per- 
mit me")  or  of  doubt 
(like,  "perhaps"). 

)  a  rank 


? 


at  court 

AAAA/V\ 


cans,  ssn 
£s   breathe. 


sn-nw 


n     to  trespass. 

AAAAAA     _/Ji 

the      second 
(§  145). 


10 


sn 


snwh 


1^   (I ) 

ion. 

1®^ 


63* 

bro- 
ther; 


to 


snbt 

snbw 

snf 

sntr 

sntr 

snd 

snd 


companion 

— •* —  P' 

AAAAAA 

warm,  cook,  or  sim. 

p7'|(|la6br.)b, 
healthy,    cf.  Cnh. 

r\   AAAAAA  Pi 

M     J    (1  n.  pr.  m. 

r»    AAAAAA   .sy 

|1    J     ^n.pr.m. 

AAAAAA        rt^^^^ 


fill 


blood. 


AAAAAA  < >|  1  I 


in- 
cense. 


^^q7\  to  fear. 


I  abbr, 


) 


prince,  or  sim.  (desig- 
nation of  an  officer  of 
rank). 


shw 


HWi 


unite. 


64* 


aLOSBABT. 


sh-Vi 

shm 
shr 


W 


peasant. 

\  (cc.  obj.) 
remember  anything. 

memory. 


y  W=/l  mighty,  or  sim. 


overlay 
with. 


I    v^    I 


A 


open. 


cf.  nd. 


scribe. 


lead. 


8sm-w 


is-t 


skm 


leader. 


St 

St 


n  ^ a  mu- 

sical  instrument  of  the 
women  (sistrumi). 

ing  grey  (noun). 
1^  §  82. 

1  "*^  ^ a  shoot. 


8t-lW 


I  Bedouins. 


St^ 

stwh 

stp 

stn 

8tny-t 
sd 
sdm 
sdm 

sdr 


tO    swelling. 

y^mA  iA 


to  treat 


J  bring  c 

(medically)  or  sim. 
1  {!> — s  abbr.) 

select. 

I    AAAAAAVJ.      \    I  AAAAAA      Ci 

abbr.  )  king  of  upper 

Egypt,  king. 

luOo  kingdom. 

■~*^  f^ijp        ^  clothe, 
c-"=^^     1  or  sim. 

^^^.  hear. 

apply    cos- 


metic to. 

,abbr.  be  at  night; 


to  sleep. 


J 


65* 


s   I   w   1 


sC 
ho 
sw 


Sfto-t 


Sm 


Smw 


or  sim. 

Mil' 


c^^p"^  swine. 
KV    food, 


=^  dig,  or 
^W=^  sim. 


Sms.o    ^\a'^{^\'§) 


§ms-Er 


follower 


sand. 
Ill 

-^^^  (cc.  m)  free 
from. 


servant. 

of  Horus,  i.  e.    people 
of  mythic  time. 

X    r^.  (nae  gem.) 
revolve  about,  or  sim. 


p^°d,.. 


"^^^^M^i  hum- 


cnn- 

ble  one  (not  of  highest 
rank)? 


Sn-w 


^   ^\\      (  ^ 

) 
Snw-tS     IC\, 


A/SA/SAA 

abbr.  )  hair. 


"ground- 


I  I  In   nil 

hair"  name  of  fruit 


M\ 


that  which 
I  I   I 

is    splendid,  or  sim.  as 

designation      of     food 

furnished  by  the  king. 

I   \\   I 

the 


S 


i^v-i      X  gn^nv  ss  con. 

courtiers. 


§nC 


r-vr 


itch,  or  sim. 


^^    (IHae    inf.) 
go,    go    to 
anyone,  go  away. 

I   \\   I 

AAAAAA  summer   (one    of 


I'-^-O  designation 

of         locality        like, 
"margin"  or  sim. 

Sndyt       9    e^y^'Tf' 

AAAAAA  I      1  I 

i^  *^^^-)  *P^o°- 
sr  -^^  be  small. 


the  three  seasons). 
Erman,  Egrypt.  gianim. 


Ss^ 


U  fine  linen. 

I  I   I  I 

£e 


66* 


GLOSSARY. 


I^\M:'-       tl 


rrri 

cleverness,  or  sini. 

r^^- D  receive;  ssp 

D 
Jcsiv  crouch,  or  sim. 


§§ 


form,     figure 
of  a  god,  or  sim. 
I    \\   I 


n.  pv.  f. 


k  A 


§  315. 


%, 


boat,  or  sim. 
kl  A 


kbb 


A 


.11  Ofl 


kn 


kd 


C^^   perhaps  "bath"? 

(lit.  cooling,  or  sim).  kdm 


\\    J^    AAAAAft 
AA^/V\A 


abbr.  \  create. 

X  be  strong. 

AAAAAA 

bad,  or  sim. 

circle;  personality. 

Cans,  skd  to  sail. 


sP^^n.  1.  (nnR 
^       east?) 


k-y 
kt-iht 


^q. 


im.,  f.,      /c^ 


^^^1  pi.  another, 
others. 


fei 


u 

I 

human  spirit 


I   1   1  I   k^ij-t 

A  (CO.  obj.) 

think  (of  something). 


A    j^      kind      of 
ai 
"Ht?T>  steer. 

U 


km 


'  I  dun<:. 
I  or  sim. 
Vtx  black 
jiL  cf.  skm. 


GLOSSARY. 


67* 


km-t       r     I 

o 


^  Egypt. 


g^-U      (3  Q  -'^K,.    designation 

of  something  injurious, 
perhaps,  need,  lack, 
cf.  logB, 

mo         Z5  (1  %  ^    name  of 
a  plant. 

abbr.  J  find,  come  upon. 

catch  sight  of. 


g  S 

g*' 


gmv  "-^  O 

AAAAAA 

of  a  bird 


ffrg 
ffs 


ks-to       ^^z::^U^rh     incli- 
nation of  the  body. 


s 


be      silent, 


Kaus.    sgr   to    silence. 
nb-sgr  name  of  Osiris. 


§  321. 


s 


X^ 


furnish ; 


grg     pr     establish     a 
household. 

^  ill  "«• 

side,   half,    r  gs 


§  315. 

— »^ 
anoint. 


S 


V — H — - — uy 


t  ^ 


(       )  bread. 

earth,  land. 
s:     I  

DmxADx  s) 

boundary. 


tiv 


§  80. 


(ttch)      cf.  stwh. 
twt 

tp 


statue. 

^   upon  §  .314;    tp  m 
§  316. 

Be* 


68* 
tp 

tp-'i 

tp'iw- 
Ctv'i 

tp-t 
tp-tt 

tm 
tm 


^  tp  rs  southern  pro- 
vince, or  sim.  tp  hsb 
correct  computation, 
correctness. 

^    /  ^  \  the-first,  first 
D  \\  \ll/  month. 

ancestors. 


head. 


q9 

of  oil. 


"^^"-^^v"^^^ 


( 


^°?^)ki 


I  o 


kind 


close  up, 
or  sim. 


^11   "•  ^\      Negation    § 
376,  tm  rcll  §  377. 


t 


^ Q 


take. 


(vizier,  or  sim.). 


tn 
tn 
tniv 

tnt 
tr 

th 
tkn 

tti 
ts 


J  dress  hair,       . 
or  sim. 

highest  official,   i   fg^^ 


man,  male  child. 


tsw 
tsm 


§  86. 

AA^AA^   §   80 
I      I      I 

n.  1. 


r^^^ 


c^ 


AA/SAAA 
CI 


time. 


A  i^  old  age.  or 
1  I  Jl  sim. 


l—  <^^  to  trespass. 


/■~\        AAAAAA 


7^ 


(cc.    m)  aji- 


proach 


[1  n.  pr.  m. 


ZI 


raise,  lift 
up. 

^^^"^^^    vertebra   of  the 
I     n  spinal  column. 

\\  proverbs. 

i=«>=3-f\     /  -?■  e   officer, 
r  or  sim. 


i:^ 


hound. 


difV 


1T^ 

constrain,  compel,  or  sim. 


d^b 


figs. 


JO 


GLOSSARY. 


69* 


dl 


A 


(a D,   . fl)  (also 

rdi,  dldi  §  160):  give; 
deliver  over ;  give  back ; 
express;  set  down,  lay 
down;  cause  that;  per- 
mit that,  r  rdtt  in 
order  that. 


didt 
didlw 
dtvS 
dwS-t 

dion 

do 

dbS 


i< 


i< 


n.  pr.  m. 
O  morning. 


r\A      praise; 

Chnwfi    dwJt    part    of 
the  palace. 

^ ^  ^^   A      spread 

A/^\AAA  out. 


restore,  pay. 


horn. 


dbB-i 


dt 


o^  M  eternity. 


dpt 
dpt 
dm 

dm  I 

dml 
dr 

'   dkr 

dgS 
1  dBls-io 


payment,    income,     or 
aim. 

let?," 


stop  up. 

\    £\A  taste. 

Do         V  ^/ 

^"^^  w^       l^iiid      of 
D  o  ship. 

make  mention,  to  name. 
c-'=^  1/  (J  n — fl    touch, 
meet  with,  or  sim. 
\\       city. 

(cc.    hr)    expell    from, 

vanquish,  or  sim. 

A 
^=^>  d?= 

see. 


s 


fruit. 


(l-t 


''^"^  a^wj  coll.  peasant-   j 

™v.   1   I  ry,  orsim.      ■  ^^._^ 

X 

sail  across. 


wise  man,  or  sim. 

name  of 
o   III 

a  fruit. 


70* 

d\o 

dhS 

dfB 

drw 

dr 

dr 

dlmti- 
ms 


kind  of  vessel. 

,/K  ■ 

J.yy  J    wind. 

cf.  rfZ/i. 

food. 

boundary,  end,  or  sim. 

(^  r  drf  as  far  as 

its  end)  i.  e.  all,  whole. 

^      §  314  cf.  hSh. 

^(^_^    n.   pr.   m. 
""■^  1  I  Thutmosis. 


ds- 
dsr 


(Id 
ddw 

ddb 


^^    §  85.    self. 

^|]     (Wabbr.) 

magnificent,  or  sim. 
Caus.  sdsr  beautify,  or 
sim.  t^-dsr  name  of  the 
necropolis. 

'"'-=*.  speak,  say.  Caus. 
r-=^\  to  talk. 


(I 


®  ^  n.  1.  (Busiris). 

^^    1 1_ _Q  occurring 

as     parallel      to     "as- 
semble". 


UNKNOff'N  PHONETIC  VALUE. 


name  of  a  musical- 
instrument. 

O    the    day     (only    in 

dates). 


clothing, 
or  sim. 


village,  or  sim 


UNKNOWN  READING. 


kind  of 
cry. 


n^. 


.kind  of  under 
L  official. 


PRINTED   BY   W.    DKUGOLIN,    LEIPZIG. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


Erman,  Adolf 

Egyptian  grammar  with 
table  of  signs.., 
t.  Breasted 


\^i^^^